WO2020001577A1 - Method and communication device for transmitting and receiving channel state information - Google Patents

Method and communication device for transmitting and receiving channel state information Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2020001577A1
WO2020001577A1 PCT/CN2019/093497 CN2019093497W WO2020001577A1 WO 2020001577 A1 WO2020001577 A1 WO 2020001577A1 CN 2019093497 W CN2019093497 W CN 2019093497W WO 2020001577 A1 WO2020001577 A1 WO 2020001577A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
csi
reference signal
measurement reports
measurement
reported
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2019/093497
Other languages
French (fr)
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
施弘哲
金黄平
毕晓艳
Original Assignee
华为技术有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 华为技术有限公司 filed Critical 华为技术有限公司
Publication of WO2020001577A1 publication Critical patent/WO2020001577A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04BTRANSMISSION
    • H04B7/00Radio transmission systems, i.e. using radiation field
    • H04B7/02Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas
    • H04B7/04Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas
    • H04B7/0413MIMO systems
    • H04B7/0452Multi-user MIMO systems
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04BTRANSMISSION
    • H04B7/00Radio transmission systems, i.e. using radiation field
    • H04B7/02Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas
    • H04B7/04Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas
    • H04B7/06Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas at the transmitting station
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04BTRANSMISSION
    • H04B7/00Radio transmission systems, i.e. using radiation field
    • H04B7/02Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas
    • H04B7/04Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas
    • H04B7/06Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas at the transmitting station
    • H04B7/0613Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas at the transmitting station using simultaneous transmission
    • H04B7/0615Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas at the transmitting station using simultaneous transmission of weighted versions of same signal
    • H04B7/0617Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas at the transmitting station using simultaneous transmission of weighted versions of same signal for beam forming
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04BTRANSMISSION
    • H04B7/00Radio transmission systems, i.e. using radiation field
    • H04B7/02Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas
    • H04B7/04Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas
    • H04B7/06Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas at the transmitting station
    • H04B7/0613Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas at the transmitting station using simultaneous transmission
    • H04B7/0615Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas at the transmitting station using simultaneous transmission of weighted versions of same signal
    • H04B7/0619Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas at the transmitting station using simultaneous transmission of weighted versions of same signal using feedback from receiving side
    • H04B7/0621Feedback content
    • H04B7/0626Channel coefficients, e.g. channel state information [CSI]
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04LTRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L5/00Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W16/00Network planning, e.g. coverage or traffic planning tools; Network deployment, e.g. resource partitioning or cells structures
    • H04W16/24Cell structures
    • H04W16/28Cell structures using beam steering
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W24/00Supervisory, monitoring or testing arrangements
    • H04W24/10Scheduling measurement reports ; Arrangements for measurement reports

Definitions

  • the present application relates to the field of wireless communication, and more particularly, to a method and a communication device for transmitting and receiving channel state information.
  • the sender and receiver can obtain the gain through beamforming.
  • the transmitting end and the receiving end can obtain the pairing relationship between the transmitting beam and the receiving beam through beam training.
  • the receiving end can report a part of the reference signal resources with a larger reference signal receiving power to the transmitting end, so that the transmitting end can transmit data or information. Use the beam pairing relationship with better channel quality to send and receive signals.
  • network devices want to be able to obtain more information about beam pairing in order to perform more reasonably Beam management for greater gain in beamforming.
  • the present application provides a method and a communication device for transmitting and receiving channel state information, so as to obtain more correspondences between transmitting beams and receiving beams, so as to perform beam management more reasonably, and thereby obtain a beam forming gain to a greater extent. .
  • a method for sending channel state information includes: generating one or more CSI, each CSI includes one or more groups of measurement reports, each group of measurement reports is obtained based on a reference signal received by a spatial receiving filter, and is included in a total group of the measurement reports; When the number is multiple groups, multiple spatial receiving filters corresponding to each group of measurement reports are different from each other; and the one or more CSIs are sent.
  • the method of the first aspect may be executed by a terminal device, or may be executed by a chip configured in the terminal device, which is not limited in this application.
  • a method for receiving CSI includes: receiving one or more CSI, each CSI includes one or more groups of measurement reports, each group of measurement reports is obtained based on a reference signal measurement received by a spatial receiving filter, and each group of measurement reports corresponds to a plurality of The spatial receiving filters are different from each other; according to the one or more CSIs, it is determined that each group of measurement reports corresponds to a spatial receiving filter, and when multiple groups of measurement reports are received, the space corresponding to each group of measurement reports Receive filters are different from each other.
  • the method in the second aspect may be executed by a network device, or may be executed by a chip configured in the network device, which is not limited in this application.
  • a spatial transmission filter can be understood as a transmission beam.
  • the terminal device can perform channel measurement and reporting based on the reference signal received by each receiving beam, so that the network device can obtain more information about the pairing relationship between the transmitting beam and the receiving beam.
  • the network device can perform beam management more reasonably according to the beam pairing relationship, thereby obtaining a gain of beamforming to a greater extent.
  • the network device can select the transmission beams corresponding to different reception beams to communicate with different terminal devices according to the pairing relationship between the transmission beams and the reception beams, so that interference between multiple users can be avoided to the greatest extent, that is, the interference resistance is improved. On the whole, it helps to improve system performance.
  • each group of measurement reports may include at least one or more of the following: identification of at least one reference signal resource, and at least one reference signal reception power (RSRP) information.
  • RSRP reference signal reception power
  • the reference signal resource may be used to configure transmission attributes of the reference signal.
  • Each reference signal resource may correspond to one or more reference signals, and the one or more reference signals may be transmitted on the same time-frequency resource.
  • the reference signal received power information is used to indicate the received power of the reference signal. For example, it can be reported in an absolute value or in a differential manner. This application does not limit this.
  • the method further includes: receiving first indication information, where the first indication information is used to indicate a first reporting manner, and the first reporting manner is based on spatial reception filtering Group report.
  • the method further includes: sending the first indication information, the first indication information is used to indicate the first reporting mode, and the first reporting mode is based on Group report of the spatial receive filter.
  • the terminal device may perform channel measurement and reporting based on the received first instruction information based on the reference signal received by each spatial receiving filter, so as to report the measurement reports corresponding to one or more spatial receiving filters to the network device, so that The correspondence between the receiving beam and the transmitting beam is obtained by the network device.
  • the first indication information is carried in a CSI report configuration (CSI report setting) of a radio resource control (RRC) message, or,
  • the first indication information is carried in a packet reporting parameter configured by the CSI reporting.
  • the first indication information is carried in one or more of the following: an RRC message, a media access control (MAC) control element ( control element (CE) and downlink control information (DCI).
  • RRC message a media access control (MAC) control element ( control element (CE)
  • CE control element
  • DCI downlink control information
  • first indication information listed above are merely examples, and should not constitute any limitation to this application.
  • the first indication information may also be carried through other signaling, and this application does not do this. limited.
  • the method further includes: receiving second instruction information, where the second instruction information is used to indicate one or more of the following parameters:
  • Parameter 1 Number of measurement report groups reported by each CSI
  • Parameter 3 The number of CSIs when a measurement report is reported through multiple CSIs.
  • the method further includes: sending second instruction information, where the second instruction information is used to indicate one or more of the following parameters:
  • Parameter 1 Number of measurement report groups reported by each CSI
  • Parameter 3 The number of CSIs when a measurement report is reported through multiple CSIs.
  • the terminal device can report the CSI to the network device in the following four ways:
  • Method 1 Report a CSI, where the CSI includes a set of measurement reports;
  • Method 2 Report a CSI, which includes multiple sets of measurement reports;
  • Method 3 Report multiple CSI, each CSI includes a set of measurement reports;
  • Manner 4 Report multiple CSIs. Each CSI includes multiple sets of measurement reports.
  • the terminal device When the terminal device adopts the first or second method, it can report CSI to the network device according to parameter 1. When the terminal device adopts the third method, it can report CSI to the network device according to parameter 2 or parameter 3. When the terminal device adopts the fourth method, it can report according to the parameter 1. Any two of parameters 2 and 3 report CSI to the network device.
  • the network device can obtain a measurement report obtained based on the measurement of multiple received beams, that is, it can obtain the correspondence between multiple received beams and transmitted beams. , Can improve the robustness of the beam pairing relationship, is conducive to improving the robustness of the communication system, and is also conducive to improving the transmission efficiency and user experience.
  • parameters 1, 2, and 3 listed above may be indicated by a network device, or may be defined in advance, such as a protocol definition, which is not limited in this application.
  • the method further includes: sending second instruction information, where the second instruction information is used to indicate one or more of the following:
  • Send capability information which is used to indicate one or more of the following parameters:
  • Parameter i the number of spatial receiving filters
  • Parameter ii the maximum number of groups of measurement reports reported by each CSI
  • Parameter iii the maximum value of the total number of groups of measurement reports reported by multiple CSIs.
  • Parameter iv the maximum number of CSIs when reporting measurement reports through multiple CSIs.
  • the method further includes: receiving second instruction information, where the second instruction information is used to indicate one or more of the following:
  • Send capability information which is used to indicate one or more of the following parameters:
  • Parameter i the number of spatial receiving filters
  • Parameter ii the maximum number of groups of measurement reports reported by each CSI
  • Parameter iii the maximum value of the total number of groups of measurement reports reported by multiple CSIs.
  • Parameter iv the maximum number of CSIs when reporting measurement reports through multiple CSIs.
  • the network device may determine the parameters 1 to 3 listed above according to the capability information reported by the terminal device. In other words, when the above parameters 1 to 3 are indicated to the terminal device by the network device, the above parameters 1 to 3 may be determined according to the capabilities of the terminal device.
  • each group of measurement reports further includes a group identifier, and each group identifier corresponds to a spatial receiving filter.
  • the network device By carrying the group identifier in the measurement report, it is convenient for the network device to understand the correspondence between each group of measurement reports and the receiving beam, and it is also convenient to understand the correspondence between the transmitting beam and the receiving beam. Perform beam management in order to obtain the gain of beamforming to a greater extent, which is conducive to improving system performance.
  • the correspondence relationship of the group identifier in the spatial receiving filter does not change within a predetermined period.
  • the predetermined period is any of the following:
  • the time interval between two CSI reports the two CSI reports satisfy: reporting under the same CSI reporting configuration, or reporting under the same CSI reporting configuration with the same time domain behavior parameter;
  • the time interval between two reference signal transmissions, the two reference signal transmissions satisfy: transmission based on the same reference signal resource configuration, or transmission based on the same reference signal resource set configuration, or transmission based on the same reference signal resource configuration, Or, based on the reference signal resource configuration transmission with the same time domain behavior parameter;
  • One CSI report configures the time interval from enabling to releasing
  • a specified length after a CSI report configuration is enabled
  • a specified length after a CSI resource configuration is enabled.
  • predetermined time period may also be predetermined by a network device. This application does not limit this.
  • the method further includes: receiving fourth instruction information, where the fourth instruction information is used to indicate a start time and a length of the predetermined period.
  • the method further includes: sending fourth instruction information, where the fourth instruction information is used to indicate a start time and a length of the predetermined period.
  • the network device may further indicate the start time and length of the predetermined period to the terminal device. It should be understood that the network device may also indicate the start time and end time, or the end time and length of the predetermined period to the terminal device.
  • the terminal device knows any two items of the start time, length, and end time, it can calculate the other one. Therefore, when the network device indicates the start time and length of the predetermined period to the terminal device through the third instruction information And any of the two items shall fall within the scope of protection of this application.
  • the predetermined time period may be indicated by the network device to the terminal device, or may be predefined, such as a protocol definition, which is not limited in this application.
  • the method further includes: receiving third indication information, where the third indication information is used to indicate multiple reference signal resources, and the multiple reference signal resources are composed of at least two The above measurement report is determined.
  • the method further includes: sending third indication information, where the third indication information is used to indicate multiple reference signal resources, and the multiple reference signal resources are composed of at least two The above measurement report is determined.
  • the multiple reference signal resources indicated by the third indication information may be used for beam diversity quality monitoring.
  • the network device can configure the reference signal resources corresponding to multiple receiving beams for the terminal device based on multiple sets of measurement reports reported by the terminal device, so that the terminal device can perform beam diversity quality monitoring based on the multiple receiving beams. Therefore, when the terminal equipment is tilted or turned over, which causes the reception quality of some of the receiving beams to decrease, other receiving beams can be used to evaluate the quality of the wireless link. Thereby, frequent failure recovery from entering the beam can be avoided, which is beneficial to improving the robustness of the beam pairing relationship, thereby improving the robustness of the transmission system, and improving the user experience.
  • the multiple reference signal resources indicated by the third indication information correspond to the multiple spatial receiving filters on a one-to-one basis.
  • each reference signal resource corresponds to a spatial receiving filter.
  • the multiple reference signal resources indicated by the third indication information include a first resource group and a second resource group, where only the first resource group
  • the measurement result of the reference signal is included in the statistics of the number of failed beams.
  • the number of multiple reference signal resources indicated by the third indication information may be I (I> 0 and I is an integer), and the I reference signal resources may be equal to J (I> J> 0 and J is an integer).
  • Space receiving filters may be included in The second resource group.
  • L L ⁇ J> 0 and L is an integer reference signal resources
  • the first resource group may include I-L reference signal resources.
  • the L reference signal resources in the second resource group may correspond to J spatial receiving filters
  • the I-L reference signal resources in the first resource group may correspond to at least one of the J spatial receiving filters.
  • the method further includes: receiving fifth indication information, where the fifth indication information is used to indicate multiple reference signal resources in the second resource group.
  • the method further includes: sending fifth indication information, where the fifth indication information is used to indicate multiple reference signal resources in the second resource group.
  • the fifth indication information may be used to indicate the number of multiple reference signal resources in the second resource group, or may be used to indicate the identifiers or indexes of multiple reference signal resources in the second resource group. This application does not limit this.
  • Indicating multiple reference signal resources in the second resource group to the terminal device through the network device is convenient for the terminal device to avoid counting multiple reference signal resources in the second resource group into the number of beam failure times when performing beam failure monitoring.
  • a method for receiving a reference signal includes: receiving third indication information, where the third indication information is used to indicate multiple reference signal resources, where the multiple reference signal resources are determined by at least two groups of the above-mentioned measurement reports.
  • the method of the third aspect may be executed by a terminal device, or may be executed by a chip configured in the terminal device, which is not limited in this application.
  • a method for transmitting a reference signal includes: sending third indication information, where the third indication information is used to indicate multiple reference signal resources, and the multiple reference signal resources are determined by at least two groups of the foregoing measurement reports.
  • the method in the fourth aspect may be executed by a network device, or may be executed by a chip configured in the network device, which is not limited in this application.
  • the multiple reference signal resources indicated by the third indication information may be used for beam diversity quality monitoring.
  • the network device may configure the terminal device with reference signal resources corresponding to multiple received beams based on the multiple sets of measurement reports reported by the terminal device, so that the terminal device performs beam diversity quality monitoring based on the multiple received beams.
  • the multiple reference signal resources indicated by the third indication information correspond to the multiple spatial receiving filters on a one-to-one basis.
  • each reference signal resource corresponds to a spatial receiving filter.
  • the multiple reference signal resources indicated by the third indication information include a first resource group and a second resource group, where only the first resource group
  • the measurement result of the reference signal is included in the statistics of the number of failed beams.
  • the number of multiple reference signal resources indicated by the third indication information may be I (I> 0 and I is an integer), and the I reference signal resources may be equal to J (I> J> 0 and J is an integer).
  • Space receiving filters may be included in The second resource group.
  • L L ⁇ J> 0 and L is an integer reference signal resources
  • the first resource group may include I-L reference signal resources.
  • the L reference signal resources in the second resource group may correspond to J spatial receiving filters
  • the I-L reference signal resources in the first resource group may correspond to at least one of the J spatial receiving filters.
  • the method further includes: receiving fifth indication information, where the fifth indication information is used to indicate multiple reference signal resources in the second resource group.
  • the method further includes: sending fifth indication information, where the fifth indication information is used to indicate multiple reference signal resources in the second resource group.
  • the fifth indication information may be used to indicate the number of multiple reference signal resources in the second resource group, or may be used to indicate the identifiers or indexes of multiple reference signal resources in the second resource group. This application does not limit this.
  • Indicating multiple reference signal resources in the second resource group to the terminal device through the network device is convenient for the terminal device to avoid counting multiple reference signal resources in the second resource group into the number of beam failure times when performing beam failure monitoring.
  • a method for transmitting CSI includes: generating CSI, where the CSI includes one or more sets of measurement information, each set of measurement information is obtained based on a plurality of reference signals that can be received simultaneously, and each set of measurement information includes at least a first indication bit, the The first indication bit is used to indicate the number of spatial receiving filters that receive the multiple reference signals; and the CSI is transmitted.
  • the method of the fifth aspect may be executed by a terminal device, or may be executed by a chip configured in the terminal device, which is not limited in this application.
  • a method for receiving CSI includes: receiving CSI, where the CSI includes one or more sets of measurement information, each set of measurement information is measured based on a plurality of reference signals that can be received simultaneously, and each set of measurement information includes at least a first indicator bit, the The first indication bit is used to indicate the number of spatial receiving filters that receive the multiple reference signals; it is determined whether the multiple reference signals indicated by each set of measurement information are received by the same spatial receiving filter according to the CSI.
  • the method of the sixth aspect may be executed by a network device, or may be executed by a chip configured in the network device, which is not limited in this application.
  • the terminal device may carry an indicator bit for indicating the number of spatial receiving filters that receive the multiple reference signals when reporting CSI based on multiple reference signals that can be received simultaneously, so that the network device can obtain more Information about the correspondence between the reference signal resource and the spatial receiving filter, that is, more information about the pairing relationship between the receiving beam and the transmitting beam can be obtained.
  • the first indicator bit may be used to indicate whether the multiple reference signals are received by the same spatial receiving filter.
  • the protocol can be defined in advance.
  • the measurement results of the multiple reference signals can be reported.
  • the multiple reference signals correspond to a spatial receiving filter.
  • a measurement result of one reference signal may be reported based on each spatial receiving filter.
  • the multiple reference signals correspond one-to-one with multiple spatial receiving filters.
  • the network device can determine the correspondence between the reference signal and the spatial receiving filter according to the measurement results of the first indicator bit and the received multiple reference signals, and can also determine the correspondence between the transmit beam and the receive beam. relationship.
  • the network device may obtain a correspondence between a plurality of transmitting beams and a receiving beam. Therefore, when the TCI state list corresponding to a certain receiving beam is invalid due to the tilting or overturning of the terminal device, it is also possible to switch to other receiving beams with better link quality, which can avoid frequently triggering the beam failure recovery process. Therefore, the robustness of the beam pairing relationship is improved, which is conducive to improving the robustness of the transmission system, improving the transmission efficiency, and at the same time improving the user experience.
  • each set of measurement information includes the above-mentioned first indication bit and multiple measurement results, where each measurement result may include one or more of the following: an identification of a reference signal resource and reference signal received power information.
  • the reference signal resource may be used to configure transmission attributes of the reference signal.
  • Each reference signal resource may correspond to one or more reference signals, and the one or more reference signals may be transmitted on the same time-frequency resource.
  • the reference signal received power information is used to indicate the received power of the reference signal. For example, it can be reported in an absolute value or in a differential manner. This application does not limit this.
  • the method further includes: receiving sixth instruction information, where the sixth instruction information is used to indicate a second reporting mode, and the second reporting mode is based on the simultaneous reporting Report the received reference signal in packets.
  • the method further includes: sending sixth instruction information, where the sixth instruction information is used to indicate a second reporting method, and the second reporting method is based on Reported by packets of reference signals that can be received simultaneously.
  • the terminal device may perform channel measurement and reporting based on the multiple reference signals received at the same time according to the received sixth instruction information, and report the number of spatial reception filters that simultaneously receive the multiple reference signals to the network device so that The correspondence between the receiving beam and the transmitting beam is obtained by the network device.
  • the sixth indication information is carried in a CSI reporting configuration of the RRC message, or the sixth indication information is carried in a packet reporting parameter configured in the CSI reporting.
  • the sixth indication information is carried in one or more of the following: RRC message, MAC CE, and DCI.
  • a communication device including each of the methods for performing the method in the first aspect, the third aspect, or the fifth aspect, and any possible implementation manner of the first aspect, the third aspect, or the fifth aspect. Module or unit.
  • a communication device including a processor.
  • the processor is coupled to the memory and can be used to execute instructions in the memory to implement the method in any one of the possible implementation manners of the first aspect, the third aspect, or the fifth aspect.
  • the communication device further includes a memory.
  • the communication device further includes a communication interface, and the processor is coupled to the communication interface.
  • the communication device is a terminal device.
  • the communication interface may be a transceiver, or an input / output interface.
  • the communication device is a chip configured in a terminal device.
  • the communication interface may be an input / output interface.
  • the transceiver may be a transceiver circuit.
  • the input / output interface may be an input / output circuit.
  • a communication device including each of the methods for performing the method in the second aspect, the fourth aspect, or the sixth aspect, and any possible implementation manner of the second aspect, the fourth aspect, or the sixth aspect. Module or unit.
  • a communication device including a processor.
  • the processor is coupled to the memory, and can be used to execute instructions in the memory to implement the method in any one of the foregoing possible implementation manners of the second aspect, the fourth aspect, or the sixth aspect.
  • the communication device further includes a memory.
  • the communication device further includes a communication interface, and the processor is coupled to the communication interface.
  • the communication device is a network device.
  • the communication interface may be a transceiver, or an input / output interface.
  • the communication device is a chip configured in a network device.
  • the communication interface may be an input / output interface.
  • the transceiver may be a transceiver circuit.
  • the input / output interface may be an input / output circuit.
  • a processor including: an input circuit, an output circuit, and a processing circuit.
  • the processing circuit is configured to receive a signal through the input circuit and transmit a signal through the output circuit, so that the processor executes any one of the first aspect to the sixth aspect and any possible implementation manner of the first aspect to the sixth aspect.
  • the processor may be a chip, an input circuit may be an input pin, an output circuit may be an output pin, and a processing circuit may be a transistor, a gate circuit, a flip-flop, and various logic circuits.
  • the input signal received by the input circuit may be received and input by, for example, but not limited to, a receiver, and the signal output by the output circuit may be, for example, but not limited to, output to and transmitted by a transmitter, and the input circuit and output
  • the circuits may be the same circuit, which are used as input circuits and output circuits respectively at different times.
  • the embodiments of the present application do not limit specific implementations of the processor and various circuits.
  • a processing device including a processor and a memory.
  • the processor is used to read instructions stored in the memory, and can receive signals through a receiver and transmit signals through a transmitter to execute the first aspect to the sixth aspect and any possible implementation manner of the first aspect to the sixth aspect. Methods.
  • processors there are one or more processors, and one or more memories.
  • the memory may be integrated with the processor, or the memory is separately provided from the processor.
  • the memory may be a non-transitory memory, such as a read-only memory (ROM), which may be integrated on the same chip as the processor, or may be separately set in different On the chip, the embodiment of the present application does not limit the type of the memory and the way of setting the memory and the processor.
  • ROM read-only memory
  • sending instruction information may be a process of outputting instruction information from a processor
  • receiving capability information may be a process of receiving input capability information by a processor.
  • the processed output data can be output to the transmitter, and the input data received by the processor can come from the receiver.
  • the transmitter and receiver can be collectively referred to as a transceiver.
  • the processing device in the above twelfth aspect may be a chip, and the processor may be implemented by hardware or software.
  • the processor may be a logic circuit, an integrated circuit, or the like.
  • the processor may be a general-purpose processor, which is implemented by reading software codes stored in a memory.
  • the memory may be integrated in the processor, may be located outside the processor, and exist independently.
  • a computer program product includes a computer program (also referred to as code or instructions), and when the computer program is executed, causes a computer to execute the first aspect to The sixth aspect and the method in any one of the possible implementation manners of the first aspect to the sixth aspect.
  • a computer program also referred to as code or instructions
  • a computer-readable medium stores a computer program (also referred to as code, or instructions), which when executed on a computer, causes the computer to execute the first aspect to The sixth aspect and the method in any one of the possible implementation manners of the first aspect to the sixth aspect.
  • a computer program also referred to as code, or instructions
  • a communication system including the foregoing network device and terminal device.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of a communication system applicable to an embodiment of the present application
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic flowchart of a method for sending and receiving CSI according to an embodiment of the present application
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic flowchart of a method for sending and receiving a reference signal according to another embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 4 is a schematic flowchart of a method for sending and receiving CSI according to another embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 5 is a schematic block diagram of a communication device according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 6 is a schematic structural diagram of a terminal device according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 7 is a schematic structural diagram of a network device according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • GSM Global System for Mobile Communication
  • CDMA Code Division Multiple Access
  • Wideband Code Division Multiple Access Wideband Code Division Multiple Access
  • GPRS General Packet Radio Service
  • LTE Long Term Evolution
  • FDD Frequency Division Duplex
  • TDD Time Division Duplex
  • UMTS Universal Mobile Telecommunication System
  • WiMAX Global Interoperability for Microwave Access
  • 5G 5G
  • 5G new radio access technology
  • FIG. 1 shows a schematic diagram of a communication system suitable for a method and apparatus for sending and receiving according to embodiments of the present application.
  • the communication system 100 may include at least one network device, such as network device 110 shown in FIG. 1; the communication system 100 may further include at least one terminal device, such as terminal device 120 shown in FIG. 1.
  • the network device 110 and the terminal device 120 can communicate through a wireless link.
  • Each communication device, such as the network device 110 or the terminal device 120 may be configured with multiple antennas, and the multiple antennas may include at least one transmitting antenna for transmitting signals and at least one receiving antenna for receiving signals.
  • each communication device additionally includes a transmitter chain and a receiver chain.
  • a transmitter chain and a receiver chain.
  • Those skilled in the art can understand that they can include multiple components related to signal transmission and reception (such as a processor, a modulator, and a multiplexer). , Demodulator, demultiplexer or antenna, etc.). Therefore, the network device 110 and the terminal device 120 can communicate through a multi-antenna technology.
  • the network device in the wireless communication system may be any device having a wireless transceiver function.
  • the device includes but is not limited to: evolved Node B (eNB), radio network controller (RNC), node B (NB), base station controller (BSC) , Base Transceiver Station (BTS), Home Base Station (e.g., Home NodeB, or Home Node B, HNB), Base Band Unit (BBU), Wireless Fidelity (WIFI) system Access point (AP), wireless relay node, wireless backhaul node, transmission point (TP) or transmission and reception point (TRP), etc.
  • eNB evolved Node B
  • RNC radio network controller
  • NB node B
  • BSC Base Station Controller
  • BBU Base Transceiver Station
  • BBU Base Band Unit
  • WIFI Wireless Fidelity
  • AP Wireless Fidelity
  • AP Wireless Fidelity
  • AP wireless relay node
  • TP transmission point
  • TRP transmission and reception point
  • a gNB may include a centralized unit (CU) and a DU.
  • the gNB may also include a radio frequency unit (radio unit, RU).
  • CU implements some functions of gNB and DU implements some functions of gNB.
  • CU implements radio resource control (RRC), packet data convergence layer protocol (PDCP) layer functions, and DU implements wireless chain.
  • RRC radio resource control
  • PDCP packet data convergence layer protocol
  • DU implements wireless chain.
  • RLC radio control
  • MAC media access control
  • PHY physical
  • the network device may be a CU node, or a DU node, or a device including a CU node and a DU node.
  • the CU can be divided into network equipment in an access network (RAN), or the CU can be divided into network equipment in a core network (CN), which is not limited in this application.
  • RAN access network
  • CN core network
  • the terminal equipment in the wireless communication system may also be referred to as user equipment (UE), access terminal, user unit, user station, mobile station, mobile station, remote station, remote terminal, mobile device, User terminal, terminal, wireless communication device, user agent, or user device.
  • the terminal device in the embodiments of the present application may be a mobile phone, a tablet, a computer with a wireless transceiver function, a virtual reality (VR) terminal device, or an augmented reality (AR) terminal.
  • Equipment wireless terminals in industrial control, wireless terminals in self driving, wireless terminals in remote medical, wireless terminals in smart grid, transportation security ( wireless terminals in transportation, wireless terminals in smart cities, wireless terminals in smart homes, and so on.
  • the embodiment of the present application does not limit the application scenario.
  • two communication devices with communication connections may obtain gain through beamforing, respectively.
  • the transmitting end such as the network device 110
  • the receiving end such as the terminal device 120
  • the beam can be understood as a spatial filter or a spatial parameter.
  • the beam used to send a signal can be called a transmission beam (transmission beam, Tx beam), which can be a spatial transmission filter (spatial domain transmission filter) or a spatial transmission parameter (spatial domain transmission parameter);
  • the beam used to receive the signal can be called To receive a beam (reception beam, Rx beam), it can be a spatial receive filter (spatial domain receive filter) or a spatial receive parameter (spatial domain receive parameter).
  • the beam forming technology may be a beam forming technology or other technologies.
  • the beamforming technology may specifically be a digital beamforming technology, an analog beamforming technology, or a hybrid digital / analog beamforming technology.
  • a transmitting beam may refer to a signal intensity distribution in different directions of a space after a signal is transmitted through an antenna
  • a receiving beam may refer to a signal intensity distribution of a wireless signal received from an antenna in different directions in space.
  • the beam may be, for example, a spatial filter.
  • a spatial filter for example, a spatial filter.
  • beam and spatial filter are used alternately, for example, “transmit beam” and “space transmit filter” are used alternately, and “receive beam” and “spatial receive filter” “The device” is used interchangeably. When the difference is not emphasized, the meaning to be expressed is the same.
  • the beam pairing relationship that is, the pairing relationship between the transmitting beam and the receiving beam, that is, the pairing relationship between the spatial transmitting filter and the spatial receiving filter. Transmitting a signal between a transmitting beam and a receiving beam having a beam pairing relationship can obtain a large beamforming gain.
  • the transmitting end may send the reference signal in a beam scanning manner, and the receiving end may also receive the reference signal in a beam scanning manner.
  • the transmitting end may form beams with different directivity in space by means of beamforming, and may poll on multiple beams with different directivity to transmit the reference signal through the beams with different directivity, so that The power of the reference signal to transmit the reference signal in the direction pointed by the transmission beam can reach the maximum.
  • the receiving end can also form beams with different directivity in the space by means of beamforming, and can poll on multiple beams with different directivity to receive the reference signal through the beams with different directivity, so that the receiving end receives The power of the reference signal can be maximized in the direction pointed by the receiving beam.
  • the receiving end can perform channel measurement based on the received reference signal, and report the measurement result to the transmitting end through CSI.
  • the receiving end may report a part of the reference signal receiving power (reference signal receiving power (RSRP)) of the larger reference signal resource to the transmitting end, such as reporting the identifier of the reference signal resource, so that the transmitting end uses the channel when transmitting data or signaling Better quality beam pairing to send and receive signals.
  • RSRP reference signal receiving power
  • Reference signals can be used for channel measurement, channel estimation, or beam quality monitoring.
  • the reference signal resource can be used to configure the transmission attributes of the reference signal, such as the position of the time-frequency resource, the port mapping relationship, the power factor, and the scrambling code. For details, refer to the prior art.
  • the transmitting device may send the reference signal based on the reference signal resource, and the receiving device may receive the reference signal based on the reference signal resource.
  • the channel measurement involved in this application also includes beam measurement, that is, obtaining beam quality information by measuring a reference signal, and parameters for measuring beam quality include RSRP, but are not limited thereto.
  • the beam quality can also be obtained through reference signal reception quality (RSRQ), signal-noise ratio (SNR), signal to interference plus noise ratio (SINR) Noise ratio) and other parameters.
  • RSRQ reference signal reception quality
  • SNR signal-noise ratio
  • SINR signal to interference plus noise ratio
  • the channel measurement involved may be regarded as a beam measurement without a special description.
  • the beam quality monitoring involved in this application monitors beam-based link quality information.
  • Parameters used to evaluate wireless link quality include hypothetical block error rate (hyperthetical block error ratio, hypothetical BLER), but are not limited thereto.
  • link quality can also be measured by parameters such as RSRP, RSRQ, SNR, SINR.
  • the reference signals involved in the embodiments of the present application may include, for example, a channel state information reference signal (CSI-RS), a synchronization signal block (SSB), and a sounding reference signal (sounding reference signal).
  • CSI-RS channel state information reference signal
  • SSB synchronization signal block
  • sounding reference signal sounding reference signal
  • SRS sounding reference signal
  • the reference signal resources may include CSI-RS resources (CSI-RS resources), SSB resources, and SRS resources (SRS resources).
  • the above SSB can also be called synchronization signal / physical broadcast channel block (SS / PBCH block), and the corresponding SSB resource can also be called synchronization signal / physical broadcast channel block resource.
  • (SS / PBCH block source) can be referred to as SSB source for short.
  • SSB can also refer to SSB resources.
  • the SSB can be regarded as an SS / PBCH block and the SSB resource can be regarded as an SS / PBCH block resource without a special description.
  • each reference signal resource may correspond to an identifier of a reference signal resource, such as CSI-RS resource identifier (CRI), SSB resource identifier (SSBRI) SRS resource index (SRS resource index).
  • CRI CSI-RS resource identifier
  • SSBRI SSB resource identifier
  • SRS resource index SRS resource index
  • the SSB resource identifier may also be referred to as the SSB identifier (SSB index).
  • a network device may send a CSI resource configuration (CSI resource configuration) to a terminal device through an RRC message, and each CSI resource configuration may include S (S ⁇ 1 and S is an integer) CSI-RS resources Sets (CSI-RS resources), each CSI-RS resources set may include K (K ⁇ 1, and K is an integer) NZP CSI-RS resources (NZP CSI-RS resources).
  • the terminal device can receive the CSI-RS on the K NZP CSI-RS resources indicated by the network device.
  • the terminal device when it accesses the cell, it can obtain the resource configuration information of the SSB.
  • the network device may also indicate the identity of one or more SSB resources through a special CSI-RS resource set.
  • the SSB resource may be, for example, a channel state information synchronization signal block resource set (CSI-SSB-Resource Set).
  • CSI-SSB-Resource Set channel state information synchronization signal block resource set
  • the SSB transmitted based on the one or more SSB resources may be used for channel measurement.
  • the terminal device may receive the SSB according to the SSB resource indicated by the special CSI-RS resource set, and perform channel measurement.
  • the network device may further indicate J (K ⁇ J ⁇ 1, and J is an integer) NZP CSI-RS resources currently available in K NZP CSI-RS resources through DCI.
  • Time domain behavior parameters In the reference signal resource configuration and the CSI reporting configuration, different time domain behavior parameters can be used to indicate different time domain behaviors.
  • the time domain behavior parameter of the reference signal resource configuration may be used to indicate the time domain behavior of the terminal device receiving the reference signal; the time domain behavior parameter configured by the CSI report may be used to indicate the time domain behavior of the terminal device to report the CSI.
  • the time domain behavior may include, for example, periodic, semi-persistent, and aperiodic.
  • Antenna port (referred to as port). Transmitting antennas recognized by the receiving end equipment, or transmitting antennas that are spatially distinguishable.
  • One antenna port can be configured for each virtual antenna, each virtual antenna can be a weighted combination of multiple physical antennas, and each antenna port can correspond to a reference signal port.
  • Quasi-co-location The signals corresponding to the antenna ports with a QCL relationship have the same parameters, or the parameters of one antenna port can be used to determine another antenna with a QCL relationship to the antenna port.
  • the parameters of the antenna ports, or the two antenna ports have the same parameters, or the parameter difference between the two antenna ports is less than a certain threshold.
  • the parameters may include one or more of the following: delay spread, Doppler spread, Doppler shift, average delay, average Gain, spatial Rx parameters.
  • the space receiving parameters may include one or more of the following: angle of arrival (AOA), average AOA, AOA extension, angle of departure (AOD), average departure angle AOD, AOD extension, reception Antenna spatial correlation parameters, transmitting antenna spatial correlation parameters, transmitting beams, receiving beams, and resource identifiers.
  • AOA angle of arrival
  • AOA extension angle of departure
  • AOD angle of departure
  • AOD extension angle of departure
  • reception Antenna spatial correlation parameters transmitting antenna spatial correlation parameters, transmitting beams, receiving beams, and resource identifiers.
  • the above-mentioned angle may be a decomposition value of different dimensions, or a combination of decomposition values of different dimensions.
  • the antenna ports are antenna ports having different antenna port numbers, and / or, antenna ports having the same antenna port number for transmitting or receiving information at different times and / or frequencies and / or code domain resources, and / or, have different
  • the antenna port number is an antenna port for transmitting or receiving information in different time and / or frequency and / or code domain resources.
  • the resource identifier may include: a CSI-RS resource identifier, or an SRS resource identifier, or an SSB resource identifier, or a resource identifier of a preamble sequence transmitted on a physical random access channel (PRACH), or a demodulation reference signal ( demodulation (reference signal, DMRS) resource identifier, used to indicate the beam on the resource.
  • CSI-RS resource identifier or an SRS resource identifier, or an SSB resource identifier, or a resource identifier of a preamble sequence transmitted on a physical random access channel (PRACH), or a demodulation reference signal ( demodulation (reference signal, DMRS) resource identifier, used to indicate the beam on the resource.
  • PRACH physical random access channel
  • DMRS demodulation reference signal
  • Type A Doppler frequency shift, Doppler spread, average delay, delay spread;
  • Type B Doppler frequency shift and Doppler spread
  • Type C Doppler shift, average delay
  • Type D space receiving parameters.
  • the QCL involved in the embodiment of the present application is a QCL of type D.
  • the QCL can be understood as a QCL of type D, that is, a QCL defined based on a spatial receiving parameter.
  • the QCL relationship refers to the QCL relationship of type D: the QCL relationship between the port of the downlink signal and the port of the downlink signal, or the port of the uplink signal and the port of the uplink signal
  • the two signals can have the same AOA or AOD , Is used to indicate that they have the same receive or transmit beam.
  • the AOA and AOD of the two signals have a corresponding relationship, or the AOD and AOA of the two signals have a corresponding relationship, that is, a beam can be used. Reciprocity, determining an uplink transmission beam according to a downlink reception beam, or determining a downlink reception beam according to an uplink transmission beam.
  • a signal transmitted on a port with a QCL relationship may also have a corresponding beam, and the corresponding beam includes at least one of the following: the same receiving beam, the same transmitting beam, and the transmitting beam corresponding to the receiving beam (corresponding to a scenario with reciprocity) ), The receiving beam corresponding to the transmitting beam (corresponding to a scene with reciprocity).
  • Signals transmitted on ports with a QCL relationship can also be understood as receiving or sending signals using the same spatial filter.
  • the spatial filter may be at least one of the following: precoding, weight of the antenna port, phase deflection of the antenna port, and amplitude gain of the antenna port.
  • a signal transmitted on a port with a QCL relationship can also be understood as having a corresponding beam pair connection (BPL).
  • the corresponding BPL includes at least one of the following: the same downlink BPL, the same uplink BPL, and the downlink BPL.
  • the uplink BPL corresponds to the downlink BPL corresponding to the uplink BPL.
  • the spatial reception parameter (ie, QCL of type D) can be understood as a parameter for indicating the direction information of the received beam.
  • Transmission configuration indicator can be used to indicate the QCL relationship between two reference signals.
  • Network devices can configure TCI state (TCI state) lists for terminal devices through high-level signaling (such as radio resource control (RRC) messages), and can use high-level signaling (such as MAC CE) or physical layer signaling ( For example, DCI activates or indicates one or more TCI states.
  • RRC radio resource control
  • MAC CE physical layer signaling
  • DCI activates or indicates one or more TCI states.
  • the network device may configure a TCI status list for the terminal device through an RRC message.
  • the terminal device receives a physical downlink control channel (physical downlink control channel, PDCCH) from the network device.
  • PDCCH physical downlink control channel
  • one or more of the control channel TCI status list may be activated according to the instruction of the MAC CE, where the control channel TCI status list is a subset of the above TCI status list; the terminal device may obtain DCI from the PDCCH, and then according to the DCI Instructs selection of one or more TCI states in a data channel TCI state list, where the data channel TCI state list is a subset of the above TCI state list and is indicated to the terminal device through MAC-CE signaling.
  • the configuration information of a TCI state may include an identifier of one or two reference signal resources, and an associated QCL type.
  • the terminal device can demodulate the PDCCH or PDSCH according to the indication of the TCI state.
  • the terminal device can know which transmit beam is used by the network device to transmit the signal, and then can determine which receive beam to use to receive the signal according to the beam pairing relationship determined by the channel measurement.
  • a network device can configure a periodic reference signal resource set q 0 for a terminal device through a high-level parameter beam failure monitoring reference signal resource configuration (Beam-Failure-Detection-RS-ResourceConfig).
  • the reference signal resource set q 0 includes a set of reference signal resources.
  • the terminal device may receive a reference signal based on the reference signal resource set q 0 , and evaluate a beam-based radio link quality based on the received reference signal. It can be understood that the quality of the wireless link is based on the quality of the wireless link established by the transmitting beam and / or the receiving beam.
  • beam failure recovery BFR
  • This kind of beam-based wireless link quality monitoring can be referred to simply as beam failure monitoring.
  • the network device may configure a reference signal resource set q 1 for the terminal device through a high-level parameter candidate beam reference signal list (Candidate-Beam-RS-List), and the reference signal resource set q 1 may also include a set of reference signal resources. .
  • the reference signal resources in the reference signal resource set q 1 can be used as candidate reference signal resources for beam recovery.
  • the transmitting end may be a network device, such as the network device 110 shown in FIG. 1; the receiving end may be a terminal device, such as the terminal device 120 shown in FIG. 1.
  • the terminal device 120 may perform channel measurement based on the reference signal received by each spatial receiving filter, and report the measurement result to the network device 110 in groups.
  • the terminal device 120 may classify the results measured based on the same spatial receiving filter into a set of measurement reports.
  • the spatial receiving filters corresponding to each set of measurement reports are different from each other. Therefore, the measurement report and the spatial receiving filter in the embodiments of the present application have a one-to-one correspondence relationship.
  • the network device 110 may, based on one or more measurement reports reported by the terminal device 120, perceive the correspondence between the spatial reception filter and the reference signal resource, that is, perceive the pairing relationship between one or more receive beams and one or more transmit beams. .
  • the network device 110 can perform beam management based on more pairing relationships between the receiving beam and the transmitting beam. For example, the network device 110 may group the reference signal resource identifiers reported by the terminal device 120 according to the measurement report and store them locally. When receiving the reference signal from the network device 110, the terminal device 120 may also save the correspondence between the reference signal resource identifier corresponding to the received reference signal and the receiving beam used to receive the reference signal locally. The network device 110 may configure and notify the terminal device 120 of the identifier of the reference signal resource in the form of a TCI status list, so as to select a transmission beam corresponding to the identifier of a reference signal resource stored in the TCI status list in a subsequent communication process. Send the signal, and activate the MAC or CE or indicate the TCI status corresponding to the selected transmission beam through the DCI to help the terminal device 120 determine and select a suitable reception beam to receive the signal.
  • the network device 110 can obtain the terminal device 120 The information of the receiving beam with better quality is received, and then the network device 110 may directly switch to the transmitting beam with better quality corresponding to the receiving beam. At the same time, the terminal device 120 may also switch to the receiving beam to receive signals, which can avoid frequently triggering a beam failure recovery process. Therefore, the robustness of the beam pairing relationship can be improved, which can also improve the robustness of the communication system, which is beneficial to improving the transmission efficiency and at the same time it is beneficial to improving the user experience.
  • the network device 110 groups the reference signal resource identifiers # 1- # 4 reported by the terminal device 120 according to the measurement report and stores them locally. It is assumed that the measurement report is divided into groups # 1 and # 2, which respectively correspond to the reception of the terminal device 120. Beam # 1 and receiving beam # 2, where reference signal resource identifiers # 1 and # 2 correspond to group # 1, and reference signal resource identifiers # 3 and # 4 correspond to group # 2. On the premise that the network device 110 uses the transmission beam corresponding to the reference signal resource identifier # 4 to serve another terminal device, the network device 110 can preferentially schedule the transmission beam corresponding to the reference signal resource identifier # 1 or # 2 to be the current terminal. Device 120 services.
  • the reference signal resource identifier # 1 or # 2 and the reference signal resource identifier # 4 belong to different measurement reports and correspond to different receiving beams of the current terminal device. Therefore, if the network device 110 selects the reference signal resource identifier # 1 or # 2, The transmission beam communicates with the terminal device 120, which can avoid the interference of the transmission beam serving another terminal device (such as the transmission beam corresponding to the reference signal resource identifier # 4) to the greatest extent.
  • the terminal device 110 cannot report the measurement report based on the spatial receiving filter, only the reference signal resource identifier and the corresponding reference signal received power are reported, and the network device 110 cannot sense the reference signal resource reported by the terminal device 120. Whether the transmitted reference signal is received and measured based on the same receiving beam, or is the network device 110 unable to sense whether the reference signal corresponding to the reference signal resource reported by the terminal device 120 is received by a receiving beam of the terminal device 120 or Received by multiple receive beams. The network device 110 may not be able to obtain more information about the pairing relationship between the transmitting beam and the receiving beam, so as to perform beam management reasonably.
  • the terminal device 120 may perform channel measurement based on a reference signal received by only one receiving beam (for example, described as receiving beam # 1), and report the measurement result to the network device 110. Thereafter, the network device 110 may transmit data or signaling with the terminal device 120 according to the identifier of the reference signal resource and the received power of the reference signal reported by the terminal device 120.
  • the terminal device 120 undergoes a small tilt or rotation, the quality of the received signal of the receiving beam # 1 may be deteriorated, and the identifiers of the previously reported reference signal resources are reported based on the measurement of the receiving beam # 1. of. This means that the TCI status list configured by the network device 110 is actually based on the receiving beam # 1 of the same terminal device 120.
  • this TCI status list can be considered to be all invalid. If it is still based on this TCI status list, the network device 110 selects the corresponding transmit beam to send the signal, and the terminal device 120 selects the receive beam # 1 to receive the signal according to the TCI, which may seriously degrade the link quality and may cause the system to frequently enter the beam Failure recovery (beam failure recovery) process. Therefore, the selection of the receiving beam depends too much on the implementation of the terminal device 120, which may cause the beam pairing relationship to be not robust, which is not conducive to improving the transmission efficiency and the user experience is not good.
  • the terminal device 120 may also perform channel measurement based on reference signals received by multiple receiving beams (for example, denoted as receiving beam # 1 and receiving beam # 2), and report the measurement results to the network.
  • the network device 110 may transmit data or signaling with the terminal device 120 according to the identifier of the reference signal resource and the received power of the reference signal reported by the terminal device 120.
  • the network device 110 does not know that the measurement result reported by the terminal device is obtained based on multiple received beam measurements. If the terminal device 120 experiences a small tilt or rotation, the quality of the received signal may be deteriorated in the currently used receiving beam (for example, receiving beam # 1), and the network device 110 does not know which transmitting beam to switch to to send the signal.
  • the terminal device 120 includes multiple receiving beams, the measurement results and additional information previously reported through beam scanning cannot be fully utilized, the robustness of the transmission system cannot be improved, and the user experience is poor.
  • the network device 110 may send two different signals to the same terminal device 120 on the same OFDM symbol, for example, PDCCH and PDSCH. Since the terminal device 120 may not have two different receptions at the same time The ability of the beam to receive two signals, so the network device 110 may need to ensure that the two signals appearing on the same OFDM symbol have the same spatial receiving parameters, that is, the terminal device 120 can receive the two signals with the same receiving beam. However, if the terminal device 120 only reports the identifier of the reference signal resource to the network device 110, the network device 110 does not know whether the transmission beam corresponding to the multiple reference signal resources reported by the terminal device 120 corresponds to one reception beam of the terminal device.
  • the network device 110 can only select the same transmit beam to send the PDCCH and the PDSCH, so as to ensure that the terminal device 120 can receive using the same receive beam.
  • the PDCCH as a control signal may be suitable for using a half-power spot beam width (HPBW) larger beam to increase coverage in the angular domain and enhance robustness
  • PDSCH As a data signal, it may be suitable to use a smaller HPBW beam to improve the SNR or SINR during reception and enhance throughput. Therefore, if the PDCCH and PDSCH are transmitted simultaneously using the transmission beam of the data channel, the robustness of PDCCH detection may be reduced. If the PDCCH and PDSCH are simultaneously transmitted using the transmission beam of the control channel, the PDSCH error may increase and the throughput may decrease.
  • the network device 110 cannot know the pairing relationship between the transmitting beam and the receiving beam, it may not be able to perform beam management reasonably, which is not conducive to the robustness of the system and is not conducive to improving the system performance.
  • each group of measurement reports is measured based on the reference signal received by the same spatial receiving filter.
  • the network device 110 can perceive more pairing information of the transmitting beam and the receiving beam, so that the beam management can be performed more reasonably, which can increase the beamforming gain to a greater extent; at the same time, it is also beneficial to improve the robustness of the system It is conducive to improving transmission efficiency and improving user experience. On the whole, it helps to improve system performance.
  • the channel measurement or beam measurement in the embodiments of the present application may be based on the same bandwidth part (BWP) or the same carrier (component carrier, CC), or may be different BWP or CC.
  • BWP bandwidth part
  • CC component carrier
  • the CSI report described in the embodiment of the application may correspond to the same BSP or CC, or may correspond to different BWP or CC, which is not limited in this application.
  • the unit of "time” involved may be, for example, a slot or orthogonal frequency division multiplexing symbol, or may be seconds, milliseconds, or Microseconds, etc. This application does not limit this.
  • pre-acquisition may include indication or pre-definition by network device signaling, for example, protocol definition.
  • pre-defined can be achieved by pre-saving corresponding codes, tables, or other methods that can be used to indicate related information in devices (for example, including terminal devices and network devices), and this application does not make specific implementations thereof. limited.
  • "save" involved in the embodiments of the present application may refer to saving in one or more memories.
  • the one or more memories may be provided separately or integrated in an encoder or a decoder, a processor, or a communication device.
  • the one or more memories may also be partly provided separately and partly integrated in a decoder, a processor, or a communication device.
  • the type of the memory may be any form of storage medium, which is not limited in this application.
  • protocol in the embodiment of the present application may refer to a standard protocol in the communication field, for example, may include an LTE protocol, an NR protocol, and a related protocol applied in a future communication system, which is not limited in this application.
  • the technical solution of the present application can be applied to a wireless communication system, for example, the communication system 100 shown in FIG. 1.
  • a wireless communication connection relationship between two communication devices in a wireless communication system and one communication device of the two communication devices may correspond to the terminal device 120 shown in FIG. 1, for example, it may be as shown in FIG. 1.
  • the terminal device shown may also be a chip configured in the terminal device; the other communication device of the two communication devices may correspond to the network device 110 shown in FIG. 1, for example, it may be the device shown in FIG. 1.
  • the network device may also be a chip configured in the network device.
  • any terminal device in the wireless communication system or a chip configured in the terminal device can receive the reference signal and report the CSI based on the same method.
  • Any network device in the wireless communication system or configured in the network device All chips can send reference signals and receive CSI based on the same method. This application does not limit this.
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic flowchart of a method 200 for sending and receiving CSI, which is shown from the perspective of device interaction. As shown, the method 200 shown in FIG. 2 may include steps 210 to 290. The method 200 is described in detail below with reference to FIG. 2.
  • the terminal device In step 210, the terminal device generates one or more CSIs.
  • Each CSI includes one or more sets of measurement reports.
  • Each set of measurement reports is measured based on a reference signal received by a spatial receiving filter.
  • the spatial receiving filters corresponding to the measurement reports of each group are different from each other.
  • step 220 the terminal device sends the one or more CSIs.
  • the network device receives the one or more CSIs.
  • the network device determines, according to the one or more CSIs, that the spatial receiving filters corresponding to each set of measurement reports are different from each other.
  • the terminal device can perform measurement according to the reference signal received by each spatial receiving filter, and report the result obtained based on the measurement of each spatial receiving filter to the network device in the form of a measurement report.
  • Each group of measurement reports may correspond to a spatial receiving filter, or each group of measurement reports may correspond to a receiving beam.
  • the multiple measurement reports correspond one-to-one with multiple spatial reception filters, or in other words, the multiple measurement reports correspond one-to-one with multiple receive beams.
  • the network device receives the one or more CSIs described above, it can be determined that the spatial receiving filters corresponding to each set of measurement reports are different from each other.
  • the network device can perceive the correspondence between the reference signal resources corresponding to each group of measurement reports (for example, can include or be pre-appointed) and the spatial receiving filter.
  • the device can sense which several transmit beams correspond to the same receive beam.
  • the method 200 further includes step 240: the network device sends a reference signal, and the reference signal is used for channel measurement.
  • the terminal device receives a reference signal, which is used for channel measurement.
  • the reference signal may be a CSI-RS or an SSB, which is not limited in this application.
  • the network device may send the resource configuration information of the reference signal to the terminal device in advance through high-level signaling, such as the CSI resource configuration and SSB resource configuration information listed above.
  • the terminal device may determine the reference signal resource according to the resource configuration information of the reference signal sent by the network device. Therefore, the terminal device can receive the reference signal based on the reference signal resource.
  • the channel measurement may be understood as a beam measurement.
  • the network device can send the reference signal by means of beam scanning, and the terminal device can also receive the reference signal by means of beam scanning.
  • the reference signals sent by the network device through different transmit beams may be associated with different reference signal resources, and the reference signals received by the terminal device through different receive beams may also be associated with different reference signal resources. Therefore, by referring to the identification of the signal resource, different transmit beams or receive beams can be distinguished.
  • the network device includes 6 transmitting beams, which may be recorded as beams # 1 to # 6, respectively.
  • the terminal equipment includes a receiving beam.
  • the resource identifiers may be # 1 to # 6, respectively.
  • the six reference signal resources may be recorded as resources # 1 to # 6, respectively.
  • the network device can send a reference signal to the terminal device based on the resources # 1 to # 6, then the 6 reference signal resources correspond to the 6 transmission beams one by one, and the network device can send one or Multiple reference signals.
  • the network device may send one or more reference signals through the beam # 1 based on the resource # 1; the network device may send one or more reference signals through the beam # 2 based on the resource # 2; and so on, no longer enumerated here .
  • the resource identifiers may be resources # 1 to # 24, respectively.
  • the 24 reference signal resources may be recorded as resources # 1 to # 24, respectively.
  • the network device can send the reference signal to the terminal device through the resources # 1 to # 24, then every 6 reference signal resources of the 24 reference signal resources correspond to the 6 transmitting beams one by one, and the network device can recycle the 6
  • the transmit beam transmits a reference signal based on the 24 reference signal resources. For example, the network device may send one or more reference signals through beam # 1 based on resource # 1, and one or more reference signals through beam # 2 based on resource # 2, and so on, until the network device passes based on resource # 6.
  • Beam # 6 sends one or more reference signals; thereafter, the network device may send one or more reference signals through beam # 1 based on resource # 7, and one or more reference signals through beam # 2 based on resource # 8.
  • the network device can send one or more reference signals through beam # 1 based on resource # 13, and pass through based on resource # 14.
  • Beam # 2 sends one or more reference signals, and so on, until the network device sends one or more reference signals through beam # 6 based on resource # 18; thereafter, the network device can send through beam # 1 based on resource # 19.
  • One or more reference signals send one or more reference signals through beam # 2 based on resource # 20, and so on, until the network device sends one through beam # 6 based on resource # 24 Or multiple reference signals.
  • the terminal device can sequentially receive the reference signals sent by different transmitting beams of the network device based on different reference signal resources through the receiving beam.
  • the network device includes 6 transmitting beams, for example, which can be referred to as transmitting beams # 1 to # 6, and the terminal device includes 2 receiving beams, which can be referred to as receiving beams # 1 and # 2, respectively.
  • the resource identifiers may be # 1 to # 6, respectively.
  • the six reference signal resources may be recorded as resources # 1 to # 6, respectively.
  • the network device can send a reference signal to the terminal device based on the resources # 1 to # 6, then the 6 reference signal resources correspond to the 6 transmission beams one by one, and the network device can send one or Multiple reference signals.
  • the terminal device may first use one of the receiving beams to receive the reference signal based on the 6 reference signal resources, and then use the other receiving beam to receive the reference signal based on the 6 reference signal resources. Therefore, the network device can repeatedly transmit the reference signal based on the 6 reference signal resources through the 6 transmit beams, so that the 2 receive beams of the terminal device can receive the reference signal for measurement based on the 6 reference signal resources. .
  • the network device may send one or more reference signals through the transmitting beam # 1 based on the resource # 1, and the terminal device may receive the one or more reference signals through the receiving beam # 1 based on the resource # 1; Sending one or more reference signals through transmit beam # 2, the terminal device may receive the one or more reference signals through receive beam # 1 based on resource # 2; and so on, until the network device passes transmit beam # 6 based on resource # 6 Send one or more reference signals, and the terminal device receives the one or more reference signals through the receiving beam # 1 based on the resource # 6. Thereafter, the network device may send the reference signals through the transmitting beams # 1 to # 6 based on the resources # 1 to # 6 in turn, and the terminal device may receive the reference signals through the receiving beam # 2 based on the resources # 1 to # 6 in turn.
  • the terminal device can fix a certain receiving beam, poll the network device's transmitting beam, and use different transmitting beams to send reference signals.
  • the terminal device uses the above-mentioned fixed receiving beam to receive the different transmitting beams sent by the network device. Reference signal for channel measurement. After that, the terminal device can switch to another receiving beam and repeat the above steps.
  • Network equipment can fix a certain transmission beam. Terminal equipment uses different reception beams to receive reference signals from the same transmission beam of network equipment. Terminal equipment can perform channel measurement based on the reference signals received by different reception beams. After that, the network device can switch to another transmit beam and repeat the above steps.
  • the number of receiving beams included in the terminal device may be greater than or equal to the total number of groups of measurement reports reported through CSI.
  • the terminal device may include 4 receiving beams, but may only report 2 sets of measurement reports. The relationship between the receiving beam of the terminal device and the number of groups of reported measurement reports will be described in detail later, and a detailed description of this content is omitted for now.
  • the terminal device may generate and report a measurement report to the network device in any of the following ways:
  • Method 1 Report a CSI, where the CSI includes a set of measurement reports;
  • Method 2 Report a CSI, which includes multiple sets of measurement reports;
  • Method 3 Report multiple CSI, each CSI includes a set of measurement reports;
  • Manner 4 Report multiple CSIs. Each CSI includes multiple sets of measurement reports.
  • the terminal device can report a group of measurement reports to the network device, and can also report multiple groups of measurement reports to the network device. If the terminal device reports multiple sets of measurement reports to the network device, the multiple sets of measurement reports may be carried in one CSI or multiple CSIs. When the protocol reports the measurement report by any one of the above methods by default, the terminal device may generate and send the CSI based on the corresponding method.
  • the spatial receiving filters (or, in other words, the receiving beams) corresponding to the respective sets of measurement reports are different from each other. That is, among the multiple sets of measurement reports reported by the terminal device, the spatial receiving filters corresponding to any two sets of measurement reports are different.
  • the multiple CSIs are configured based on a same CSI report.
  • the multiple CSIs are configured based on multiple CSI reports.
  • the multiple CSI reporting configurations have the same time domain behavior parameters.
  • the multiple CSIs configured based on multiple CSI reports may all be periodic reports, semi-persistent reports, or aperiodic reports.
  • the terminal device may generate and send one or more CSIs based on at least one of the following parameters:
  • Parameter 1 The number M of measurement reports reported by each CSI, where M is a positive integer;
  • Parameter 2 the total number of groups Q of measurement reports reported by multiple CSI, where Q is a positive integer
  • Parameter 3 The number of CSI N when reporting measurement reports through multiple CSIs, where N is a positive integer.
  • the terminal device may generate and send the CSI based on only the parameter 1.
  • the protocol defaults that each CSI report is independent.
  • one CSI report includes at least one set of measurement reports, and different sets of measurement reports correspond to different spatial reception filters of the terminal device.
  • the parameter M is the terminal device's primary CSI. Number of measurement reports allowed to be reported.
  • the terminal device may generate and send the CSI based on the parameter 2 or the parameter 3.
  • the protocol defaults that each CSI can only include a set of measurement reports.
  • the parameters Q and N are equivalent and both correspond to different spatial receiving filters of the terminal device.
  • the terminal device is only based on parameter 2 or parameter 3. Either one can determine the number of measurement reports allowed to be reported through multiple CSIs.
  • the terminal device may generate and send the CSI based on any two items of parameters 1 to 3.
  • the third term can be derived from any two of M, Q, and N.
  • parameter Q corresponds to different spatial receiving filters of the terminal device.
  • the terminal device can determine the number of measurement reports allowed to be reported through multiple CSIs, and parameter M to determine the number of measurement reports allowed to be reported per CSI.
  • the parameter N determines the total number of CSI required.
  • the number of CSIs is 1, the number of groups M of measurement reports included in each CSI and the total number Q of measurement reports reported by multiple CSIs may be equal. Similarly, when the number of measurement reports included in each CSI is 1, the total number Q of measurement reports and the number N of CSIs reported through multiple CSIs may also be equal.
  • the “reporting measurement reports through multiple CSIs” involved in parameters two and three refers to that when a terminal device performs channel measurement based on different spatial reception filters, a single CSI transmission cannot include all the measurements to be reported. In the case of a report, it needs to be sent through multiple CSIs. Therefore, the number of “multiple CSIs” involved in parameter two and parameter three may refer to the number of times of CSI transmission.
  • the number of spatial receiving filters used by the terminal device in the beam training is not necessarily the number of spatial receiving filters in the terminal device.
  • the terminal device may include eight spatial receiving filters, but It is possible to use only four spatial receive filters in training. It can be understood that the number of spatial receiving filters used by the terminal device in the beam training may be less than or equal to the number of spatial receiving filters in the terminal device.
  • the above-mentioned parameters M, Q, and N may be predefined, such as a protocol definition; or may be determined by a network device and instruct the terminal device; the above two methods may also be combined. This application does not limit this.
  • the parameter M may be predefined or may be instructed by the network device to the terminal device through signaling.
  • the parameter Q or N may be predefined or may be indicated by the network device to the terminal device through signaling. If the terminal device sends the CSI in the above manner, any two of the parameters M, Q, and N may be It is predefined, or it may be indicated by the network device to the terminal device through signaling, or one of the parameters may be defined in advance, and the network device indicates another parameter through signaling.
  • the parameter N is predefined, The network device indicates M or Q through signaling.
  • the method 200 further includes: step 250, the network device sends second instruction information, where the second instruction information is used for Indicate one or more of the above-mentioned M, Q, and N.
  • the terminal device receives the foregoing second instruction information, where the second instruction information is used to indicate one or more of M, Q, and N.
  • the network device may be determined according to the capability information reported by the terminal device.
  • the method 200 further includes: step 260, the terminal device sends capability information, where the capability information includes one or more of the following parameters:
  • Parameter i the number of spatial receiving filters, or the number of receiving beams
  • Parameter ii the maximum number of measurement reports reported by each CSI
  • Parameter iii the maximum number of total groups of measurement reports reported by multiple CSIs.
  • Parameter iv The maximum number of CSI when reporting measurement reports through multiple CSIs.
  • step 260 the network device receives the above capability information.
  • the parameter ii, the parameter iii, and the parameter iv may be determined by the parameter i, that is, the number of the spatial receiving filters determines the total number Q of the measurement reports reported.
  • the number of spatial receiving filters is P (P> 0 and an integer), that is, the total number of measurement reports that a terminal device can report may be an integer less than or equal to P. That is, the total number of groups Q of the measurement reports reported through multiple CSIs can satisfy: Q ⁇ P.
  • the terminal device when the terminal device reports the parameter i (that is, P) to the network device through the capability information, the parameter iii is equal to P by default. At this time, the terminal device does not need to report the parameter iii through the capability information; vice versa. In other words, the terminal device may report any one of the parameter i and the parameter iii to the network device through the above capability information.
  • the number of groups M of measurement reports reported by each CSI in parameter 1 above may be less than or equal to the maximum number of groups of measurement reports reported by each CSI in parameter ii;
  • the total number of groups Q may be less than or equal to the maximum value of the total number of groups reported through measurement reported by multiple CSIs in parameter iii;
  • the number N of multiple CSIs in parameter 3 above may be less than or equal to the maximum number of CSIs reported in parameter iv.
  • the capability information sent by the terminal device to the network device may include the foregoing parameter i or parameter ii.
  • the terminal device sends the CSI by using the third method the terminal device sends the CSI to the network.
  • the capability information sent by the device may include the above-mentioned parameter i, parameter iii, or parameter iv; when the terminal device sends the CSI by using the above method 4, the capability information sent by the terminal device to the network device may include the parameters ii, iii, and iv. Any two items, or the capability information may also include any two items of the parameters i, ii, and iv.
  • the number of the above-mentioned space receiving filters may be the number of the space receiving filters arranged on the same antenna panel, or may be the total number of the space receiving filters arranged on multiple antenna panels, or , Can also be the number of spatial receiving filters containing antenna panel information.
  • P panel1 can be used to indicate the number of spatial receiving filters configured on panel 1
  • P panel2 can be used to indicate the spatial receiving filters configured on panel 2.
  • the form of the parameter i can be (P panel1 , P panel2 ), or P is not only a value, but a sequence of multiple values, and the number of values included in the sequence can be equal to the antenna. The number of panels.
  • the capability of the terminal device may be used as a factor for the network device to determine the foregoing parameters M, N, or Q, and the network device may also determine the foregoing parameters based on other factors, which is not limited in this application.
  • the terminal device may perform measurement based on the reference signal received by each spatial receiving filter, and report the measurement result to the network device in groups.
  • the terminal device can obtain one or more measurement results based on the reference signal received by the same spatial receiving filter.
  • one or more measurement results obtained based on the reference signal measurement received by the same spatial receiving filter may be classified as a group of measurement reports.
  • each measurement result can include one or more of the following:
  • each measurement result may only report the identifier of the reference signal resource, or only the reference signal received power information, or the identifier of the reference signal resource and the corresponding reference signal received power information.
  • each set of measurement reports may include the identification of one or more reference signal resources, or the received power information of one or more reference signals, or the identification of one or more reference signal resources, and the reference signal corresponding to the identification of each reference signal resource. Receive power information.
  • the network device and the terminal device may agree on the conditions of the reported reference signal resource, for example, when the RSRP is greater than a preset threshold, the identifier of the reference signal resource corresponding to the reference signal is reported to the network device.
  • the terminal device can only report the identification of the reference signal resource, and the network device can directly determine the corresponding transmission beam based on the identification of the received reference signal resource.
  • the network device and the terminal device may agree to measure for a certain reference signal resource in advance, and the terminal device may report the reference signal receiving power information of receiving the reference signal on the reference signal resource to the network device. In this design, the terminal device can only report the reference signal received power information.
  • the terminal device may report the identification of one or more reference signal resources with higher reference signal received power and the corresponding reference signal received power information to the network device according to the received power of the reference signal.
  • the network device may determine the corresponding transmission beam according to the identifier of the reference signal resource reported by the terminal device and the corresponding reference signal reception power information, and select a transmission beam with a higher RSRP (for example, the RSRP is greater than a preset threshold) for transmission. signal.
  • the multiple reference signal received power information may be: multiple RSRPs, or indication information of a maximum value in multiple RSRPs and a difference value relative to the maximum value .
  • the received power information of the multiple reference signals can be reported directly through the absolute value of RSRP; RSRPs other than the maximum RSRP among multiple RSRPs in each measurement report can also be reported in a differential manner. Report in a differential manner within the group.
  • the CSI may include multiple reference signal received power information.
  • the plurality of reference signal received power information may be: multiple RSRPs, or indication information of a maximum value and a difference value relative to the maximum value among the multiple RSRPs.
  • the received power of the multiple reference signals can be directly reported through the absolute value of RSRP; RSRPs other than the maximum RSRP among multiple RSRPs in multiple measurement reports can also be reported in a differential manner. Report in inter-differential mode.
  • the terminal device may first determine the maximum RSRP value from multiple RSRPs measured based on the reference signal received by the same receive beam, and then compare other RSRPs to be reported with the above. The maximum difference in RSRP is reported to the network device.
  • the terminal device may first determine the maximum RSRP value from multiple RSRPs measured based on the reference signal received by multiple receiving beams, and then compare other RSRPs to be reported with the above. The maximum difference in RSRP is reported to the network device.
  • the RSRP value gap between the groups may be large. If the differential indication method of the prior art is directly adopted, the RSRP value that needs to be indicated may exceed the value defined in the existing protocol.
  • the range that can be indicated by the difference step and the indication bit of the difference value For example, in the prior art, the difference step size is 2 dB, and the indication bit of the difference value is 4 bits, which means that the effective indication range of the difference value is at most 32 dB.
  • the difference between the absolute values of the maximum RSRP between the two sets of measurement reports may exceed 32 dB.
  • the protocol can define a larger differential step size or more indicator bits.
  • the differential step size can be set to 4dB, and the 4dB differential step size can be further limited to be used by default when packet reporting based on the spatial reception filter is turned on.
  • the indication bit of the difference value may be defined as 5 bits, and the 5 bits may be further limited to be used by default when packet reporting based on the spatial reception filter is turned on.
  • difference step size and the number of bits used to indicate the difference value are merely examples, and should not be construed as limiting in this application.
  • a protocol may define a larger or smaller differential step size, or it may define more or fewer bits to indicate a differential value.
  • each group of measurement reports further includes a group identifier, and each group identifier corresponds to a spatial receiving filter.
  • An indication field of a group identification may be included in each group of measurement reports.
  • the indication field of the group identifier may be carried by m bits, for example.
  • the group identifier may also be local, that is, the corresponding relationship between the group identifier and the spatial receiving filter in the measurement report reported by any two CSI may be different, or each time The correspondence between the group identifier in the measurement report reported by the CSI and the spatial receiving filter is independent.
  • the number of group identifiers may be determined according to the number of groups M reported by each CSI.
  • the network device may determine the correspondence between the transmit beam and the receive beam based on the group identifier carried in the same CSI report.
  • the terminal device includes 4 spatial receiving filters, for example, they can be described as spatial receiving filters # 0 to # 3, but in the CSI report, only the reference received by the spatial receiving filters # 1 and # 2 is used. Signals are measured and reported, the group identifiers can be # 1 and # 2; in the next CSI report, the terminal device may measure and report only based on the reference signals received by the spatial reception filters # 0 and # 3, and The group ID can still be # 1 and # 2, and of course it can be # 3 and # 4.
  • the network device cannot determine whether the spatial reception filter corresponding to the measurement report with the group ID # 1 in the previous CSI report and the spatial reception filter corresponding to the measurement report with the group ID # 1 in the next CSI report are the same spatial reception. It is also impossible to determine whether the spatial reception filter corresponding to the measurement report with the group ID # 2 reported by the two CSIs is the same spatial reception filter. It can be seen that when the group identifier is a local group identifier, only different group identifiers in the same CSI report can be used to distinguish different spatial receiving filters.
  • the group identifier may be global, that is, the correspondence between multiple group identifiers and multiple spatial receiving filters may be constant within a predetermined period of time, or in other words, The corresponding relationship between the group identifier in the measurement report reported by the CSI for multiple times in a predetermined period of time and the spatial receiving filter may remain unchanged.
  • the number of group identifiers may be determined by the total group number Q of a measurement report reported through CSI.
  • the total group number Q is equal to the group number M of the measurement report included in each CSI.
  • the network device may determine the correspondence between the transmit beam and the receive beam based on the group identifier carried in the multiple CSI reports.
  • the terminal device includes 4 spatial receiving filters, it can correspond to four different group identifiers.
  • the spatial receiving filter # 0 can correspond to the group identifier # 0
  • the spatial receiving filter # 1 can correspond to the group.
  • the identifier # 1 the spatial receiving filter # 2 may correspond to the group identifier # 2
  • the spatial receiving filter # 3 may correspond to the group identifier # 3.
  • the terminal device may only measure and report based on the reference signals received by the spatial receiving filters # 1 and # 2, and the group identifiers may be # 1 and # 2, respectively.
  • the terminal device may only measure and report based on the reference signals received by the spatial reception filters # 2 and # 4, and the group identifiers may be # 2 and # 4, respectively.
  • the network device can still determine that the measurement report with the group ID # 1 and the measurement report with the group ID # 4 correspond to different spatial reception filters; similarly, the CSI reports in the two groups The measurement report identified as # 2 corresponds to the same spatial receiving filter.
  • the corresponding relationship between the multiple group identifiers and multiple spatial receiving filters may remain unchanged for a predetermined period.
  • the predetermined period may be understood as an effective time window of a correspondence relationship between the multiple group identifiers and multiple spatial receiving filters.
  • the predetermined period may be any one of the following:
  • the time interval between two CSI reports, the two CSI reports satisfy: based on the same CSI report configuration or based on two CSI report configurations with the same time domain behavior parameters;
  • the time interval between two reference signal transmissions, the two reference signal transmissions satisfy: transmission based on the same reference signal resource configuration, or transmission based on the same reference signal resource set configuration, or, based on the same reference signal resource configuration Transmission, or configuration transmission based on reference signal resource having the same time domain behavior parameter;
  • the time interval between two CSI reports can be understood as the interval between the i-th CSI report time and the i + j-th CSI report time, i and j are positive integers. That is, the start time of the predetermined period may be the time of the i-th CSI report, and the end time may be the time of the i + j CSI report.
  • the time domain behavior based on the CSI report configuration based on any two CSI reports is the same.
  • the j CSI reports may all be periodic, semi-persistent, or non-periodic.
  • the j times of CSI reporting may be all based on the same CSI reporting configuration, that is, any two times of CSI reporting are based on the same CSI reporting configuration; the j times of CSI reporting may also be partially based on the same CSI reporting configuration, That is, at least two CSI reports in the j times may be based on the same CSI report configuration; the j CSI reports may also be based on different CSI report configurations, that is, the CSI report configurations based on each CSI report are different from each other . Regardless of whether the configuration is based on the same CSI report, the time domain behavior of the j CSI reports is the same.
  • the time interval between the two reference signal transmissions can be understood as the interval between the time when the p-th reference signal is sent and the time when the p + q reference signal is sent.
  • the start time of the predetermined period may be the time of sending the p-th reference signal
  • the end time may be the time of sending the p + q-th reference signal
  • the time-domain behavior of the reference signal resources used for any two reference signal transmissions is the same.
  • the q reference signal transmissions may all be periodic, semi-persistent, or non-periodic.
  • the reference signal can be CSI-RS or SSB.
  • CSI-RS can be configured by CSI-RS resource set in CSI resource setting.
  • SSB can also be used as a channel through a special CSI-SSB-ResourceSet indication. Measured SSB index.
  • all the q reference signal transmissions can be based on the same resource configuration, such as CSI resource setting; the q reference signal transmissions can also be all based on the same reference signal resource set configuration, such as CSI-RS resource qset or CSI-SSB-ResourceSet; the q times of reference signal transmission can all be based on the same reference signal resource configuration, such as CSI-RS resource or SSB resource; the q times of reference signal transmission can also be based on different resource configurations or references
  • the signal resource set configuration that is, the resource configuration based on each reference signal transmission is different from each other, and the reference resource set configuration based on each reference signal transmission is different from each other. Regardless of whether it is based on the same resource configuration or the same reference signal resource set configuration, the time domain behavior of the reference signal resource used for the q times of reference signal transmission is the same.
  • the start time of the predetermined period may be the time when the CSI reporting configuration reported by the packet is enabled, and the end time may be the time when the same CSI reporting configuration is reconfigured.
  • the CSI reporting configuration being enabled may mean that the CSI reporting configuration for enabling packet reporting is configured, and the time when the CSI reporting configuration for enabling packet reporting is enabled may be the CSI reporting for enabling packets Configure the configured time.
  • the CSI reporting configuration is enabled to distinguish between time domain behavior.
  • enabling CSI reporting configuration may be related to time domain behavior.
  • the time domain behavior configured due to CSI reporting may include periodic, semi-persistent, and non-periodic.
  • periodic CSI reporting configuration the time when the CSI reporting configuration is enabled may be the time when the CSI reporting configuration is configured, and for semi-persistent CSI reporting configuration, the time when the CSI reporting configuration is enabled It may be the time when the CSI report configuration is activated.
  • semi-persistent CSI reporting configuration the time when the CSI reporting configuration is enabled may be the time when the CSI report configuration is triggered.
  • the CSI report configuration may be configured through, for example, a high-level parameter in an RRC message.
  • the network device may indicate the configured CSI report configuration by using the CSI report configuration increase status list (csi-ReportConfigToAddModList) in the RRC message.
  • csi-ReportConfigToAddModList the CSI report configuration increase status list
  • a certain CSI report configuration appears in the above csi-ReportConfigToAddModList, it indicates that the CSI report configuration is configured.
  • the terminal device For periodic CSI reporting, when the terminal device receives the CSI reporting configuration sent by the RRC message, it can periodically report the CSI according to the CSI reporting configuration. Therefore, for periodic CSI reporting, the time when the CSI reporting configuration enabled for group reporting can be the time when the CSI reporting configuration is configured, that is, the time when the terminal device receives the CSI reporting configuration.
  • the network device may first send the CSI reporting configuration through an RRC message, and thereafter, the network device may activate the terminal device to report the CSI through MAC or CEI.
  • the network device may activate and deactivate the CSI reporting through the MAC CE.
  • the terminal device may periodically report the CSI according to the CSI reporting configuration; the terminal device may also stop reporting the CSI after receiving the MAC CE deactivation instruction.
  • the network device can activate and deactivate the CSI report through DCI.
  • the terminal device may periodically report CSI according to the CS reporting configuration; the terminal device may also stop reporting CSI after receiving the DCI deactivation instruction. Therefore, for semi-persistent CSI reporting, the time when the CSI reporting configuration with packet reporting enabled is the time when the CSI reporting configuration is activated, that is, the time when the terminal device receives the MAC CE or DCI activation instruction.
  • the network device may also first send the CSI reporting configuration via an RRC message. After that, the network device may report the CSI through a DCI trigger (trigger) terminal device. After receiving the trigger of the DCI, the terminal device can perform a CSI report according to the CSI report configuration. Therefore, for aperiodic CSI reporting, the time when the CSI reporting configuration with packet reporting enabled is the time when the CSI reporting configuration is triggered, that is, the time when the terminal device receives the DCI trigger.
  • a DCI trigger trigger
  • the CSI reporting configuration interval is enabled from re-configuration for a predetermined period of time, when the CSI reporting configuration for enabling group reporting is enabled, the correspondence between multiple group identifiers and multiple spatial receive filters takes effect, and It remains unchanged until the CSI report configuration is reconfigured.
  • the time interval from the enabling to the reconfiguration of a CSI report configuration as a predetermined period is only an example, and should not be construed as any limitation in this application.
  • the predetermined period may also be a time interval from when one CSI report configuration is enabled to another CSI report configuration is configured or reconfigured.
  • the time domain behavior of the two CSI reporting configurations is defined when the CSI reporting configuration that enables packet reporting is configured, activated, or triggered to another CSI reporting configuration being configured or reconfigured for a predetermined period of time They can be the same, for example, they can be periodic, semi-persistent, or non-periodic.
  • the start time of the predetermined period may be the time when the CSI resource configuration is enabled, and the end time may be the time when the same CSI resource configuration is reconfigured.
  • the CSI resource configuration is enabled may refer to that the CSI resource configuration is configured, and the time when the CSI resource configuration is enabled may be the time when the CSI resource configuration is configured. In this implementation, the CSI resource configuration does not distinguish between time domain behavior.
  • the CSI resource configuration is enabled may be related to time-domain behavior.
  • the time domain behavior due to CSI resource configuration can include periodic, semi-persistent, and aperiodic.
  • the time when the CSI resource configuration is enabled may be the time when the CSI resource configuration is configured; for semi-persistent CSI resource configuration, the time when the CSI resource configuration is enabled It may be the time when a CSI resource set associated with the CSI resource configuration is activated.
  • the time when the CSI resource configuration is enabled may be the time when a CSI resource set associated with the CSI resource configuration is activated. The time when it was triggered.
  • the CSI resource configuration may be configured through, for example, a high-level parameter in an RRC message.
  • the network device can indicate the configured CSI resource configuration (CSI resource configuration) through the CSI resource configuration increase status list (csi-ResourceConfigToAddModList) in the RRC message, or can add the status list through the NZP CSI-RS resource set in the RRC message (nzp-CSI-RS-ResourceSetToAddModList) indicates the configured CSI-RS resource set (CSI-RS resource set), and the status list (nzp-CSI-RS-ResourceToAddModList) can also be added through the NZP CSI-RS resource in the RRC message It indicates the configured CSI-RS resource (CSI-RS resource), and can also indicate the configured SSB resource set (SSB resource set) through the CSI-SSB resource set addition status list (CSI-SSB-ResourceSetToAddModList) in the RRC message.
  • CSI resource configuration indicates the configured CSI-RS resource (CSI-RS resource)
  • a certain CSI-RS resource configuration appears in the above csi-ResourceConfigToAddModList, it may indicate that the CSI-RS resource configuration is configured; when a certain CSI-RS resource set appears in the nzp-CSI-RS-ResourceSetToAddModList, it may indicate The CSI-RS resource set is configured; when a CSI-RS resource appears in the nzp-CSI-RS-ResourceToAddModList, it can indicate that the CSI-RS resource is configured; when a SSB resource set appears in the CSI-SSB-ResourceSetToAddModList When it is medium, it can indicate that the SSB resource set is configured.
  • the terminal device For periodic reference signal transmission, when the terminal device receives the CSI resource configuration sent by the RRC message, it can periodically receive the reference signal based on the CSI resource configuration for channel measurement. Therefore, for periodic CSI resource configuration, the time for which the CSI resource configuration reported by the enable packet is the time when the CSI resource configuration is configured, that is, the time when the terminal device receives the CSI resource configuration.
  • the network device may first send the CSI resource configuration through an RRC message, after which the network device may activate the terminal device to receive the reference signal through the MAC CE.
  • the terminal device can periodically receive the reference signal based on the CSI resource configuration activated CSI resource set; the network device can also deactivate the terminal device to receive the reference signal through the MAC CE.
  • the terminal device is receiving After receiving the deactivation instruction of MAC CE, it stops receiving the reference signal. Therefore, for semi-continuous reference signal transmission, the time to enable CSI resource configuration can be the time when a CSI resource set associated with the CSI resource configuration is activated, that is, the time when the terminal device receives the MAC CE activation command. .
  • the network device may also first send the CSI resource configuration through an RRC message. After that, the network device may receive the reference signal through a DCI trigger terminal device. After receiving the DCI trigger, the terminal device Then, the reference signal can be received based on the triggered CSI resource set based on the CSI resource configuration. Therefore, for aperiodic reference signal transmission, the time when the CSI resource configuration is enabled may be the time when a CSI resource set associated with the CSI resource configuration is triggered, that is, the time when the terminal device receives the trigger of the DCI.
  • the CSI resource set described above may be, for example, a CSI-RS resource set or an SSB resource set.
  • the predetermined period is a time interval from a CSI resource to being reconfigured
  • the correspondence between multiple group identifiers and multiple spatial receiving filters takes effect and remains unchanged until the The CSI resource configuration is reconfigured.
  • the time interval from the enabling to the reconfiguration of a CSI resource configuration as a predetermined period is only an example, and should not constitute any limitation to the present application.
  • the predetermined period may also be a time interval from when one CSI report configuration is enabled to another CSI report configuration is configured or reconfigured.
  • the time domain behavior of the two CSI reporting configurations is defined when the CSI reporting configuration that enables packet reporting is configured, activated, or triggered to another CSI reporting configuration being configured or reconfigured for a predetermined period of time They can be the same, for example, they can be periodic, semi-persistent, or non-periodic.
  • a CSI report configures the time interval from enabling to releasing:
  • the start time of the predetermined period may be the time when the CSI report configuration is enabled, and the end time may be the time when the same CSI report configuration is released.
  • the CSI report release can be configured through high-level parameters in the RRC message, for example.
  • the network device may indicate the released CSI report configuration through the CSI report configuration release list (csi-ReportConfigToReleaseList) in the RRC message.
  • csi-ReportConfigToReleaseList the CSI report configuration release list
  • a certain CSI report configuration appears in the csi-ReportConfigToReleaseList, it means that the CSI report configuration is released.
  • the start time of the predetermined period may be the time when the CSI resource configuration is enabled, and the end time may be the time when the same CSI resource configuration is released.
  • the CSI resource release can be configured through, for example, high-level parameters in the RRC message.
  • the network device may indicate the released CSI resources through the CSI resource configuration release list (csi-ResourceConfigToReleaseList) in the RRC message, or may use the NZP CSI-RS resource set release list (nzp-CSI-RS-RS- ResourceSetToReleaseList) indicates the released CSI-RS resource set. It can also indicate the released CSI-RS resources through the NZP CSI-RS resource release list (nzp-CSI-RS-ResourceReleaseList) in the RRC message.
  • the CSI-SSB-ResourceSetToReleaseList indicates the released SSB resource set.
  • a certain CSI-RS resource configuration appears in the above csi-ResourceConfigToReleaseList, it may indicate that the CSI-RS resource configuration is released; when a certain CSI-RS resource set appears in the nzp-CSI-RS-ResourceSetToReleaseList, it may indicate The CSI-RS resource set is released; when a CSI-RS resource appears in the nzp-CSI-RS-ResourceToReleaseList, it can indicate that the CSI-RS resource is released; when an SSB resource set appears in the CSI-SSB-ResourceSetToReleaseList When it is medium, it can indicate that the SSB resource is released.
  • the start time of the predetermined period may be a time configured to enable CSI reporting, and the length of the predetermined period may be indicated by a network device or may be defined by a protocol.
  • the specified length may be measured in absolute time, for example, one or more time slots, one or more symbols, or one or more seconds, one millisecond or more, one microsecond or more. Microseconds, etc .; the specified length may also be the number of CSI reports, such as one or more CSI reports. This application does not limit this. The understanding of the CSI reporting configuration is enabled has been described in detail above, for the sake of brevity, it will not be repeated here.
  • the start time of the predetermined period may be the time when the CSI resource configuration is enabled, and the length of the predetermined period may be indicated by a network device or may be defined by a protocol.
  • the specified length may be measured in absolute time, for example, one or more time slots, one or more symbols, or one or more seconds, one millisecond or more, one microsecond or more. Microseconds, etc .; the specified length may also be the number of reference signal transmissions, such as one or more reference signal transmissions.
  • This application does not limit this.
  • the understanding of the CSI resource configuration is enabled has been described in detail above, for the sake of brevity, it will not be repeated here. It should be understood that the several possible definitions of the specified time periods listed above are merely examples, and should not be construed as limiting this application in any way.
  • the predetermined time period may be any one of the items a) to h) listed above, and the predetermined time period may specifically be any one of the items a) to h) listed above may be defined by an agreement.
  • the terminal device may be instructed in advance by the network device. For example, a bitmap may be used to indicate which of the above a) to h) the predetermined period is.
  • the terminal device After the terminal device determines which of the above a) to h) the predetermined period of time, the terminal device can further determine specific parameters.
  • specific parameters of the predetermined period may be predefined, such as a protocol definition.
  • the specific parameters of any of a) to h) above are defined as defined in the protocol.
  • the start time of the predetermined period may be the time of the i-th CSI report, and the end time may be the time of the i + j CSI report.
  • the protocol may define the above i and j Value; when the predetermined period is b), the start time of the predetermined period can be the time of the p-th reference signal transmission, and the end time can be the time of the p + q reference signal transmission.
  • the protocol can define the above-mentioned p and The value of q; when the predetermined period is any one of c) to f), specific parameters may not be further defined; when the predetermined period is g) or h), the protocol may define a specified length, for example, it may be defined by absolute time
  • the specified length such as x (x> 0) timeslots or symbols, y (y> 0) seconds, milliseconds, or microseconds, or the specified length can also be defined by the number of CSI reports or the number of reference signal transmissions, such as , Z (z> 0 and an integer) CSI reports or z reference signal transmissions.
  • the method 200 further includes: the network device receives fourth indication information, where the fourth indication information is used to indicate a start time and a length of the predetermined period.
  • the terminal device receives the fourth instruction information.
  • the start time of the predetermined period may be the time of the i-th CSI report, and the end time may be the time of the i + j CSI report
  • the network device may pass the fourth instruction
  • the information indicates i and j to the terminal device; when the predetermined period is b), the start time of the predetermined period may be the time of the p-th reference signal transmission, and the end time may be the time of the p + q reference signal transmission, Then the network device may indicate p and q to the terminal device through the fourth instruction information; when the predetermined period is any one of c) to f), the network device may not indicate specific parameters; when the predetermined period is g) or h) The network device may indicate the specified duration of the predetermined time period to the terminal device through the fourth instruction information.
  • the protocol may define the definition method and timing unit of the specified duration in advance.
  • the absolute duration may be used for the protocol definition.
  • the network device may indicate a specific value through the fourth instruction information, such as the above x or y; for another example, it may be defined by the number of CSI reports or the number of reference signal transmissions.
  • the protocol may be defined in advance. CSI is reported the number of the reference signal is defined based on the number of transmissions, the network device may indicate information specific numerical values indicated by the fourth, as described above z.
  • the end time can be calculated from the start time and length. Therefore, the network device can indicate any two items of the start time, length, and end time of the predetermined period to the terminal device.
  • the terminal device can Term infers another term. Therefore, when the network device indicates to the terminal device any of the start time, length, and end time of the predetermined period by the fourth instruction information, it should fall within the protection scope of this application.
  • the method for defining the predetermined period is not limited to the above.
  • the predetermined period may also be determined through a combination of a protocol definition and a network device indication.
  • the start time of the predetermined period may also be the time when the terminal device receives the fourth instruction information.
  • the fourth instruction information may further indicate the duration of the predetermined period.
  • the method for the terminal device to determine the predetermined time period includes, but is not limited to, the foregoing list. For the sake of brevity, no further examples are given here.
  • the network device by carrying the group identifier in the measurement report, it is convenient for the network device to obtain the correspondence between the transmitting beam and the receiving beam. However, it should be understood that this is not the only way to determine the correspondence between the transmit beam and the receive beam. For example, when a terminal device reports multiple sets of measurement reports through multiple CSIs, the terminal device may also use a one-bit indication field to indicate the spatial reception filter corresponding to the current CSI report and the previous CSI report each time the CSI reports The device is the same. For example, "0" means different, and "1" means the same.
  • the results obtained based on the measurement of the reference signal received by a spatial receiving filter may be classified into a group of measurement reports, and thus one or more spatial filtering may be obtained.
  • the terminal device can report the measurement results to the network device in groups by CSI.
  • This method of group report CSI based on spatial reception filter is called group report based on spatial reception filter.
  • UE Rx beam based a packet reporting based on a receiving beam
  • simultaneous reporting Simultaneous reception based packet reporting
  • group reporting based group reporting for short.
  • the CSI reporting method may also include non-packet reporting.
  • the method 200 further includes: step 270, the network device sends first indication information, where the first indication information is used to indicate a first reporting mode, and the first reporting mode is based on a spatial reception filter Reported in groups.
  • step 270 the terminal device receives the first indication information.
  • the first indication information may be carried in a CSI report configuration (CSI report setting) of the RRC message.
  • the first indication information may be used to indicate one of a plurality of reporting methods, and the multiple reporting methods at least include group reporting based on a spatial receiving filter.
  • the indication field of the first indication information may be carried in an information element (CSI-ReportConfig), which is used to notify the terminal.
  • future protocols may support more than one reporting method.
  • first reporting method that is, a group reporting method based on a spatial reception filter
  • second and third reporting methods and even more. Way of reporting.
  • the second reporting method may be, for example, packet reporting based on simultaneous reception
  • the third reporting method may be, for example, non-packet reporting. This application does not limit this.
  • the first indication information may be carried in a packet reporting parameter of the above-mentioned CSI reporting configuration.
  • the first reporting method can be understood as the first packet reporting method, and the first indication information can be used to indicate one of multiple packet reporting methods.
  • the multiple packet reporting methods at least include packet reporting based on a spatial receiving filter. .
  • the first indication information is carried in the packet reporting parameters configured in the CSI reporting, for example, the first indication information may be configured in a beam based reporting field in the CSI reporting configuration information element, or a beam in the CSI reporting configuration information element.
  • the packet is reported in the enabled state in the parameter field.
  • future protocols may support more than one reporting method.
  • first reporting method group-based reporting method based on the spatial reception filter
  • second and fourth reporting methods and even more.
  • Reporting method may be, for example, packet reporting based on simultaneous reception
  • fourth reporting method may be, for example, packet reporting based on interference measurement. This application does not limit this.
  • the information element or field carrying the first indication information may be enumerated in a form of enumeration, for example, the first indication information may indicate Reporting method based on the spatial receiving filter; the index or identification of a certain reporting method may also be indicated by an indication bit, for example, the first indication information may indicate the index or identification corresponding to the reporting method based on the spatial receiving filter Wait.
  • the time domain behavior based on the CSI reporting configuration is different, and the first indication information may also be carried in different signaling.
  • the first indication information may be carried in one or more of an RRC message, a MAC CE, and a DCI.
  • the time domain behavior of the CSI reporting configuration may be periodic reporting, and the first indication information may be carried in an RRC message.
  • the network device may send a CSI report configuration and a CSI resource configuration through an RRC message, and the first indication information may be carried in the CSI report configuration or the CSI resource configuration.
  • the time domain behavior of the CSI reporting configuration may be semi-continuous reporting, and the first indication information may be carried in the MAC CE.
  • the network device may send a CSI report configuration and a CSI resource configuration through an RRC message in advance.
  • the network device can activate the CSI reporting configuration through MAC CE or DCI or can also connect with CSI resource configuration through MAC CE.
  • the first indication information may be carried in an activation instruction of the MAC CE or DCI.
  • the terminal device may perform CSI reporting according to the reporting manner indicated by the first instruction information.
  • the time domain behavior configured by the CSI report may be aperiodic reporting
  • the first indication information may be jointly indicated by an RRC message and a DCI.
  • the network device may send a CSI report configuration and a CSI resource configuration through an RRC message in advance. After that, the network device can trigger the CSI report and / or receive the reference signal through DCI.
  • the first indication information may be carried in the DCI. That is, the terminal device can perform CSI reporting according to the CSI reporting mode indicated by the DCI.
  • the terminal device can perform channel measurement and reporting based on the reference signal received by each receiving beam, so that the network device can obtain more information about the pairing relationship between the transmitting beam and the receiving beam.
  • the network device can perform more reasonable beam management according to the beam pairing relationship, so as to obtain a beam forming gain to a greater extent, which is beneficial to improving system performance.
  • the terminal device can perform channel measurement and reporting based on the reference signals received by multiple receiving beams, so that the network device can obtain the pairing relationship between multiple receiving beams and transmitting beams, and a tilting or flipping of the terminal device results in a corresponding receiving beam
  • the network device can also switch to the transmit beam corresponding to another wireless link with better quality, so that the terminal device switches to the corresponding receive beam to receive the signal, which can avoid frequent triggering of the beam failure recovery process. . Therefore, the robustness of the beam pairing relationship can be improved, which can also improve the robustness of the communication system, which is beneficial to improving the transmission efficiency and at the same time it is beneficial to improving the user experience.
  • network equipment should try to monitor the quality of the wireless link based on the different receiving beams of the terminal equipment, so that even if the terminal equipment tilts or rolls over, the receiving quality of the currently used receiving beam is reduced, and other chains are being monitored.
  • the terminal device can switch the receive beam, thereby avoiding frequent triggering of beam failure recovery procedures.
  • this application further proposes a beam diversity quality monitoring mechanism.
  • the beam diversity quality monitoring mechanism aims to monitor the radio link quality based on different receiving beams of the terminal equipment.
  • the quality of multiple wireless links based on multiple beams or beam pairs can be maintained between the network equipment and the terminal equipment.
  • the terminal device can receive the configuration information of the network device, measure and obtain the quality of the multiple wireless links corresponding to multiple beams or beam pairs (that is, measure the quality of multiple beams), and measure the quality according to the configuration of the network device. The obtained results are reported, so that the network device can obtain the quality monitoring results of multiple wireless links.
  • the network device may further determine a reference signal resource set for beam diversity quality monitoring.
  • the reference signal sent based on the reference signal resource set can be used to detect the quality of multiple wireless links corresponding to multiple beams or beam pairs.
  • the method 200 further includes: step 280, the terminal device receives third indication information, where the third indication information is used to indicate multiple reference signal resources, and the multiple reference signal resources are composed of at least two groups Measurement report confirmed.
  • the network device sends the third instruction information, where the third instruction information is used to indicate multiple reference signal resources, where the multiple reference signal resources are determined by at least two sets of measurement reports.
  • the multiple reference signal resources indicated by the third indication information are reference signal resources used for the foregoing beam diversity quality monitoring.
  • the above measurement reports may be the measurement reports described in steps 210 and 220 above.
  • Each group of measurement reports may correspond to one spatial reception filter, and different groups of measurement reports correspond to different spatial reception filters.
  • the third indication information includes identifiers of multiple reference signal resources, and the identifiers of the multiple reference signal resources are from at least two groups of the foregoing measurement reports.
  • the multiple reference signal resources indicated by the third indication information may correspond to at least two spatial receiving filters. It should be understood that the identifier of the reference signal resource is only an example of the third indication information and should not be construed as any limitation in this application.
  • the third indication information may also be other information used to indicate the reference signal resource.
  • the plurality of reference signal resources indicated by the third indication information correspond to the plurality of spatial receiving filters on a one-to-one basis.
  • each reference signal resource may correspond to a spatial receiving filter, or each reference signal resource may be determined by a set of measurement reports described above.
  • the multiple reference signal resources may be configured by the network device to the terminal device to perform beam diversity quality monitoring.
  • the multiple reference signal resources indicated by the third indication information may be configured through high-level signaling, for example, a reference signal resource set is configured through an RRC message, for example, denoted as q A , the reference signal resource.
  • the set q A may include the plurality of reference signal resources corresponding to the plurality of spatial receiving filters on a one-to-one basis.
  • the multiple reference signal resources indicated by the third indication information may correspond to multiple spatial receiving filters.
  • I reference signal resources may correspond to J spatial receiving filters (I> J> 1, I and J are integers).
  • the L reference signal resources of the I reference signal resources may correspond to J spatial receiving filters, and the remaining I-J reference signal resources may correspond to at least one of the J spatial receiving filters.
  • the multiple reference signal resources indicated by the third indication information can be divided into a first resource group and a second resource group.
  • the reference signal resources in the first resource group may correspond to, for example, the above-mentioned IL reference signal resources, and may be used for beam failure monitoring defined in the existing protocol; the reference signal resources in the second resource group may correspond to the above-mentioned L references. Signal resources can be used for beam diversity quality monitoring.
  • the measurement result when a measurement result obtained by performing beam quality measurement based on a reference signal resource (ie, a reference signal resource in a first resource group) used for beam failure monitoring satisfies a preset condition, the measurement result may be counted into a beam Failure count.
  • the first resource group may be the reference signal resource set q 0 configured in Beam-Failure-Detection-RS-ResourceConfig introduced above.
  • the number of beam failures is greater than the beamFailureInstanceMaxCount, a beam failure recovery process may be triggered.
  • the specific process and method of beam failure detection can refer to the prior art. For brevity, detailed description of the specific process and method is omitted here.
  • the measurement results obtained are not included in the beam failure count.
  • the network device may also notify the terminal device of the L reference signal resources by using the additional instruction information. Therefore, after step 230, optionally, the method 200 further includes step 290: the network device sends fifth indication information, where the fifth indication information is used to indicate L reference signal resources.
  • step 290 the terminal device receives the foregoing fifth instruction information.
  • the reference signal resources in the second resource group indicated by the fifth indication information may be the aforementioned L reference signal resources.
  • the fifth indication information may specifically be an identifier of the L reference signal resources, or an identification sequence, or an index of the L reference signal resources in the I reference signal resource, or an index sequence.
  • the fifth indication information may also indicate the number L of reference signal resources. For example, it may be agreed through the protocol that the above-mentioned L reference signal resources are always placed at the beginning or end of the I reference signals in order. L, you can know which reference signal resources are not counted in the beam failure count.
  • the method 200 further includes: the network device sends a reference signal based on the multiple reference signal resources.
  • the terminal device receives a reference signal based on the plurality of reference signal resources.
  • the terminal device may receive the reference signal sent by the network device based on the third reference information received in step 280, based on the multiple reference signal resources, to evaluate the radio link quality.
  • the specific method for the terminal device to perform beam quality measurement based on the configured reference signal resource may refer to the specific method for beam quality measurement based on the reference signal resource in the prior art for beam failure monitoring.
  • a detailed description of the specific method is omitted here.
  • the reference signal resources configured by the network device may correspond to multiple receive beams of the terminal device, so multiple wireless chains corresponding to multiple receive beams may be used. Road for quality monitoring.
  • the terminal device After the network device obtains the measurement report of the terminal device based on the spatial reception filter through the packet reporting method based on the spatial reception filter, and configures a reference signal resource for beam diversity quality monitoring, the terminal device can use the beam diversity quality monitoring
  • the mechanism obtains beam quality based on different spatial receive filters.
  • the terminal device will obtain the indication information of a spatial reception filter indicated by the network device through signaling, such as the TCI status list described above.
  • the specific indication method please refer to the current There are technologies, which are not repeated here.
  • the terminal device may find that the beam quality corresponding to the currently used spatial receiving filter decreases, and The quality of the beams corresponding to other spatial receiving filters has risen or maintained at a better level.
  • the better level may be a threshold, for example. At this time, the terminal device can avoid the failure to recover from entering the beam through the following implementation methods.
  • the terminal device may first adjust the spatial receiving filter by itself, and may report the adjustment information to the network device after the adjustment.
  • the beneficial effect of this implementation mode is that the terminal device directly adjusts the spatial reception filter, the current link communication is not easy to be interrupted, and the link quality after adjusting the spatial reception filter may be restored to above the threshold, which can ensure normality.
  • Communication The terminal device can report the adjustment information of the spatial receiving filter (that is, the adjustment information of the received beam) to the network device on the premise of ensuring normal communication, to help the network device adjust the transmit beam.
  • the terminal device may report adjustment information of the spatial receiving filter through a physical random access channel (physical random access channel (PRACH)).
  • PRACH physical random access channel
  • the terminal device may report the adjustment information of the spatial receiving filter through a physical uplink control channel (PUCCH).
  • PUCCH physical uplink control channel
  • the adjustment information of the spatial reception filter is an identifier corresponding to the spatial reception filter selected by the terminal device, and the identifier may be indication information of a reference signal resource corresponding to the spatial reception filter, and the indication information of the reference signal resource.
  • the reference signal resource is a certain reference signal resource configured in a reference signal resource set used for beam diversity quality monitoring.
  • the network device notifies the terminal device of the adjustment information of the transmission beam.
  • the notification information may be carried in RRC, MAC-CE, or dynamic signaling, for example.
  • the adjustment information may be an indication, an acknowlegeement, or a response.
  • the network device does not need to notify the terminal device of the adjustment information of the transmission beam.
  • the terminal device may default the network device to adjust the transmit beam according to the adjustment information of the spatial receiving filter.
  • the terminal device may report a better spatial receiving filter to the network device according to the monitoring result of the beam diversity quality, and then the network device selects and instructs the corresponding spatial receiving filter to the terminal device.
  • the network device can configure the terminal device with reference signal resources corresponding to different receiving beams. Therefore, when the terminal device's tilt or rollover causes the reception quality of some of the receiving beams to decrease, other receiving beams can be used to evaluate the wireless link quality . Thereby, frequent failure recovery from entering the beam can be avoided, which is beneficial to improving the robustness of the beam pairing relationship, thereby improving the robustness of the transmission system, and improving the user experience.
  • This application also provides a method for receiving and sending reference signals, which is beneficial to improving the robustness and user experience of the transmission system.
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic flowchart of a method 300 for receiving and sending a reference signal according to another embodiment of the present application, which is shown from the perspective of device interaction. As shown, the method 300 shown in FIG. 3 includes steps 310 to 330. The method 300 is described in detail below with reference to FIG. 3.
  • step 310 the network device sends third indication information, where the third indication information is used to indicate multiple reference signal resources, and the multiple reference signal resources correspond to at least two spatial receiving filters.
  • the terminal device receives third indication information, where the third indication information is used to indicate multiple reference signal resources that correspond to at least two spatial receiving filters.
  • the multiple reference signal resources indicated by the third indication information may be used for beam diversity quality monitoring.
  • the multiple reference signal resources may correspond to at least two spatial receiving filters. Any one of the spatial receiving filters may correspond to one or more reference signal resources. If the terminal device reports in groups based on the spatial receiving filter, each group of measurement reports is measured based on a reference signal received by a spatial receiving filter.
  • the measurement report may be a measurement report reported based on the spatial receiving filter packet described in the method 200 above.
  • step 310 in method 300 is the same as step 280 in method 200 above. Since step 280 has been described in detail with reference to FIG. 2 above, for the sake of brevity, it will not be repeated here.
  • step 320 the network device sends a reference signal on the multiple reference signal resources.
  • the terminal device receives a reference signal on the multiple reference signal resources.
  • the plurality of reference signal resources indicated by the third indication information correspond to the plurality of spatial receiving filters on a one-to-one basis.
  • the multiple reference signal resources indicated by the third indication information may correspond to multiple spatial receiving filters.
  • I reference signal resources correspond to J spatial receiving filters, I> J> 1, and I and J are integers.
  • the multiple reference signal resources include a first resource group and a second resource group.
  • the second resource group includes L (L ⁇ J) reference signal resources corresponding to the J spatial receiving filters.
  • the first resource group includes IL reference signal resources corresponding to at least one of the three spatial receiving filters. Among them, only the beam quality monitoring results of the reference signal resources in the first resource group can be counted into the number of beam failures.
  • the reference signal resources in the first resource group can be the Beam-Failure- Q 0 in Detection-RS-ResourceConfig.
  • the method 300 further includes: Step 330: The network device sends fifth indication information, where the fifth indication information indicates a reference signal resource in the second resource group.
  • step 330 the terminal device receives the foregoing fifth instruction information.
  • step 330 in method 300 is the same as step 290 in method 200 above. Since step 290 has been described in detail in conjunction with FIG. 2 above, for the sake of brevity, it will not be repeated here.
  • the network device can configure the terminal device with reference signal resources corresponding to different receiving beams. Therefore, when the terminal device is tilted or flipped and the receiving quality of some receiving beams is degraded, other receiving beams can be used to evaluate the quality of the wireless link. . Thus, frequent failure recovery of beams can be avoided, which is beneficial to improving the robustness of the transmission system and to improving the user experience.
  • This application also provides a method for receiving and sending CSI, which is beneficial to improve the robustness of the system.
  • FIG. 4 is a schematic flowchart of a method for receiving and sending CSI according to another embodiment of the present application, which is shown from the perspective of device interaction. As shown, the method 400 shown in FIG. 4 includes steps 410 to 450. The method 400 is described in detail below with reference to FIG. 4.
  • the terminal device In step 410, the terminal device generates CSI, where the CSI includes one or more sets of measurement information, each set of measurement information is obtained based on multiple reference signal measurements that can be received simultaneously, and each set of measurement information includes at least a first indication bit, The first indication bit is used to indicate the number of spatial receiving filters that receive the multiple reference signals.
  • step 420 the terminal device sends the CSI.
  • step 420 the network device receives the CSI.
  • step 430 the network device determines whether multiple reference signals corresponding to each set of measurement information are received by the same spatial receiving filter according to the CSI.
  • the terminal device can measure based on multiple reference signals that can be received simultaneously, and report the results obtained based on the multiple reference signals that can be received simultaneously to the network device in the form of measurement information.
  • Each group of measurement information may correspond to multiple reference signal resources.
  • each group of measurement information may include identifiers of multiple reference signal resources, or each group of measurement information may include measurements obtained according to multiple predetermined reference signal resources.
  • RSRP reference signal resource
  • the measurement information may further include an indication bit for indicating the number of spatial receiving filters that receive the multiple reference signals, so that the network device learns whether the multiple reference signals corresponding to each set of measurement information can be composed of one or more spaces. Receive filter received. Therefore, it is beneficial for the network device to obtain more information about the correspondence between the receiving beam and the transmitting beam.
  • the network device may directly determine that multiple reference signal resources in the measurement information correspond to the same spatial reception.
  • the filter can also determine that the transmit beam corresponding to the multiple reference signal resources corresponds to a receive beam.
  • the method 400 further includes: step 440, the network device sends a reference signal, where the reference signal is used for channel measurement.
  • the terminal device receives a reference signal, which is used for channel measurement.
  • step 440 is the same as step 240 in method 200 described above. For brevity, details are not described herein again.
  • “can be received simultaneously” here means that the terminal device has the ability to receive multiple reference signals at the same time, and does not mean that the multiple reference signals must be received by the terminal device at the same time. Whether it can be received simultaneously is related to the capabilities of the terminal device.
  • the terminal device has the ability to receive through two receiving beams at the same time, which are called receiving beam # 1 and receiving beam # 2, and the transmitting beams # 1- # 8 of the network device are sent by polling.
  • receiving beam # 1 the channel quality of transmitting beam # 1 is the best
  • receiving beam # 2 the channel quality of transmitting beam # 6 is the best.
  • the terminal device can also receive at the same time. If the terminal equipment can only be received by one receiving beam at the same time, the transmitting beams # 1 and # 6 in the above example can be considered to be simultaneously received by the terminal equipment only when they are received by the same receiving beam.
  • a terminal device can report two reference signal resource identifiers, and the two reference signal resource identifiers can be received by the terminal device at the same time, but the prior art does not distinguish between these two reference signal resource identifiers. Received by the same spatial reception filter, or received by multiple spatial reception filters.
  • the terminal device may report in groups according to the measurement results of multiple reference signals that can be received at the same time, and further indicate the reported multiple signals that can be received at the same time through the first indication bit while reporting the measurement results. Whether the two reference signals are received by the same receiving beam at the same time or by multiple receiving beams at the same time.
  • multiple measurement results obtained based on multiple reference signal measurements that can be received simultaneously can be classified as a set of measurement information. .
  • each measurement result can include one or more of the following:
  • each reference signal received power information may be obtained by receiving a reference signal based on a reference signal resource indicated by an identifier of a reference signal resource and performing measurement.
  • the measurement result may include only the identifier of the reference signal resource, or only the reference signal received power information, or the identifier and reference of the reference signal resource.
  • the signal received power information may even include information other than the identification of the reference signal resource or the reference signal received power information.
  • a set of measurement information may further include a first indication bit, which is used to indicate whether multiple reference signals corresponding to the multiple measurement results in the set of measurement information are received by the same spatial receiving filter. .
  • the protocol may define a new report quantity in advance, and the report quantity may be indicated by a high-level parameter.
  • the protocol can further configure the format corresponding to the report through CSI reporting settings, such as "CRI-RSRP-nrofReceivedBeam”, or “CRI-nrofReceivedBeam”, or “RSRP-nrofReceivedBeam”, or "SSBRI-RSRP-nrofReceivedBeam”, or "SSBRI-RSRP-nrofReceivedBeam”, or SSBRI-nrofReceivedBeam "and so on.
  • CSI reporting settings such as "CRI-RSRP-nrofReceivedBeam", or "CRI-nrofReceivedBeam”, or “RSRP-nrofReceivedBeam”, or "SSBRI-RSRP-nrofReceivedBeam”, or SSBRI-nrofReceivedBeam "and so on.
  • CSI reporting settings
  • the terminal device may set the bit to "0" when reporting the CSI according to the actual measurement result, indicating that the reported reference signal resource identifier may be Received by a spatial receiving filter at the same time, otherwise set to "1" indicates that the reported reference signal resource identifier can be received by multiple spatial receiving filters at the same time.
  • the protocol defaults that when the first indication bit is set to "1", there is a one-to-one correspondence between the reported reference signal resource identifier and the spatial reception filter, for example, when two CRIs are reported The two CRIs are received by two spatial receiving filters simultaneously, which is also equivalent to the default terminal device having the capability of receiving through two spatial receiving filters at the same time.
  • the network device may determine the number of spatial receiving filters used by the terminal device to receive the multiple reference signals according to the first indication bit, and may further determine the reference signal resources in each set of measurement information and the spatial receiving filters of the terminal device.
  • the corresponding relationship that is, the pairing relationship between the transmission beam and the reception beam can be determined.
  • the network device may ignore the first indication bit in the CSI, or the terminal device may ignore the The reporting requirement of the first indication bit in the report quantity.
  • the terminal device can report one or more sets of measurement information in one CSI. This application does not limit this.
  • a terminal device may be configured with a radio frequency (RF) chain, and each radio frequency channel can only receive signals through one receiving beam at the same time. Therefore, regardless of whether the network device sends multiple transmit beams at the same time or polls multiple transmit beams, the terminal device is classified into a set of measurement information based on the measurement results of multiple reference signals that can be simultaneously received by one receive beam.
  • the CSI may include a set of measurement information, and reference signals corresponding to multiple measurement results in the set of measurement information are received by a same receiving beam.
  • the terminal device may be configured with multiple radio frequency channels. Because each radio frequency channel can only receive signals through one receiving beam at the same time, the multiple radio frequency channels can receive signals through multiple receiving beams at the same time. Assume that the terminal equipment is configured with radio frequency channels # 1 and # 2. Radio frequency channel # 1 can use the receiving beams # 1 to # 4 to receive signals in turn, and radio frequency channel # 2 can use the receiving beam # in turn. 5 to # 8 receive signals. When the network device sends multiple transmission beams, it is recorded as transmission beams # 1 to # 8, for example. At the same time, the RF channels # 1 and # 2 can use one receiving beam to receive signals, respectively.
  • receiving beams # 1 and # 5 can simultaneously receive transmitting beams # 2 and # 7
  • receiving beams # 2 and # 6 can simultaneously receive transmitting beams # 3 and # 5
  • receiving beams # 3 and # 7 can simultaneously receive
  • receive beams # 4 and # 8 can receive transmit beams # 3 and # 6 at the same time.
  • the CSI may include four sets of measurement information, each set of measurement information includes two measurement results, and the reference signals corresponding to the two measurement results in each set of measurement information are received by different two receiving beams.
  • the method 400 further includes: Step 450, the network device sends sixth indication information, where the sixth indication information is used to indicate a second reporting mode, and the second reporting mode is a packet based on a reference signal that can be received simultaneously. Escalation.
  • step 450 the terminal device receives the foregoing sixth instruction information.
  • the CSI reporting method may include packet reporting based on a spatial reception filter, may also include packet reporting based on a reference signal that can be simultaneously received, and may also include non-packet reporting. Therefore, the network device can indicate the reporting mode to the terminal device in advance.
  • the sixth instruction information used to indicate the second reporting mode may be carried in the RRC message.
  • it may be carried in the CSI reporting configuration carried in the RRC message, or it may be carried in the packet reporting parameters of the CSI reporting configuration.
  • the specific method for carrying the sixth indication information through the RRC message may be similar to the specific method for carrying the first indication information through the RRC message in step 270 in the method 200. For brevity, a detailed description of the specific method is omitted here.
  • the sixth indication information may be carried in one or more of the following: an RRC message, a MAC CE, and a DCI.
  • a specific method for carrying the sixth instruction information through different signaling may be similar to the specific method for carrying the first instruction information through different signaling in step 270 in the method 200. For the sake of brevity, a detailed description of the specific method is omitted here.
  • the terminal device when the terminal device reports the CSI based on the multiple reference signals received at the same time, the terminal device carries indication bits for indicating the number of spatial receiving filters that receive the multiple reference signals, so that the network device can obtain the reference signal resources and The corresponding relationship of the spatial receiving filter, that is, the pairing relationship between multiple receiving beams and transmitting beams can be obtained.
  • the TCI status list corresponding to a certain receiving beam is invalid due to the tilting or overturning of the terminal device, it can also switch to other receiving beams with better link quality, which can avoid frequent triggering of the beam failure recovery process. Therefore, the robustness of the beam pairing relationship is improved, which is conducive to improving the robustness of the transmission system, improving the transmission efficiency, and at the same time improving the user experience.
  • transmission beams corresponding to different reception beams can be selected to communicate with different terminal devices, which can avoid interference between multiple users to the greatest extent, that is, improve the interference resistance. Overall, system performance is improved.
  • the size of the sequence numbers of the processes does not mean the order of execution.
  • the execution order of each process should be determined by its function and internal logic, and should not constitute any limitation on the implementation process of the embodiments of this application. .
  • FIG. 5 is a schematic block diagram of a communication device according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication device 500 may include a processing unit 510 and a transceiver unit 520.
  • the communication device 500 may correspond to the terminal device in the foregoing method embodiment.
  • the communication device 500 may be a terminal device or a chip configured in the terminal device.
  • the communication device 500 may correspond to the terminal device in the method 200, 300, or 400 according to the embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication device 500 may include a method for performing the method 200 in FIG. 2, the method 300 in FIG. 3, or Elements of the method performed by the terminal device in the method 400 in FIG. 4.
  • each unit in the communication device 500 and the other operations and / or functions described above are respectively used to implement a corresponding process of the method 200 in FIG. 2, the method 300 in FIG. 3, or the method 400 in FIG. 4.
  • the processing unit 510 may be used to perform step 210 in the method 200, and the transceiver unit 520 may be used to perform steps 220 and 240 to step 290 in the method 200.
  • the transceiver unit 510 may be used to execute steps 310 to 330 in the method 300.
  • the processing unit 510 may be used to execute step 410 in the method 400, and the transceiver unit 510 may be used to execute steps 420, 440, and 450 in the method 400.
  • the processing unit 510 may correspond to the processor 601 in the terminal device 600 shown in FIG. 6, and the transceiver unit 520 may correspond to the transceiver in the terminal device 600 shown in FIG. 602.
  • the communication device 500 may correspond to the network device in the foregoing method embodiment.
  • the communication device 500 may be a network device or a chip configured in the network device.
  • the communication device 500 may correspond to the network device in the method 200, 300, or 400 according to the embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication device 500 may include a method for performing the method 200 in FIG. 2, the method 300 in FIG. 3, or The elements of the method performed by the network device in the method 400 in FIG. 4.
  • each unit in the communication device 500 and the other operations and / or functions described above are respectively used to implement a corresponding process of the method 200 in FIG. 2, the method 300 in FIG. 3, or the method 400 in FIG. 4.
  • the transceiver unit 520 may be used to execute step 220 and steps 240 to 290 in the method 200, and the processing unit 510 may be used to execute step 230 in the method 200.
  • the transceiver unit 520 may be used to execute steps 310 to 330 in the method 300.
  • the transceiver unit 520 may be used to execute steps 420, 440, and 450 in the method 400, and the processing unit 510 may be used to execute step 430 in the method 400.
  • processing unit 510 in the communication device 500 may correspond to the processor 710 in the network device 700 shown in FIG. 7, and the transceiver unit 520 may correspond to the transceiver in the network device 700 shown in FIG. 7. 720.
  • FIG. 6 is a schematic structural diagram of a terminal device 600 according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the terminal device 600 includes a processor 601 and a transceiver 602.
  • the terminal device 500 further includes a memory 603.
  • the processor 601, the transceiver 602, and the memory 603 can communicate with each other through an internal connection path to transfer control and / or data signals.
  • the memory 603 is used to store a computer program
  • the processor 601 is used to store the computer program from the memory 603.
  • the computer program is called and executed to control the transceiver 602 to send and receive signals.
  • the terminal device 500 may further include an antenna 504 for sending uplink data or uplink control signaling output by the transceiver 602 through a wireless signal.
  • the processor 601 and the memory 603 may be combined into a processing device, and the processor 601 is configured to execute program codes stored in the memory 603 to implement the foregoing functions. It should be understood that the processing devices shown in the figures are merely examples. In specific implementation, the memory 603 may also be integrated in the processor 601 or independent of the processor 601. This application does not limit this.
  • the above-mentioned terminal device 600 further includes an antenna 610 for sending uplink data or uplink control signaling output by the transceiver 602 through a wireless signal.
  • the processor 601 When the program instructions stored in the memory 603 are executed by the processor 601, the processor 601 is configured to generate one or more CSIs, and control the transceiver 602 to send one or more CSIs.
  • Each CSI includes one or more sets of measurement reports, and each set of measurement reports is obtained based on a reference signal measurement received by a spatial receiving filter, and each group of measurements is performed when the total number of measurement reports is multiple.
  • the spatial receiving filters corresponding to the report are different from each other.
  • the terminal device 600 may correspond to the terminal device in the method 200, 300, or 400 according to the embodiment of the present application, and the terminal device 600 may include a method for performing the method 200 in FIG. 2, the method 300 in FIG. 3, or Elements of the method performed by the terminal device in the method 400 in FIG. 4.
  • each unit in the terminal device 600 and the other operations and / or functions described above respectively implement the corresponding processes of the method 200 in FIG. 2, the method 300 in FIG. 3, or the method 400 in FIG. 4.
  • the foregoing processor 601 may be used to execute the actions implemented in the terminal device described in the foregoing method embodiment, and the transceiver 602 may be used to execute the terminal device described in the foregoing method embodiment that is sent to or received from the network device by the terminal device. action.
  • the transceiver 602 may be used to execute the terminal device described in the foregoing method embodiment that is sent to or received from the network device by the terminal device. action.
  • the above-mentioned terminal device 600 may further include a power source 605 for supplying power to various devices or circuits in the terminal device.
  • the terminal device 600 may further include one or more of an input unit 606, a display unit 607, an audio circuit 608, a camera 609, and a sensor 622, and the audio circuit It may also include a speaker 6082, a microphone 6084, and the like.
  • FIG. 7 is a schematic structural diagram of a network device 700 according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the network device 700 includes a processor 710 and a transceiver 720.
  • the network device 700 further includes a memory 730.
  • the processor 710, the transceiver 720, and the memory 730 communicate with each other through an internal connection path to transfer control and / or data signals.
  • the memory 730 is used to store a computer program, and the processor 710 is used to call from the memory 730.
  • the computer program is run to control the transceiver 720 to send and receive signals.
  • the processor 710 and the memory 730 may be combined into a processing device, and the processor 710 is configured to execute program codes stored in the memory 730 to implement the foregoing functions.
  • the memory 730 may also be integrated in the processor 710 or independent of the processor 710.
  • the above-mentioned network device 700 may further include an antenna 740 for sending downlink data or downlink control signaling output by the transceiver 720 through a wireless signal.
  • the processor 710 When the program instructions stored in the memory 730 are executed by the processor 710, the processor 710 is used to control the transceiver 720 to receive one or more CSIs, and is used to determine that each set of measurement reports corresponds to one space reception according to the one or more CSIs Filters, and when multiple sets of measurement reports are received, the spatial receiving filters corresponding to each set of measurement reports are different from each other.
  • the network device 700 may correspond to the network device in the method 200, 300, or 400 according to the embodiment of the present application, and the network device 700 may include a method for performing the method 200 in FIG. 2, the method 300 in FIG. 3, or The elements of the method performed by the network device in the method 400 in FIG. 4.
  • each unit in the network device 700 and the other operations and / or functions described above respectively implement the corresponding processes of the method 200 in FIG. 2, the method 300 in FIG. 3, or the method 400 in FIG. 4, and each unit executes the corresponding operations.
  • the specific process of the steps has been described in detail in the foregoing method embodiments, and for the sake of brevity, they are not repeated here.
  • the foregoing processor 710 may be configured to perform the actions implemented by the network device described in the foregoing method embodiment, and the transceiver 720 may be configured to execute the network device described in the foregoing method embodiment to send or receive from the terminal device to the terminal device. action.
  • the transceiver 720 may be configured to execute the network device described in the foregoing method embodiment to send or receive from the terminal device to the terminal device. action.
  • processors in the embodiment of the present application may be a central processing unit (CPU), and the processor may also be other general-purpose processors, digital signal processors (DSPs), and application-specific integrated circuits.
  • DSPs digital signal processors
  • application-specific integrated circuits application specific integrated circuit, ASIC
  • ASIC application specific integrated circuit
  • FPGA field programmable gate array
  • other programmable logic devices discrete gate or transistor logic devices, discrete hardware components, etc.
  • the memory in the embodiments of the present application may be a volatile memory or a non-volatile memory, or may include both volatile and non-volatile memory.
  • the non-volatile memory may be a read-only memory (ROM), a programmable read-only memory (PROM), an erasable programmable read-only memory (EPROM), and an electrically erasable programmable ROM.
  • ROM read-only memory
  • PROM programmable read-only memory
  • EPROM erasable programmable read-only memory
  • EPROM erasable programmable read-only memory
  • electrically erasable programmable ROM electrically erasable programmable ROM.
  • Read memory electrically EPROM, EEPROM
  • the volatile memory may be random access memory (RAM), which is used as an external cache.
  • RAM random access memory
  • SRAM static random access memory
  • DRAM dynamic random access memory
  • DRAM synchronous dynamic random access Access memory
  • SDRAM synchronous dynamic random access Access memory
  • double SDRAM double SDRAM
  • DDR SDRAM double data rate synchronous dynamic random access memory
  • enhanced SDRAM enhanced synchronous dynamic random access memory
  • SLDRAM synchronous connection dynamic random access Fetch memory
  • direct RAMbus RAM direct RAMbus RAM, DR RAM
  • the present application also provides a computer program product, the computer program product includes: computer program code, when the computer program code is run on a computer, the computer executes FIG. 2, FIG. 3, or The method in the embodiment shown in FIG. 4.
  • the present application further provides a computer-readable medium, where the computer-readable medium stores program code, and when the program code runs on the computer, the computer executes FIG. 2, FIG. 3, or The method in the embodiment shown in FIG. 4.
  • the present application further provides a system, which includes the foregoing one or more terminal devices and one or more network devices.
  • the above embodiments may be implemented in whole or in part by software, hardware, firmware, or any other combination.
  • the above embodiments may be implemented in whole or in part in the form of a computer program product.
  • the computer program product includes one or more computer instructions.
  • the computer may be a general-purpose computer, a special-purpose computer, a computer network, or other programmable devices.
  • the computer instructions may be stored in a computer-readable storage medium, or transmitted from one computer-readable storage medium to another computer-readable storage medium, for example, the computer instructions may be from a website site, a computer, a server, or a data center.
  • the computer-readable storage medium may be any available medium that can be accessed by a computer, or a data storage device such as a server, a data center, and the like, including one or more sets of available media.
  • the usable medium may be a magnetic medium (for example, a floppy disk, a hard disk, a magnetic tape), an optical medium (for example, a digital versatile disc (DVD)), or a semiconductor medium.
  • the semiconductor medium may be a solid state drive.
  • the disclosed systems, devices, and methods may be implemented in other ways.
  • the device embodiments described above are only schematic.
  • the division of the unit is only a logical function division.
  • multiple units or components may be combined or Can be integrated into another system, or some features can be ignored or not implemented.
  • the displayed or discussed mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection may be indirect coupling or communication connection through some interfaces, devices or units, which may be electrical, mechanical or other forms.
  • the units described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and the components displayed as units may or may not be physical units, that is, may be located in one place, or may be distributed on multiple network units. Some or all of the units may be selected according to actual needs to achieve the objective of the solution of this embodiment.
  • each functional unit in each embodiment of the present application may be integrated into one processing unit, or each of the units may exist separately physically, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit.
  • the functions are implemented in the form of software functional units and sold or used as independent products, they can be stored in a computer-readable storage medium.
  • the technical solution of the present application is essentially a part that contributes to the existing technology or a part of the technical solution can be embodied in the form of a software product.
  • the computer software product is stored in a storage medium, including Several instructions are used to cause a computer device (which may be a personal computer, a server, or a network device, etc.) to perform all or part of the steps of the method described in the embodiments of the present application.
  • the foregoing storage medium includes various media that can store program codes, such as a U disk, a mobile hard disk, a read-only memory (ROM), a random access memory (RAM), a magnetic disk, or an optical disk.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)

Abstract

Provided by the present application are a method and a communication device for transmitting and receiving channel state information (CSI). The method comprises: a terminal device generating and sending one or more pieces of CSI to a network device, wherein each CSI comprises one or more groups of measurement reports, each group of measurement reports is measured on the basis of reference signals received by a spatial receiving filter, and when the total number of groups of measurement reports is a plurality of groups, the spatial receiving filters corresponding to each group of measurement reports are different from each other. Since the terminal device can report a measurement report on the basis of different spatial receiving filters, the network device can obtain more information about the correspondence between a transmitting beam and a receiving beam, and may thus better manage the beams, which is conducive to improving the system performance. When the terminal device reports a measurement report on the basis of a plurality of spatial receiving filters, the network device can obtain more correspondences between the transmitting beam and the receiving beam, which improves the robustness of the beam matching relationship and improves anti-interference.

Description

发送和接收信道状态信息的方法和通信装置Method and communication device for transmitting and receiving channel state information
本申请要求于2018年6月29日提交中国专利局、申请号为201810696122.7、申请名称为“发送和接收信道状态信息的方法和通信装置”的中国专利申请的优先权,其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。This application claims the priority of a Chinese patent application filed on June 29, 2018 with the Chinese Patent Office, application number 201810696122.7, and application name "Method and Communication Device for Sending and Receiving Channel State Information", the entire contents of which are incorporated by reference In this application.
技术领域Technical field
本申请涉及无线通信领域,并且更具体地,涉及发送和接收信道状态信息的方法和通信装置。The present application relates to the field of wireless communication, and more particularly, to a method and a communication device for transmitting and receiving channel state information.
背景技术Background technique
在某些通信系统中,例如,第五代(5th generation,5G)通信系统的新无线接入技术(new radio access technology,NR)中,为了在高频场景下对抗路径损耗,发送端和接收端可分别通过波束赋形(beamforming)来获得增益。发送端和接收端可通过波束训练来获取发射波束与接收波束之间的配对关系,接收端可将参考信号接收功率较大的部分参考信号资源上报给发送端,以便发送端在传输数据或信令时采用信道质量较好的波束配对关系来收发信号。In some communication systems, for example, in the new radio access technology (NR) of the 5th generation (5G) communication system, in order to combat path loss in high frequency scenarios, the sender and receiver The end can obtain the gain through beamforming. The transmitting end and the receiving end can obtain the pairing relationship between the transmitting beam and the receiving beam through beam training. The receiving end can report a part of the reference signal resources with a larger reference signal receiving power to the transmitting end, so that the transmitting end can transmit data or information. Use the beam pairing relationship with better channel quality to send and receive signals.
然而,在一些场景下,如多用户多输入多输出(multi-user multi-input multi-output,MU-MIMO)场景下,网络设备希望能够获取更多关于波束配对的信息,以便更合理地进行波束管理,以更大程度地获得波束赋形的增益。However, in some scenarios, such as in a multi-user multi-input multi-output (MU-MIMO) scenario, network devices want to be able to obtain more information about beam pairing in order to perform more reasonably Beam management for greater gain in beamforming.
发明内容Summary of the invention
本申请提供一种发送和接收信道状态信息的方法和通信装置,以期获取更多的发射波束与接收波束的对应关系,以便更合理地进行波束管理,从而更大程度地获得波束赋形的增益。The present application provides a method and a communication device for transmitting and receiving channel state information, so as to obtain more correspondences between transmitting beams and receiving beams, so as to perform beam management more reasonably, and thereby obtain a beam forming gain to a greater extent. .
第一方面,提供了一种发送信道状态信息(channel state information,CSI)的方法。该方法包括:生成一个或多个CSI,每个CSI包括一组或多组测量报告,每组测量报告基于一个空间接收滤波器接收到的参考信号测量得到,且在所述测量报告的总组数为多组的情况下,各组测量报告所对应的多个空间接收滤波器彼此各不相同;发送所述一个或多个CSI。In a first aspect, a method for sending channel state information (channel state information) is provided. The method includes: generating one or more CSI, each CSI includes one or more groups of measurement reports, each group of measurement reports is obtained based on a reference signal received by a spatial receiving filter, and is included in a total group of the measurement reports; When the number is multiple groups, multiple spatial receiving filters corresponding to each group of measurement reports are different from each other; and the one or more CSIs are sent.
第一方面的方法可以由终端设备执行,也可以由配置在终端设备中的芯片执行,本申请对此不做限定。The method of the first aspect may be executed by a terminal device, or may be executed by a chip configured in the terminal device, which is not limited in this application.
第二方面,提供了一种接收CSI的方法。该方法包括:接收一个或多个CSI,每个CSI包括一组或多组测量报告,每组测量报告基于一个空间接收滤波器接收到的参考信号测量得到,各组测量报告所对应的多个空间接收滤波器彼此各不相同;根据所述一个或多个CSI,确定每组测量报告对应一个空间接收滤波器,且在接收到多组测量报告的情况下, 各组测量报告所对应的空间接收滤波器彼此各不相同。In a second aspect, a method for receiving CSI is provided. The method includes: receiving one or more CSI, each CSI includes one or more groups of measurement reports, each group of measurement reports is obtained based on a reference signal measurement received by a spatial receiving filter, and each group of measurement reports corresponds to a plurality of The spatial receiving filters are different from each other; according to the one or more CSIs, it is determined that each group of measurement reports corresponds to a spatial receiving filter, and when multiple groups of measurement reports are received, the space corresponding to each group of measurement reports Receive filters are different from each other.
第二方面的方法可以由网络设备执行,也可以由配置在网络设备中的芯片执行,本申请对此不做限定。The method in the second aspect may be executed by a network device, or may be executed by a chip configured in the network device, which is not limited in this application.
应理解,上述空间接收滤波器可以理解为接收波束。与此相应地,空间发射滤波器可以理解为发射波束。It should be understood that the above-mentioned spatial receiving filter can be understood as a receiving beam. Accordingly, a spatial transmission filter can be understood as a transmission beam.
基于上述技术方案,终端设备可以基于每个接收波束接收到的参考信号进行信道测量和上报,使得网络设备能够获取更多有关发射波束与接收波束的配对关系的信息。网络设备可以根据该波束配对关系更合理地进行波束管理,从而更大程度地获得波束赋形的增益。此外,网络设备可以根据发射波束与接收波束的配对关系选择对应于不同接收波束的发射波束与不同的终端设备通信,从而可以最大程度地规避多用户间的干扰,也就是提高了抗干扰性。从整体上说,有利于提高系统性能。Based on the above technical solution, the terminal device can perform channel measurement and reporting based on the reference signal received by each receiving beam, so that the network device can obtain more information about the pairing relationship between the transmitting beam and the receiving beam. The network device can perform beam management more reasonably according to the beam pairing relationship, thereby obtaining a gain of beamforming to a greater extent. In addition, the network device can select the transmission beams corresponding to different reception beams to communicate with different terminal devices according to the pairing relationship between the transmission beams and the reception beams, so that interference between multiple users can be avoided to the greatest extent, that is, the interference resistance is improved. On the whole, it helps to improve system performance.
可选地,每组测量报告可以至少包括以下一项或多项:至少一个参考信号资源的标识,以及至少一个参考信号接收功率(reference signal reception power,RSRP)信息。Optionally, each group of measurement reports may include at least one or more of the following: identification of at least one reference signal resource, and at least one reference signal reception power (RSRP) information.
其中,参考信号资源可以用于配置参考信号的传输属性。每个参考信号资源可对应于一个或多个参考信号,且该一个或多个参考信号可传输在相同的时频资源上。参考信号接收功率信息用于指示参考信号的接收功率,例如,可以通过绝对数值或差分的方式上报。本申请对此不做限定。The reference signal resource may be used to configure transmission attributes of the reference signal. Each reference signal resource may correspond to one or more reference signals, and the one or more reference signals may be transmitted on the same time-frequency resource. The reference signal received power information is used to indicate the received power of the reference signal. For example, it can be reported in an absolute value or in a differential manner. This application does not limit this.
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些实现方式中,该方法还包括:接收第一指示信息,该第一指示信息用于指示第一上报方式,该第一上报方式为基于空间接收滤波器的分组上报。With reference to the first aspect, in some implementations of the first aspect, the method further includes: receiving first indication information, where the first indication information is used to indicate a first reporting manner, and the first reporting manner is based on spatial reception filtering Group report.
相应地,结合第二方面,在第二方面的某些实现方式中,该方法还包括:发送第一指示信息,该第一指示信息用于指示第一上报方式,该第一上报方式为基于空间接收滤波器的分组上报。Correspondingly, in combination with the second aspect, in some implementations of the second aspect, the method further includes: sending the first indication information, the first indication information is used to indicate the first reporting mode, and the first reporting mode is based on Group report of the spatial receive filter.
终端设备可以根据接收到的第一指示信息,基于每个空间接收滤波器接收到的参考信号进行信道测量和上报,以将一个或多个空间接收滤波器对应的测量报告上报给网络设备,以便于网络设备获取接收波束与发射波束的对应关系。The terminal device may perform channel measurement and reporting based on the received first instruction information based on the reference signal received by each spatial receiving filter, so as to report the measurement reports corresponding to one or more spatial receiving filters to the network device, so that The correspondence between the receiving beam and the transmitting beam is obtained by the network device.
结合第一方面或第二方面,在某些可能的实现方式中,该第一指示信息携带在无线资源控制(radio resource control,RRC)消息的CSI上报配置(CSI report setting)中,或,该第一指示信息携带在CSI上报配置的分组上报参数中。With reference to the first aspect or the second aspect, in some possible implementation manners, the first indication information is carried in a CSI report configuration (CSI report setting) of a radio resource control (RRC) message, or, The first indication information is carried in a packet reporting parameter configured by the CSI reporting.
结合第一方面或第二方面,在某些可能的实现方式中,该第一指示信息携带在以下一项或多项中:RRC消息、媒体接入控制(media access control,MAC)控制元素(control element,CE)及下行控制信息(downlink control information,DCI)。With reference to the first aspect or the second aspect, in some possible implementation manners, the first indication information is carried in one or more of the following: an RRC message, a media access control (MAC) control element ( control element (CE) and downlink control information (DCI).
应理解,上文列举的发送第一指示信息的几种可能的实现方式仅为示例,不应对本申请构成任何限定,该第一指示信息还可通过其他信令携带,本申请对此不做限定。It should be understood that the several possible implementation manners of sending the first indication information listed above are merely examples, and should not constitute any limitation to this application. The first indication information may also be carried through other signaling, and this application does not do this. limited.
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些实现方式中,该方法还包括:接收第二指示信息,该第二指示信息用于指示以下一项或多项参数:With reference to the first aspect, in some implementations of the first aspect, the method further includes: receiving second instruction information, where the second instruction information is used to indicate one or more of the following parameters:
参数1、每个CSI上报的测量报告的组数;Parameter 1. Number of measurement report groups reported by each CSI;
参数2、通过多个CSI上报的测量报告的总组数;以及Parameter 2, the total number of measurement reports reported through multiple CSIs; and
参数3、通过多个CSI上报测量报告时所述CSI的个数。Parameter 3. The number of CSIs when a measurement report is reported through multiple CSIs.
相应地,结合第二方面,在第二方面的某些实现方式中,该方法还包括:发送第二指示信息,该第二指示信息用于指示以下一项或多项参数:Correspondingly, in conjunction with the second aspect, in some implementations of the second aspect, the method further includes: sending second instruction information, where the second instruction information is used to indicate one or more of the following parameters:
参数1、每个CSI上报的测量报告的组数;Parameter 1. Number of measurement report groups reported by each CSI;
参数2、通过多个CSI上报的测量报告的总组数;以及Parameter 2, the total number of measurement reports reported through multiple CSIs; and
参数3、通过多个CSI上报测量报告时所述CSI的个数。Parameter 3. The number of CSIs when a measurement report is reported through multiple CSIs.
具体地说,终端设备可以通过以下四种方式向网络设备上报CSI:Specifically, the terminal device can report the CSI to the network device in the following four ways:
方式一、上报一个CSI,该CSI中包括一组测量报告;或者Method 1: Report a CSI, where the CSI includes a set of measurement reports; or
方式二、上报一个CSI,该CSI中包括多组测量报告;或者Method 2: Report a CSI, which includes multiple sets of measurement reports; or
方式三、上报多个CSI,每个CSI包括一组测量报告;或者Method 3: Report multiple CSI, each CSI includes a set of measurement reports; or
方式四、上报多个CSI,每个CSI包括多组测量报告。Manner 4: Report multiple CSIs. Each CSI includes multiple sets of measurement reports.
终端设备采用方式一或方式二时,可以根据参数1向网络设备上报CSI;终端设备采用方式三时,可以根据参数2或参数3向网络设备上报CSI;终端设备采用方式四时,可以根据参数1、参数2和参数3中的任意两项向网络设备上报CSI。When the terminal device adopts the first or second method, it can report CSI to the network device according to parameter 1. When the terminal device adopts the third method, it can report CSI to the network device according to parameter 2 or parameter 3. When the terminal device adopts the fourth method, it can report according to the parameter 1. Any two of parameters 2 and 3 report CSI to the network device.
当终端设备采用方式二至方式四中的任意一种上报CSI时,网络设备可以获取基于多个接收波束测量得到的测量报告,也就是可以获取到多个接收波束与发射波束的对应关系,因此,可以提高波束配对关系的鲁棒性,有利于提高通信系统的鲁棒性,同时有利于提高传输效率,提高用户体验。When the terminal device reports the CSI in any of Mode 2 to Mode 4, the network device can obtain a measurement report obtained based on the measurement of multiple received beams, that is, it can obtain the correspondence between multiple received beams and transmitted beams. , Can improve the robustness of the beam pairing relationship, is conducive to improving the robustness of the communication system, and is also conducive to improving the transmission efficiency and user experience.
应理解,上文列举的参数1、参数2和参数3可以由网络设备指示,也可以预先定义,如协议定义,本申请对此不做限定。It should be understood that the parameters 1, 2, and 3 listed above may be indicated by a network device, or may be defined in advance, such as a protocol definition, which is not limited in this application.
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些实现方式中,该方法还包括:发送第二指示信息,该第二指示信息用于指示以下一项或多项:With reference to the first aspect, in some implementations of the first aspect, the method further includes: sending second instruction information, where the second instruction information is used to indicate one or more of the following:
发送能力信息,所述能力信息用于指示以下一项或多项参数:Send capability information, which is used to indicate one or more of the following parameters:
参数i、空间接收滤波器的数量;Parameter i, the number of spatial receiving filters;
参数ii、每个CSI上报的测量报告的最大组数;Parameter ii, the maximum number of groups of measurement reports reported by each CSI;
参数iii、通过多个CSI上报的测量报告的总组数的最大值;以及Parameter iii, the maximum value of the total number of groups of measurement reports reported by multiple CSIs; and
参数iv、通过多个CSI上报测量报告时所述CSI的最大个数。Parameter iv, the maximum number of CSIs when reporting measurement reports through multiple CSIs.
相应地,结合第二方面,在第二方面的某些实现方式中,该方法还包括:接收第二指示信息,该第二指示信息用于指示以下一项或多项:Accordingly, in combination with the second aspect, in some implementations of the second aspect, the method further includes: receiving second instruction information, where the second instruction information is used to indicate one or more of the following:
发送能力信息,所述能力信息用于指示以下一项或多项参数:Send capability information, which is used to indicate one or more of the following parameters:
参数i、空间接收滤波器的数量;Parameter i, the number of spatial receiving filters;
参数ii、每个CSI上报的测量报告的最大组数;Parameter ii, the maximum number of groups of measurement reports reported by each CSI;
参数iii、通过多个CSI上报的测量报告的总组数的最大值;以及Parameter iii, the maximum value of the total number of groups of measurement reports reported by multiple CSIs; and
参数iv、通过多个CSI上报测量报告时所述CSI的最大个数。Parameter iv, the maximum number of CSIs when reporting measurement reports through multiple CSIs.
网络设备可以根据终端设备上报的能力信息,确定上文中所列举的参数1至参数3。换句话说,当上述参数1至参数3由网络设备指示给终端设备时,上述参数1至参数3可以是根据终端设备的能力确定的。The network device may determine the parameters 1 to 3 listed above according to the capability information reported by the terminal device. In other words, when the above parameters 1 to 3 are indicated to the terminal device by the network device, the above parameters 1 to 3 may be determined according to the capabilities of the terminal device.
结合第一方面或第二方面,在某些实现方式中,每组测量报告还包括组标识,每个组标识对应一个空间接收滤波器。With reference to the first aspect or the second aspect, in some implementation manners, each group of measurement reports further includes a group identifier, and each group identifier corresponds to a spatial receiving filter.
通过在测量报告中携带组标识,可以方便网络设备了解各组测量报告与接收波束之间 的对应关系,也就方便了解发射波束与接收波束之间的对应关系,也就有利于网络设备更合理地进行波束管理,从而从而更大程度地获得波束赋形的增益,有利于提高系统性能。By carrying the group identifier in the measurement report, it is convenient for the network device to understand the correspondence between each group of measurement reports and the receiving beam, and it is also convenient to understand the correspondence between the transmitting beam and the receiving beam. Perform beam management in order to obtain the gain of beamforming to a greater extent, which is conducive to improving system performance.
结合第一方面或第二方面,在某些实现方式中,该组标识于空间接收滤波器的对应关系在预定时段内不变。With reference to the first aspect or the second aspect, in some implementation manners, the correspondence relationship of the group identifier in the spatial receiving filter does not change within a predetermined period.
其中,该预定时段为以下任意一项:The predetermined period is any of the following:
两次CSI上报的时间间隔,所述两次CSI上报满足:在同一个CSI上报配置下上报,或,在具有相同时域行为参数的CSI上报配置下上报;The time interval between two CSI reports, the two CSI reports satisfy: reporting under the same CSI reporting configuration, or reporting under the same CSI reporting configuration with the same time domain behavior parameter;
两次参考信号传输的时间间隔,所述两次参考信号传输满足:基于同一个参考信号资源配置传输,或,基于同一个参考信号资源集配置传输,或,基于同一个参考信号资源配置传输,或,基于具有相同时域行为参数的参考信号资源配置传输;The time interval between two reference signal transmissions, the two reference signal transmissions satisfy: transmission based on the same reference signal resource configuration, or transmission based on the same reference signal resource set configuration, or transmission based on the same reference signal resource configuration, Or, based on the reference signal resource configuration transmission with the same time domain behavior parameter;
一个CSI上报配置从使能到重配置的时间间隔;The time interval from a CSI report configuration from enable to reconfiguration;
一个CSI资源配置从使能到重配置的时间间隔;The time interval for a CSI resource configuration from enabling to reconfiguring;
一个CSI上报配置从使能到释放的时间间隔;One CSI report configures the time interval from enabling to releasing;
一个CSI资源配置从使能到释放的时间间隔;The time interval from a CSI resource configuration to enabling and releasing;
一个CSI上报配置被使能之后的指定长度;或者A specified length after a CSI report configuration is enabled; or
一个CSI资源配置被使能之后的指定长度。A specified length after a CSI resource configuration is enabled.
应理解,上文列举了对预定时段的几种可能的定义,但这不应对本申请构成任何限定。此外,该预定时段具体为上文列举的哪一项可以由协议预先定义,也可以由网络设备指示。本申请对此不做限定。It should be understood that the foregoing lists several possible definitions of the predetermined time period, but this should not be construed as limiting this application in any way. In addition, which one of the above-mentioned predetermined time periods is specifically defined by a protocol may also be predetermined by a network device. This application does not limit this.
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些实现方式中,该方法还包括:接收第四指示信息,该第四指示信息用于指示上述预定时段的起始时间和长度。With reference to the first aspect, in some implementations of the first aspect, the method further includes: receiving fourth instruction information, where the fourth instruction information is used to indicate a start time and a length of the predetermined period.
相应地,结合第二方面,在第二方面的某些实现方式中,该方法还包括:发送第四指示信息,该第四指示信息用于指示上述预定时段的起始时间和长度。Correspondingly, in conjunction with the second aspect, in some implementations of the second aspect, the method further includes: sending fourth instruction information, where the fourth instruction information is used to indicate a start time and a length of the predetermined period.
在确定了预定时段为上文列举的哪一项之后,网络设备还可以进一步向终端设备指示该预定时段的起始时间和长度。应理解,网络设备也可以向终端设备指示该预定时段的起始时间和结束时间,或者,结束时间和长度。当终端设备知道了起始时间、长度和结束时间中的任意两项时,便可以推算出另一项,因此,当网络设备通过第三指示信息向终端设备指示预定时段的起始时间、长度和结束时间中的任意两项时,均应落入本申请的保护范围内。After determining which of the above-mentioned predetermined periods is the network device, the network device may further indicate the start time and length of the predetermined period to the terminal device. It should be understood that the network device may also indicate the start time and end time, or the end time and length of the predetermined period to the terminal device. When the terminal device knows any two items of the start time, length, and end time, it can calculate the other one. Therefore, when the network device indicates the start time and length of the predetermined period to the terminal device through the third instruction information And any of the two items shall fall within the scope of protection of this application.
应理解,预定时段可以是由网络设备指示给终端设备的,也可以是预先定义的,如协议定义,本申请对此不做限定。It should be understood that the predetermined time period may be indicated by the network device to the terminal device, or may be predefined, such as a protocol definition, which is not limited in this application.
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些实现方式中,该方法还包括:接收第三指示信息,该第三指示信息用于指示多个参考信号资源,该多个参考信号资源由至少两组上述测量报告确定。With reference to the first aspect, in some implementations of the first aspect, the method further includes: receiving third indication information, where the third indication information is used to indicate multiple reference signal resources, and the multiple reference signal resources are composed of at least two The above measurement report is determined.
结合第二方面,在第二方面的某些实现方式中,该方法还包括:发送第三指示信息,该第三指示信息用于指示多个参考信号资源,该多个参考信号资源由至少两组上述测量报告确定。With reference to the second aspect, in some implementations of the second aspect, the method further includes: sending third indication information, where the third indication information is used to indicate multiple reference signal resources, and the multiple reference signal resources are composed of at least two The above measurement report is determined.
应理解,该第三指示信息所指示的多个参考信号资源可用于波束多样性质量监测。网络设备可以基于终端设备上报的多组测量报告为终端设备配置于多个接收波束对应的参 考信号资源,以便于终端设备基于多个接收波束进行波束多样性质量监测。因此,在终端设备发生倾侧或翻转导致部分接收波束的接收质量下降时,可以使用其他接收波束评估无线链路质量。从而可以避免频繁地进入波束失败恢复,有利于提高波束配对关系的鲁棒性,从而有利于提高传输系统的鲁棒性,并且有利于提高用户体验。It should be understood that the multiple reference signal resources indicated by the third indication information may be used for beam diversity quality monitoring. The network device can configure the reference signal resources corresponding to multiple receiving beams for the terminal device based on multiple sets of measurement reports reported by the terminal device, so that the terminal device can perform beam diversity quality monitoring based on the multiple receiving beams. Therefore, when the terminal equipment is tilted or turned over, which causes the reception quality of some of the receiving beams to decrease, other receiving beams can be used to evaluate the quality of the wireless link. Thereby, frequent failure recovery from entering the beam can be avoided, which is beneficial to improving the robustness of the beam pairing relationship, thereby improving the robustness of the transmission system, and improving the user experience.
结合第一方面或第二方面,在某些实现方式中,该第三指示信息所指示的多个参考信号资源与多个空间接收滤波器一一对应。With reference to the first aspect or the second aspect, in some implementation manners, the multiple reference signal resources indicated by the third indication information correspond to the multiple spatial receiving filters on a one-to-one basis.
即,每个参考信号资源对应一个空间接收滤波器。That is, each reference signal resource corresponds to a spatial receiving filter.
结合第一方面或第二方面,在某些实现方式中,该第三指示信息所指示的多个参考信号资源包括第一资源组和第二资源组,其中,仅有第一资源组中的参考信号的测量结果计入波束失败次数统计。With reference to the first aspect or the second aspect, in some implementation manners, the multiple reference signal resources indicated by the third indication information include a first resource group and a second resource group, where only the first resource group The measurement result of the reference signal is included in the statistics of the number of failed beams.
具体地,该第三指示信息所指示的多个参考信号资源的个数可以为I(I>0且I为整数),I个参考信号资源可与J(I>J>0且J为整数)个空间接收滤波器对应。其中,第二资源组可包括L(L≥J>0且L为整数)个参考信号资源,第一资源组可包括I-L个参考信号资源。该第二资源组中的L个参考信号资源可以与J个空间接收滤波器对应,该第一资源组中的I-L个参考信号资源可以与J个空间接收滤波器中的至少一个对应。Specifically, the number of multiple reference signal resources indicated by the third indication information may be I (I> 0 and I is an integer), and the I reference signal resources may be equal to J (I> J> 0 and J is an integer). ) Space receiving filters. The second resource group may include L (L ≧ J> 0 and L is an integer) reference signal resources, and the first resource group may include I-L reference signal resources. The L reference signal resources in the second resource group may correspond to J spatial receiving filters, and the I-L reference signal resources in the first resource group may correspond to at least one of the J spatial receiving filters.
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些实现方式中,该方法还包括:接收第五指示信息,该第五指示信息用于指示第二资源组中的多个参考信号资源。With reference to the first aspect, in some implementations of the first aspect, the method further includes: receiving fifth indication information, where the fifth indication information is used to indicate multiple reference signal resources in the second resource group.
相应地,结合第二方面,在第二方面的某些实现方式中,该方法还包括:发送第五指示信息,该第五指示信息用于指示第二资源组中的多个参考信号资源。Accordingly, in conjunction with the second aspect, in some implementations of the second aspect, the method further includes: sending fifth indication information, where the fifth indication information is used to indicate multiple reference signal resources in the second resource group.
具体地,该第五指示信息可用于指示该第二资源组中的多个参考信号资源的数量,或者,也可用于指示该第二资源组中的多个参考信号资源的标识或索引。本申请对此不做限定。Specifically, the fifth indication information may be used to indicate the number of multiple reference signal resources in the second resource group, or may be used to indicate the identifiers or indexes of multiple reference signal resources in the second resource group. This application does not limit this.
通过网络设备向终端设备指示该第二资源组中的多个参考信号资源,便于终端设备在进行波束失败监测时避免将第二资源组中的多个参考信号资源计入波束失败次数统计中。Indicating multiple reference signal resources in the second resource group to the terminal device through the network device is convenient for the terminal device to avoid counting multiple reference signal resources in the second resource group into the number of beam failure times when performing beam failure monitoring.
第三方面,提供了一种接收参考信号的方法。该方法包括:接收第三指示信息,该第三指示信息用于指示多个参考信号资源,该多个参考信号资源由至少两组上述测量报告确定。In a third aspect, a method for receiving a reference signal is provided. The method includes: receiving third indication information, where the third indication information is used to indicate multiple reference signal resources, where the multiple reference signal resources are determined by at least two groups of the above-mentioned measurement reports.
第三方面的方法可以由终端设备执行,也可以由配置在终端设备中的芯片执行,本申请对此不做限定。The method of the third aspect may be executed by a terminal device, or may be executed by a chip configured in the terminal device, which is not limited in this application.
第四方面,提供了一种发送参考信号的方法。该方法包括:发送第三指示信息,该第三指示信息用于指示多个参考信号资源,该多个参考信号资源由至少两组上述测量报告确定。In a fourth aspect, a method for transmitting a reference signal is provided. The method includes: sending third indication information, where the third indication information is used to indicate multiple reference signal resources, and the multiple reference signal resources are determined by at least two groups of the foregoing measurement reports.
第四方面的方法可以由网络设备执行,也可以由配置在网络设备中的芯片执行,本申请对此不做限定。The method in the fourth aspect may be executed by a network device, or may be executed by a chip configured in the network device, which is not limited in this application.
应理解,该第三指示信息所指示的多个参考信号资源可用于波束多样性质量监测。网络设备可以基于终端设备上报的多组测量报告为终端设备配置与多个接收波束对应的参考信号资源,以便于终端设备基于多个接收波束进行波束多样性质量监测。It should be understood that the multiple reference signal resources indicated by the third indication information may be used for beam diversity quality monitoring. The network device may configure the terminal device with reference signal resources corresponding to multiple received beams based on the multiple sets of measurement reports reported by the terminal device, so that the terminal device performs beam diversity quality monitoring based on the multiple received beams.
因此,在终端设备发生倾侧或翻转导致部分接收波束的接收质量下降时,可以使用其他接收波束评估无线链路质量。从而可以避免频繁地进入波束失败恢复,有利于提高波束 配对关系的鲁棒性,从而有利于提高传输系统的鲁棒性,并且有利于提高用户体验。Therefore, when the terminal equipment is tilted or turned over, which causes the reception quality of some of the receiving beams to decrease, other receiving beams can be used to evaluate the quality of the wireless link. Therefore, frequent failure recovery of beams can be avoided, which is conducive to improving the robustness of the beam pairing relationship, which is conducive to improving the robustness of the transmission system, and to improving the user experience.
结合第三方面或第四方面,在某些可能的实现方式中,该第三指示信息所指示的多个参考信号资源与多个空间接收滤波器一一对应。With reference to the third aspect or the fourth aspect, in some possible implementation manners, the multiple reference signal resources indicated by the third indication information correspond to the multiple spatial receiving filters on a one-to-one basis.
即,每个参考信号资源对应一个空间接收滤波器。That is, each reference signal resource corresponds to a spatial receiving filter.
结合第三方面或第四方面,在某些实现方式中,该第三指示信息所指示的多个参考信号资源包括第一资源组和第二资源组,其中,仅有第一资源组中的参考信号的测量结果计入波束失败次数统计。With reference to the third aspect or the fourth aspect, in some implementation manners, the multiple reference signal resources indicated by the third indication information include a first resource group and a second resource group, where only the first resource group The measurement result of the reference signal is included in the statistics of the number of failed beams.
具体地,该第三指示信息所指示的多个参考信号资源的个数可以为I(I>0且I为整数),I个参考信号资源可与J(I>J>0且J为整数)个空间接收滤波器对应。其中,第二资源组可包括L(L≥J>0且L为整数)个参考信号资源,第一资源组可包括I-L个参考信号资源。该第二资源组中的L个参考信号资源可以与J个空间接收滤波器对应,该第一资源组中的I-L个参考信号资源可以与J个空间接收滤波器中的至少一个对应。Specifically, the number of multiple reference signal resources indicated by the third indication information may be I (I> 0 and I is an integer), and the I reference signal resources may be equal to J (I> J> 0 and J is an integer). ) Space receiving filters. The second resource group may include L (L ≧ J> 0 and L is an integer) reference signal resources, and the first resource group may include I-L reference signal resources. The L reference signal resources in the second resource group may correspond to J spatial receiving filters, and the I-L reference signal resources in the first resource group may correspond to at least one of the J spatial receiving filters.
结合第三方面,在第三方面的某些实现方式中,该方法还包括:接收第五指示信息,该第五指示信息用于指示第二资源组中的多个参考信号资源。With reference to the third aspect, in some implementation manners of the third aspect, the method further includes: receiving fifth indication information, where the fifth indication information is used to indicate multiple reference signal resources in the second resource group.
相应地,结合第四方面,在第四方面的某些实现方式中,该方法还包括:发送第五指示信息,该第五指示信息用于指示第二资源组中的多个参考信号资源。Accordingly, in combination with the fourth aspect, in some implementations of the fourth aspect, the method further includes: sending fifth indication information, where the fifth indication information is used to indicate multiple reference signal resources in the second resource group.
具体地,该第五指示信息可用于指示该第二资源组中的多个参考信号资源的数量,或者,也可用于指示该第二资源组中的多个参考信号资源的标识或索引。本申请对此不做限定。Specifically, the fifth indication information may be used to indicate the number of multiple reference signal resources in the second resource group, or may be used to indicate the identifiers or indexes of multiple reference signal resources in the second resource group. This application does not limit this.
通过网络设备向终端设备指示该第二资源组中的多个参考信号资源,便于终端设备在进行波束失败监测时避免将第二资源组中的多个参考信号资源计入波束失败次数统计中。Indicating multiple reference signal resources in the second resource group to the terminal device through the network device is convenient for the terminal device to avoid counting multiple reference signal resources in the second resource group into the number of beam failure times when performing beam failure monitoring.
第五方面,提供了一种发送CSI的方法。该方法包括:生成CSI,该CSI包括一组或多组测量信息,每组测量信息是基于可被同时接收到的多个参考信号测量得到,且每组测量信息至少包括第一指示比特,该第一指示比特用于指示接收该多个参考信号的空间接收滤波器的数量;发送该CSI。In a fifth aspect, a method for transmitting CSI is provided. The method includes: generating CSI, where the CSI includes one or more sets of measurement information, each set of measurement information is obtained based on a plurality of reference signals that can be received simultaneously, and each set of measurement information includes at least a first indication bit, the The first indication bit is used to indicate the number of spatial receiving filters that receive the multiple reference signals; and the CSI is transmitted.
第五方面的方法可以由终端设备执行,也可以由配置在终端设备中的芯片执行,本申请对此不做限定。The method of the fifth aspect may be executed by a terminal device, or may be executed by a chip configured in the terminal device, which is not limited in this application.
第六方面,提供了一种接收CSI的方法。该方法包括:接收CSI,该CSI包括一组或多组测量信息,每组测量信息是基于可被同时接收到的多个参考信号测量得到,且每组测量信息至少包括第一指示比特,该第一指示比特用于指示接收该多个参考信号的空间接收滤波器的数量;根据该CSI确定每组测量信息所指示的多个参考信号是否被同一个空间接收滤波器接收。According to a sixth aspect, a method for receiving CSI is provided. The method includes: receiving CSI, where the CSI includes one or more sets of measurement information, each set of measurement information is measured based on a plurality of reference signals that can be received simultaneously, and each set of measurement information includes at least a first indicator bit, the The first indication bit is used to indicate the number of spatial receiving filters that receive the multiple reference signals; it is determined whether the multiple reference signals indicated by each set of measurement information are received by the same spatial receiving filter according to the CSI.
第六方面的方法可以由网络设备执行,也可以由配置在网络设备中的芯片执行,本申请对此不做限定。The method of the sixth aspect may be executed by a network device, or may be executed by a chip configured in the network device, which is not limited in this application.
基于上述技术方案,终端设备可以在基于可被同时接收到的多个参考信号上报CSI时携带用于指示接收该多个参考信号的空间接收滤波器的数量的指示比特,以便网络设备获取更多有关参考信号资源和空间接收滤波器的对应关系的信息,也就是可以获取更多有关接收波束与发射波束的配对关系的信息。Based on the above technical solution, the terminal device may carry an indicator bit for indicating the number of spatial receiving filters that receive the multiple reference signals when reporting CSI based on multiple reference signals that can be received simultaneously, so that the network device can obtain more Information about the correspondence between the reference signal resource and the spatial receiving filter, that is, more information about the pairing relationship between the receiving beam and the transmitting beam can be obtained.
在一种可能的设计中,该第一指示比特可用于指示该多个参考信号是否由同一个空间 接收滤波器接收到。协议可预先定义,当该多个参考信号由同一个空间接收滤波器接收到时,可上报该多个参考信号的测量结果。则可选地,该多个参考信号对应一个空间接收滤波器。当该多个参考信号由多个空间接收滤波器接收到时,可基于每个空间接收滤波器上报一个参考信号的测量结果。则可选地,该多个参考信号与多个空间接收滤波器一一对应。In a possible design, the first indicator bit may be used to indicate whether the multiple reference signals are received by the same spatial receiving filter. The protocol can be defined in advance. When the multiple reference signals are received by the same spatial receiving filter, the measurement results of the multiple reference signals can be reported. Then, optionally, the multiple reference signals correspond to a spatial receiving filter. When the multiple reference signals are received by multiple spatial receiving filters, a measurement result of one reference signal may be reported based on each spatial receiving filter. Then, optionally, the multiple reference signals correspond one-to-one with multiple spatial receiving filters.
由此,网络设备可以根据第一指示比特以及接收到的多个参考信号的测量结果,确定参考信号与空间接收滤波器之间的对应关系,也就可以确定发射波束与接收波束之间的对应关系。并且,当该多个参考信号是由多个空间接收滤波器接收到时,网络设备可以获取多个发射波束与接收波束之间的对应关系。因此,在终端设备发生倾侧或翻转导致某一接收波束对应的TCI状态列表失效时,还可以切换到其他链路质量较好的接收波束,这样可以避免频繁地触发波束失败恢复流程。从而提高了波束配对关系的鲁棒性,有利于提高传输系统的鲁棒性,有利于提高传输效率,同时有利于提高用户体验。Therefore, the network device can determine the correspondence between the reference signal and the spatial receiving filter according to the measurement results of the first indicator bit and the received multiple reference signals, and can also determine the correspondence between the transmit beam and the receive beam. relationship. In addition, when the plurality of reference signals are received by a plurality of spatial receiving filters, the network device may obtain a correspondence between a plurality of transmitting beams and a receiving beam. Therefore, when the TCI state list corresponding to a certain receiving beam is invalid due to the tilting or overturning of the terminal device, it is also possible to switch to other receiving beams with better link quality, which can avoid frequently triggering the beam failure recovery process. Therefore, the robustness of the beam pairing relationship is improved, which is conducive to improving the robustness of the transmission system, improving the transmission efficiency, and at the same time improving the user experience.
可选地,每组测量信息包括上述第一指示比特和多个测量结果,其中每个测量结果可包括以下一项或多项:参考信号资源的标识和参考信号接收功率信息。Optionally, each set of measurement information includes the above-mentioned first indication bit and multiple measurement results, where each measurement result may include one or more of the following: an identification of a reference signal resource and reference signal received power information.
其中,参考信号资源可以用于配置参考信号的传输属性。每个参考信号资源可对应于一个或多个参考信号,且该一个或多个参考信号可传输在相同的时频资源上。参考信号接收功率信息用于指示参考信号的接收功率,例如,可以通过绝对数值或差分的方式上报。本申请对此不做限定。The reference signal resource may be used to configure transmission attributes of the reference signal. Each reference signal resource may correspond to one or more reference signals, and the one or more reference signals may be transmitted on the same time-frequency resource. The reference signal received power information is used to indicate the received power of the reference signal. For example, it can be reported in an absolute value or in a differential manner. This application does not limit this.
结合第五方面,在第五方面的某些实现方式中,该方法还包括:接收第六指示信息,该第六指示信息用于指示第二上报方式,该第二上报方式为基于可被同时接收的参考信号的分组上报。With reference to the fifth aspect, in some implementation manners of the fifth aspect, the method further includes: receiving sixth instruction information, where the sixth instruction information is used to indicate a second reporting mode, and the second reporting mode is based on the simultaneous reporting Report the received reference signal in packets.
相应地,结合第六方面,在第六方面的某些实现方式中,该方法还包括:发送第六指示信息,该第六指示信息用于指示第二上报方式,该第二上报方式为基于可被同时接收的参考信号的分组上报。Correspondingly, in combination with the sixth aspect, in some implementations of the sixth aspect, the method further includes: sending sixth instruction information, where the sixth instruction information is used to indicate a second reporting method, and the second reporting method is based on Reported by packets of reference signals that can be received simultaneously.
终端设备可以根据接收到的第六指示信息,基于同时接收到的多个参考信号进行信道测量和上报,并将同时接收到该多个参考信号的空间接收滤波器的数量上报给网络设备,以便于网络设备获取接收波束与发射波束的对应关系。The terminal device may perform channel measurement and reporting based on the multiple reference signals received at the same time according to the received sixth instruction information, and report the number of spatial reception filters that simultaneously receive the multiple reference signals to the network device so that The correspondence between the receiving beam and the transmitting beam is obtained by the network device.
结合第五方面或第六方面,在某些实现方式中,该第六指示信息携带在RRC消息的CSI上报配置中,或,该第六指示信息携带在CSI上报配置的分组上报参数中。With reference to the fifth aspect or the sixth aspect, in some implementation manners, the sixth indication information is carried in a CSI reporting configuration of the RRC message, or the sixth indication information is carried in a packet reporting parameter configured in the CSI reporting.
结合第五方面或第六方面,在某些实现方式中,该第六指示信息携带在以下一项或多项中:RRC消息、MAC CE以及DCI。With reference to the fifth aspect or the sixth aspect, in some implementation manners, the sixth indication information is carried in one or more of the following: RRC message, MAC CE, and DCI.
应理解,上文列举的发送第六指示信息的几种可能的实现方式仅为示例,不应对本申请构成任何限定,该第一指示信息还可通过其他信令携带,本申请对此不做限定。It should be understood that the several possible implementation manners for sending the sixth indication information listed above are merely examples, and should not constitute any limitation to this application. The first indication information may also be carried through other signaling, and this application does not do this. limited.
第七方面,提供了一种通信装置,包括用于执行第一方面、第三方面或第五方面以及第一方面、第三方面或第五方面中任一种可能实现方式中的方法的各个模块或单元。According to a seventh aspect, a communication device is provided, including each of the methods for performing the method in the first aspect, the third aspect, or the fifth aspect, and any possible implementation manner of the first aspect, the third aspect, or the fifth aspect. Module or unit.
第八方面,提供了一种通信装置,包括处理器。该处理器与存储器耦合,可用于执行存储器中的指令,以实现上述第一方面、第三方面或第五方面中任一种可能实现方式中的方法。可选地,该通信装置还包括存储器。可选地,该通信装置还包括通信接口,处理器与通信接口耦合。According to an eighth aspect, a communication device is provided, including a processor. The processor is coupled to the memory and can be used to execute instructions in the memory to implement the method in any one of the possible implementation manners of the first aspect, the third aspect, or the fifth aspect. Optionally, the communication device further includes a memory. Optionally, the communication device further includes a communication interface, and the processor is coupled to the communication interface.
在一种实现方式中,该通信装置为终端设备。当该通信装置为终端设备时,所述通信 接口可以是收发器,或,输入/输出接口。In one implementation, the communication device is a terminal device. When the communication device is a terminal device, the communication interface may be a transceiver, or an input / output interface.
在另一种实现方式中,该通信装置为配置于终端设备中的芯片。当该通信装置为配置于终端设备中的芯片时,所述通信接口可以是输入/输出接口。In another implementation manner, the communication device is a chip configured in a terminal device. When the communication device is a chip configured in a terminal device, the communication interface may be an input / output interface.
可选地,所述收发器可以为收发电路。可选地,所述输入/输出接口可以为输入/输出电路。Optionally, the transceiver may be a transceiver circuit. Optionally, the input / output interface may be an input / output circuit.
第九方面,提供了一种通信装置,包括用于执行第二方面、第四方面或第六方面以及第二方面、第四方面或第六方面中任一种可能实现方式中的方法的各个模块或单元。In a ninth aspect, a communication device is provided, including each of the methods for performing the method in the second aspect, the fourth aspect, or the sixth aspect, and any possible implementation manner of the second aspect, the fourth aspect, or the sixth aspect. Module or unit.
第十方面,提供了一种通信装置,包括处理器。该处理器与存储器耦合,可用于执行存储器中的指令,以实现上述第二方面、第四方面或第六方面中任一种可能实现方式中的方法。可选地,该通信装置还包括存储器。可选地,该通信装置还包括通信接口,处理器与通信接口耦合。In a tenth aspect, a communication device is provided, including a processor. The processor is coupled to the memory, and can be used to execute instructions in the memory to implement the method in any one of the foregoing possible implementation manners of the second aspect, the fourth aspect, or the sixth aspect. Optionally, the communication device further includes a memory. Optionally, the communication device further includes a communication interface, and the processor is coupled to the communication interface.
在一种实现方式中,该通信装置为网络设备。当该通信装置为网络设备时,所述通信接口可以是收发器,或,输入/输出接口。In one implementation, the communication device is a network device. When the communication device is a network device, the communication interface may be a transceiver, or an input / output interface.
在另一种实现方式中,该通信装置为配置于网络设备中的芯片。当该通信装置为配置于网络设备中的芯片时,所述通信接口可以是输入/输出接口。In another implementation manner, the communication device is a chip configured in a network device. When the communication device is a chip configured in a network device, the communication interface may be an input / output interface.
可选地,所述收发器可以为收发电路。可选地,所述输入/输出接口可以为输入/输出电路。Optionally, the transceiver may be a transceiver circuit. Optionally, the input / output interface may be an input / output circuit.
第十一方面,提供了一种处理器,包括:输入电路、输出电路和处理电路。所述处理电路用于通过所述输入电路接收信号,并通过所述输出电路发射信号,使得所述处理器执行第一方面至第六方面以及第一方面至第六方面任一种可能实现方式中的方法。According to an eleventh aspect, a processor is provided, including: an input circuit, an output circuit, and a processing circuit. The processing circuit is configured to receive a signal through the input circuit and transmit a signal through the output circuit, so that the processor executes any one of the first aspect to the sixth aspect and any possible implementation manner of the first aspect to the sixth aspect. Method.
在具体实现过程中,上述处理器可以为芯片,输入电路可以为输入管脚,输出电路可以为输出管脚,处理电路可以为晶体管、门电路、触发器和各种逻辑电路等。输入电路所接收的输入的信号可以是由例如但不限于接收器接收并输入的,输出电路所输出的信号可以是例如但不限于输出给发射器并由发射器发射的,且输入电路和输出电路可以是同一电路,该电路在不同的时刻分别用作输入电路和输出电路。本申请实施例对处理器及各种电路的具体实现方式不做限定。In a specific implementation process, the processor may be a chip, an input circuit may be an input pin, an output circuit may be an output pin, and a processing circuit may be a transistor, a gate circuit, a flip-flop, and various logic circuits. The input signal received by the input circuit may be received and input by, for example, but not limited to, a receiver, and the signal output by the output circuit may be, for example, but not limited to, output to and transmitted by a transmitter, and the input circuit and output The circuits may be the same circuit, which are used as input circuits and output circuits respectively at different times. The embodiments of the present application do not limit specific implementations of the processor and various circuits.
第十二方面,提供了一种处理装置,包括处理器和存储器。该处理器用于读取存储器中存储的指令,并可通过接收器接收信号,通过发射器发射信号,以执行第一方面至第六方面以及第一方面至第六方面任一种可能实现方式中的方法。In a twelfth aspect, a processing device is provided, including a processor and a memory. The processor is used to read instructions stored in the memory, and can receive signals through a receiver and transmit signals through a transmitter to execute the first aspect to the sixth aspect and any possible implementation manner of the first aspect to the sixth aspect. Methods.
可选地,所述处理器为一个或多个,所述存储器为一个或多个。Optionally, there are one or more processors, and one or more memories.
可选地,所述存储器可以与所述处理器集成在一起,或者所述存储器与处理器分离设置。Optionally, the memory may be integrated with the processor, or the memory is separately provided from the processor.
在具体实现过程中,存储器可以为非瞬时性(non-transitory)存储器,例如只读存储器(read only memory,ROM),其可以与处理器集成在同一块芯片上,也可以分别设置在不同的芯片上,本申请实施例对存储器的类型以及存储器与处理器的设置方式不做限定。In a specific implementation process, the memory may be a non-transitory memory, such as a read-only memory (ROM), which may be integrated on the same chip as the processor, or may be separately set in different On the chip, the embodiment of the present application does not limit the type of the memory and the way of setting the memory and the processor.
应理解,相关的数据交互过程例如发送指示信息可以为从处理器输出指示信息的过程,接收能力信息可以为处理器接收输入能力信息的过程。具体地,处理输出的数据可以输出给发射器,处理器接收的输入数据可以来自接收器。其中,发射器和接收器可以统称 为收发器。It should be understood that the related data interaction process, for example, sending instruction information may be a process of outputting instruction information from a processor, and receiving capability information may be a process of receiving input capability information by a processor. Specifically, the processed output data can be output to the transmitter, and the input data received by the processor can come from the receiver. Among them, the transmitter and receiver can be collectively referred to as a transceiver.
上述第十二方面中的处理装置可以是一个芯片,该处理器可以通过硬件来实现也可以通过软件来实现,当通过硬件实现时,该处理器可以是逻辑电路、集成电路等;当通过软件来实现时,该处理器可以是一个通用处理器,通过读取存储器中存储的软件代码来实现,该存储器可以集成在处理器中,可以位于该处理器之外,独立存在。The processing device in the above twelfth aspect may be a chip, and the processor may be implemented by hardware or software. When implemented by hardware, the processor may be a logic circuit, an integrated circuit, or the like. When implemented, the processor may be a general-purpose processor, which is implemented by reading software codes stored in a memory. The memory may be integrated in the processor, may be located outside the processor, and exist independently.
第十三方面,提供了一种计算机程序产品,所述计算机程序产品包括:计算机程序(也可以称为代码,或指令),当所述计算机程序被运行时,使得计算机执行上述第一方面至第六方面以及第一方面至第六方面中任一种可能实现方式中的方法。According to a thirteenth aspect, a computer program product is provided. The computer program product includes a computer program (also referred to as code or instructions), and when the computer program is executed, causes a computer to execute the first aspect to The sixth aspect and the method in any one of the possible implementation manners of the first aspect to the sixth aspect.
第十四方面,提供了一种计算机可读介质,所述计算机可读介质存储有计算机程序(也可以称为代码,或指令)当其在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行上述第一方面至第六方面以及第一方面至第六方面中任一种可能实现方式中的方法。According to a fourteenth aspect, a computer-readable medium is provided, where the computer-readable medium stores a computer program (also referred to as code, or instructions), which when executed on a computer, causes the computer to execute the first aspect to The sixth aspect and the method in any one of the possible implementation manners of the first aspect to the sixth aspect.
第十五方面,提供了一种通信系统,包括前述的网络设备和终端设备。According to a fifteenth aspect, a communication system is provided, including the foregoing network device and terminal device.
附图说明BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS
图1是适用于本申请实施例的通信系统的示意性;FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of a communication system applicable to an embodiment of the present application; FIG.
图2是本申请实施例提供的发送和接收CSI的方法的示意性流程图;2 is a schematic flowchart of a method for sending and receiving CSI according to an embodiment of the present application;
图3是本申请另一实施例提供的发送和接收参考信号的方法的示意性流程图;3 is a schematic flowchart of a method for sending and receiving a reference signal according to another embodiment of the present application;
图4是本申请又一实施例提供的发送和接收CSI的方法的示意性流程图;4 is a schematic flowchart of a method for sending and receiving CSI according to another embodiment of the present application;
图5是本申请实施例提供的通信装置的示意性框图;5 is a schematic block diagram of a communication device according to an embodiment of the present application;
图6是本申请实施例提供的终端设备的结构示意图;6 is a schematic structural diagram of a terminal device according to an embodiment of the present application;
图7是本申请实施例提供的网络设备的结构示意图。FIG. 7 is a schematic structural diagram of a network device according to an embodiment of the present application.
具体实施方式detailed description
下面将结合附图,对本申请中的技术方案进行描述。The technical solutions in this application will be described below with reference to the drawings.
本申请实施例的技术方案可以应用于各种通信系统,例如:全球移动通讯(Global System for Mobile communications,GSM)系统、码分多址(Code Division Multiple Access,CDMA)系统、宽带码分多址(Wideband Code Division Multiple Access,WCDMA)系统、通用分组无线业务(General Packet Radio Service,GPRS)、长期演进(Long Term Evolution,LTE)系统、LTE频分双工(Frequency Division Duplex,FDD)系统、LTE时分双工(Time Division Duplex,TDD)、通用移动通信系统(Universal Mobile Telecommunication System,UMTS)、全球互联微波接入(Worldwide Interoperability for Microwave Access,WiMAX)通信系统、未来的第五代(5th Generation,5G)通信系统或新无线接入技术(new radio Access Technology,NR)等。The technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application can be applied to various communication systems, such as: Global System for Mobile Communication (GSM) system, Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA) system, and Wideband Code Division Multiple Access (Wideband Code Division Multiple Access) system, General Packet Radio Service (GPRS), Long Term Evolution (LTE) system, LTE Frequency Division Duplex (FDD) system, LTE Time Division Duplex (TDD), Universal Mobile Telecommunication System (UMTS), Global Interoperability for Microwave Access (WiMAX) communication system, 5th Generation (future generation) 5G) communication system or new radio access technology (NR).
为便于理解本申请实施例,首先结合图1详细说明适用于本申请实施例的通信系统。图1示出了适用于本申请实施例的发送和接收的方法和装置的通信系统的示意图。如图1所示,该通信系统100可以包括至少一个网络设备,例如图1所示的网络设备110;该通信系统100还可以包括至少一个终端设备,例如图1所示的终端设备120。网络设备110与终端设备120可通过无线链路通信。各通信设备,如网络设备110或终端设备120,可以配置多个天线,该多个天线可以包括至少一个用于发送信号的发射天线和至少一个用于 接收信号的接收天线。另外,各通信设备还附加地包括发射机链和接收机链,本领域普通技术人员可以理解,它们均可包括与信号发送和接收相关的多个部件(例如处理器、调制器、复用器、解调器、解复用器或天线等)。因此,网络设备110与终端设备120可通过多天线技术通信。To facilitate understanding of the embodiments of the present application, a communication system applicable to the embodiments of the present application will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 1. FIG. 1 shows a schematic diagram of a communication system suitable for a method and apparatus for sending and receiving according to embodiments of the present application. As shown in FIG. 1, the communication system 100 may include at least one network device, such as network device 110 shown in FIG. 1; the communication system 100 may further include at least one terminal device, such as terminal device 120 shown in FIG. 1. The network device 110 and the terminal device 120 can communicate through a wireless link. Each communication device, such as the network device 110 or the terminal device 120, may be configured with multiple antennas, and the multiple antennas may include at least one transmitting antenna for transmitting signals and at least one receiving antenna for receiving signals. In addition, each communication device additionally includes a transmitter chain and a receiver chain. Those skilled in the art can understand that they can include multiple components related to signal transmission and reception (such as a processor, a modulator, and a multiplexer). , Demodulator, demultiplexer or antenna, etc.). Therefore, the network device 110 and the terminal device 120 can communicate through a multi-antenna technology.
应理解,该无线通信系统中的网络设备可以是任意一种具有无线收发功能的设备。该设备包括但不限于:演进型节点B(evolved Node B,eNB)、无线网络控制器(Radio Network Controller,RNC)、节点B(Node B,NB)、基站控制器(Base Station Controller,BSC)、基站收发台(Base Transceiver Station,BTS)、家庭基站(例如,Home evolved NodeB,或Home Node B,HNB)、基带单元(BaseBand Unit,BBU),无线保真(Wireless Fidelity,WIFI)系统中的接入点(Access Point,AP)、无线中继节点、无线回传节点、传输点(transmission point,TP)或者发送接收点(transmission and reception point,TRP)等,还可以为5G,如,NR,系统中的gNB,或,传输点(TRP或TP),5G系统中的基站的一个或一组(包括多个天线面板)天线面板,或者,还可以为构成gNB或传输点的网络节点,如基带单元(BBU),或,分布式单元(distributed unit,DU)等。It should be understood that the network device in the wireless communication system may be any device having a wireless transceiver function. The device includes but is not limited to: evolved Node B (eNB), radio network controller (RNC), node B (NB), base station controller (BSC) , Base Transceiver Station (BTS), Home Base Station (e.g., Home NodeB, or Home Node B, HNB), Base Band Unit (BBU), Wireless Fidelity (WIFI) system Access point (AP), wireless relay node, wireless backhaul node, transmission point (TP) or transmission and reception point (TRP), etc., can also be 5G, such as NR , GNB in the system, or, a transmission point (TRP or TP), one or a group of base stations in a 5G system (including multiple antenna panels), or an antenna panel, or a network node constituting a gNB or a transmission point, Such as a baseband unit (BBU), or a distributed unit (DU).
在一些部署中,gNB可以包括集中式单元(centralized unit,CU)和DU。gNB还可以包括射频单元(radio unit,RU)。CU实现gNB的部分功能,DU实现gNB的部分功能,比如,CU实现无线资源控制(radio resource control,RRC),分组数据汇聚层协议(packet data convergence protocol,PDCP)层的功能,DU实现无线链路控制(radio link control,RLC)层、媒体接入控制(media access control,MAC)层和物理(physical,PHY)层的功能。由于RRC层的信息最终会变成PHY层的信息,或者,由PHY层的信息转变而来,因而,在这种架构下,高层信令,如RRC层信令,也可以认为是由DU发送的,或者,由DU+CU发送的。可以理解的是,网络设备可以为CU节点、或DU节点、或包括CU节点和DU节点的设备。此外,CU可以划分为接入网(radio access network,RAN)中的网络设备,也可以将CU划分为核心网(core network,CN)中的网络设备,本申请对此不做限定。In some deployments, a gNB may include a centralized unit (CU) and a DU. The gNB may also include a radio frequency unit (radio unit, RU). CU implements some functions of gNB and DU implements some functions of gNB. For example, CU implements radio resource control (RRC), packet data convergence layer protocol (PDCP) layer functions, and DU implements wireless chain. Functions of a radio control (RLC) layer, a media access control (MAC) layer, and a physical (PHY) layer. Because the information of the RRC layer will eventually become the information of the PHY layer, or transformed from the information of the PHY layer, under this architecture, higher-level signaling, such as RRC layer signaling, can also be considered to be sent by the DU. , Or, sent by DU + CU. It can be understood that the network device may be a CU node, or a DU node, or a device including a CU node and a DU node. In addition, the CU can be divided into network equipment in an access network (RAN), or the CU can be divided into network equipment in a core network (CN), which is not limited in this application.
还应理解,该无线通信系统中的终端设备也可以称为用户设备(user equipment,UE)、接入终端、用户单元、用户站、移动站、移动台、远方站、远程终端、移动设备、用户终端、终端、无线通信设备、用户代理或用户装置。本申请的实施例中的终端设备可以是手机(mobile phone)、平板电脑(pad)、带无线收发功能的电脑、虚拟现实(virtual reality,VR)终端设备、增强现实(augmented reality,AR)终端设备、工业控制(industrial control)中的无线终端、无人驾驶(self driving)中的无线终端、远程医疗(remote medical)中的无线终端、智能电网(smart grid)中的无线终端、运输安全(transportation safety)中的无线终端、智慧城市(smart city)中的无线终端、智慧家庭(smart home)中的无线终端等等。本申请的实施例对应用场景不做限定。It should also be understood that the terminal equipment in the wireless communication system may also be referred to as user equipment (UE), access terminal, user unit, user station, mobile station, mobile station, remote station, remote terminal, mobile device, User terminal, terminal, wireless communication device, user agent, or user device. The terminal device in the embodiments of the present application may be a mobile phone, a tablet, a computer with a wireless transceiver function, a virtual reality (VR) terminal device, or an augmented reality (AR) terminal. Equipment, wireless terminals in industrial control, wireless terminals in self driving, wireless terminals in remote medical, wireless terminals in smart grid, transportation security ( wireless terminals in transportation, wireless terminals in smart cities, wireless terminals in smart homes, and so on. The embodiment of the present application does not limit the application scenario.
在某些通信系统中,例如5G系统,为了在高频场景下对抗路径损耗,具有通信连接的两个通信设备之间可分别通过波束赋形(beamforing)来获得增益。发送端,如网络设备110,和接收端,如终端设备120,可通过波束(beam)训练来获取发射波束与接收波束之间的配对关系。In some communication systems, such as 5G systems, in order to counteract path loss in high-frequency scenarios, two communication devices with communication connections may obtain gain through beamforing, respectively. The transmitting end, such as the network device 110, and the receiving end, such as the terminal device 120, can obtain the pairing relationship between the transmitting beam and the receiving beam through beam training.
其中,波束,可以理解为空间滤波器(spatial filter)或空间参数(spatial parameters)。 用于发送信号的波束可以称为发射波束(transmission beam,Tx beam),可以为空间发送滤波器(spatial domain transmit filter)或空间发射参数(spatial domain transmit parameter);用于接收信号的波束可以称为接收波束(reception beam,Rx beam),可以为空间接收滤波器(spatial domain receive filter)或空间接收参数(spatial domain receive parameter)。Among them, the beam can be understood as a spatial filter or a spatial parameter. The beam used to send a signal can be called a transmission beam (transmission beam, Tx beam), which can be a spatial transmission filter (spatial domain transmission filter) or a spatial transmission parameter (spatial domain transmission parameter); the beam used to receive the signal can be called To receive a beam (reception beam, Rx beam), it can be a spatial receive filter (spatial domain receive filter) or a spatial receive parameter (spatial domain receive parameter).
形成波束的技术可以是波束赋形技术或者其他技术。例如,波束赋形技术具体可以为数字波束赋形技术、模拟波束赋形技术或者混合数字/模拟波束赋形技术等。发射波束可以是指信号经天线发射出去后在空间不同方向上形成的信号强度的分布,接收波束可以是指从天线上接收到的无线信号在空间不同方向上的信号强度分布。The beam forming technology may be a beam forming technology or other technologies. For example, the beamforming technology may specifically be a digital beamforming technology, an analog beamforming technology, or a hybrid digital / analog beamforming technology. A transmitting beam may refer to a signal intensity distribution in different directions of a space after a signal is transmitted through an antenna, and a receiving beam may refer to a signal intensity distribution of a wireless signal received from an antenna in different directions in space.
在NR协议中,波束例如可以是空间滤波器(spatial filter)。但应理解,本申请并不排除在未来的协议中定义其他的术语来表示相同或相似的含义的可能。In the NR protocol, the beam may be, for example, a spatial filter. However, it should be understood that this application does not exclude the possibility of defining other terms in the future agreement to represent the same or similar meaning.
需要说明的是,在下文示出的实施例中,“波束”和“空间滤波器”交替使用,例如“发射波束”和“空间发射滤波器”交替使用,“接收波束”和“空间接收滤波器”交替使用,在不强调其区别时,其所要表达的含义是一致的。It should be noted that in the embodiments shown below, "beam" and "spatial filter" are used alternately, for example, "transmit beam" and "space transmit filter" are used alternately, and "receive beam" and "spatial receive filter" "The device" is used interchangeably. When the difference is not emphasized, the meaning to be expressed is the same.
波束配对关系,即,发射波束与接收波束之间的配对关系,也就是空间发射滤波器与空间接收滤波器之间的配对关系。在具有波束配对关系的发射波束和接收波束之间传输信号可以获得较大的波束赋形增益。The beam pairing relationship, that is, the pairing relationship between the transmitting beam and the receiving beam, that is, the pairing relationship between the spatial transmitting filter and the spatial receiving filter. Transmitting a signal between a transmitting beam and a receiving beam having a beam pairing relationship can obtain a large beamforming gain.
在一种实现方式中,发送端可通过波束扫描的方式发送参考信号,接收端也可通过波束扫描的方式接收参考信号。具体地,发送端可通过波束赋形的方式在空间形成不同指向性的波束,并可以在多个具有不同指向性的波束上轮询,以通过不同指向性的波束将参考信号发射出去,使得参考信号在发送波束所指向的方向上发射参考信号的功率可以达到最大。接收端也可通过波束赋形的方式在空间形成不同指向性的波束,并可以在多个具有不同指向性的波束上轮询,以通过不同指向性的波束接收参考信号,使得该接收端接收参考信号的功率在接收波束所指向的方向上可以达到最大。In an implementation manner, the transmitting end may send the reference signal in a beam scanning manner, and the receiving end may also receive the reference signal in a beam scanning manner. Specifically, the transmitting end may form beams with different directivity in space by means of beamforming, and may poll on multiple beams with different directivity to transmit the reference signal through the beams with different directivity, so that The power of the reference signal to transmit the reference signal in the direction pointed by the transmission beam can reach the maximum. The receiving end can also form beams with different directivity in the space by means of beamforming, and can poll on multiple beams with different directivity to receive the reference signal through the beams with different directivity, so that the receiving end receives The power of the reference signal can be maximized in the direction pointed by the receiving beam.
通过遍历各发射波束和接收波束,接收端可基于接收到的参考信号进行信道测量,并将测量得到的结果通过CSI上报发送端。例如,接收端可以将参考信号接收功率(reference signal receiving power,RSRP)较大的部分参考信号资源上报给发送端,如上报参考信号资源的标识,以便发送端在传输数据或信令时采用信道质量较好的波束配对关系来收发信号。By traversing each transmitting beam and receiving beam, the receiving end can perform channel measurement based on the received reference signal, and report the measurement result to the transmitting end through CSI. For example, the receiving end may report a part of the reference signal receiving power (reference signal receiving power (RSRP)) of the larger reference signal resource to the transmitting end, such as reporting the identifier of the reference signal resource, so that the transmitting end uses the channel when transmitting data or signaling Better quality beam pairing to send and receive signals.
在介绍本申请实施例之前,首先对本申请中涉及的几个名词作简单说明。Before introducing the embodiments of the present application, a few terms involved in the present application will be briefly described first.
1、参考信号与参考信号资源:参考信号可用于信道测量、信道估计或者波束质量监测等。参考信号资源可用于配置参考信号的传输属性,例如,时频资源位置、端口映射关系、功率因子以及扰码等,具体可参考现有技术。发送端设备可基于参考信号资源发送参考信号,接收端设备可基于参考信号资源接收参考信号。1. Reference signal and reference signal resources: Reference signals can be used for channel measurement, channel estimation, or beam quality monitoring. The reference signal resource can be used to configure the transmission attributes of the reference signal, such as the position of the time-frequency resource, the port mapping relationship, the power factor, and the scrambling code. For details, refer to the prior art. The transmitting device may send the reference signal based on the reference signal resource, and the receiving device may receive the reference signal based on the reference signal resource.
本申请中涉及的信道测量也包括波束测量,即通过测量参考信号获得波束质量信息,用于衡量波束质量的参数包括RSRP,但不限于此。例如,波束质量也可以通过参考信号接收质量(reference signal receiving quality,RSRQ),信噪比(signal-noise ratio,SNR),信号与干扰噪声比(signal to interference plus noise ratio,SINR,简称信干噪比)等参数衡量。本申请实施例中,为方便说明,在未作出特别说明的情况下,所涉及的信道测量可以视为波束测量。The channel measurement involved in this application also includes beam measurement, that is, obtaining beam quality information by measuring a reference signal, and parameters for measuring beam quality include RSRP, but are not limited thereto. For example, the beam quality can also be obtained through reference signal reception quality (RSRQ), signal-noise ratio (SNR), signal to interference plus noise ratio (SINR) Noise ratio) and other parameters. In the embodiments of the present application, for the convenience of description, the channel measurement involved may be regarded as a beam measurement without a special description.
本申请中涉及的波束质量监测是监测基于波束的链路质量信息,用于评估无线链路质量的参数包括假设的块误码率(hypothetical block error ratio,hypothetical BLER),但不限于此。例如,链路质量也可以通过RSRP,RSRQ,SNR,SINR等参数衡量。The beam quality monitoring involved in this application monitors beam-based link quality information. Parameters used to evaluate wireless link quality include hypothetical block error rate (hyperthetical block error ratio, hypothetical BLER), but are not limited thereto. For example, link quality can also be measured by parameters such as RSRP, RSRQ, SNR, SINR.
具体地,本申请实施例中涉及的参考信号例如可以包括信道状态信息参考信号(channel state information reference signal,CSI-RS)、同步信号块(synchronization signal block,SSB)以及探测参考信号(sounding reference signal,SRS)。与此对应地,参考信号资源可以包括CSI-RS资源(CSI-RS resource)、SSB资源、SRS资源(SRS resource)。Specifically, the reference signals involved in the embodiments of the present application may include, for example, a channel state information reference signal (CSI-RS), a synchronization signal block (SSB), and a sounding reference signal (sounding reference signal). , SRS). Correspondingly, the reference signal resources may include CSI-RS resources (CSI-RS resources), SSB resources, and SRS resources (SRS resources).
需要说明的是,上述SSB也可以称为同步信号/物理广播信道块(synchronization signal/physical broadcast channel block,SS/PBCH block),所对应的SSB资源也可以称为同步信号/物理广播信道块资源(SS/PBCH block resource),可简称为SSB resource。在某些情况下,SSB也可以是指SSB资源。在本申请实施例中,为便于区分和说明,在未作出特别说明的情况下,SSB可以视为SS/PBCH block,SSB资源可以视为SS/PBCH block resource。It should be noted that the above SSB can also be called synchronization signal / physical broadcast channel block (SS / PBCH block), and the corresponding SSB resource can also be called synchronization signal / physical broadcast channel block resource. (SS / PBCH block source) can be referred to as SSB source for short. In some cases, SSB can also refer to SSB resources. In the embodiments of the present application, for the convenience of distinguishing and explaining, the SSB can be regarded as an SS / PBCH block and the SSB resource can be regarded as an SS / PBCH block resource without a special description.
为了区分不同的参考信号资源,每个参考信号资源可对应于一个参考信号资源的标识,例如,CSI-RS资源标识(CSI-RS resource indicator,CRI)、SSB资源标识(SSB resource indicator,SSBRI)、SRS资源索引(SRS resource index,SRI)。In order to distinguish different reference signal resources, each reference signal resource may correspond to an identifier of a reference signal resource, such as CSI-RS resource identifier (CRI), SSB resource identifier (SSBRI) SRS resource index (SRS resource index).
其中,SSB资源标识也可以称为SSB标识(SSB index)。Among them, the SSB resource identifier may also be referred to as the SSB identifier (SSB index).
应理解,上文中列举的参考信号以及相应的参考信号资源仅为示例性说明,不应对本申请构成任何限定,本申请并不排除在未来的协议中定义其他参考信号来实现相同或相似功能的可能。It should be understood that the reference signals and corresponding reference signal resources listed above are only exemplary descriptions, and should not constitute any limitation on this application. This application does not exclude the definition of other reference signals in future protocols to achieve the same or similar functions. may.
在一种可能的设计中,网络设备可通过RRC消息向终端设备发送CSI资源配置(CSI resource setting),每个CSI resource setting可以包括S(S≥1,且S为整数)个CSI-RS资源集(CSI-RS resource sets),每个CSI-RS resource set可包括K(K≥1,且K为整数)个NZP CSI-RS资源(NZP CSI-RS resources)。终端设备可以在网络设备所指示的K个NZP CSI-RS resources上接收CSI-RS。In a possible design, a network device may send a CSI resource configuration (CSI resource configuration) to a terminal device through an RRC message, and each CSI resource configuration may include S (S ≥ 1 and S is an integer) CSI-RS resources Sets (CSI-RS resources), each CSI-RS resources set may include K (K≥1, and K is an integer) NZP CSI-RS resources (NZP CSI-RS resources). The terminal device can receive the CSI-RS on the K NZP CSI-RS resources indicated by the network device.
在另一种可能的设计中,终端设备在接入小区时,便可以获知SSB的资源配置信息。网络设备也可以通过一种特殊的CSI-RS资源集指示一个或多个SSB资源的标识,该SSB资源例如可以是信道状态信息同步信号块资源集(CSI-SSB-Resource Set)。基于该一个或多个SSB资源传输的SSB可用于信道测量。终端设备可以根据该特殊的CSI-RS资源集所指示的SSB资源接收SSB,并进行信道测量。In another possible design, when the terminal device accesses the cell, it can obtain the resource configuration information of the SSB. The network device may also indicate the identity of one or more SSB resources through a special CSI-RS resource set. The SSB resource may be, for example, a channel state information synchronization signal block resource set (CSI-SSB-Resource Set). The SSB transmitted based on the one or more SSB resources may be used for channel measurement. The terminal device may receive the SSB according to the SSB resource indicated by the special CSI-RS resource set, and perform channel measurement.
应理解,上文列举的网络设备向终端设备指示参考信号资源的具体方法仅为示例,不应对本申请构成任何限定,本申请并不排除在未来的协议中采用其他的信令或方式指示参考信号资源的可能。例如,网络设备可进一步通过DCI指示K个NZP CSI-RS resources中当前可使用的J(K≥J≥1,且J为整数)个NZP CSI-RS resources。It should be understood that the specific method for the network device to indicate the reference signal resource to the terminal device listed above is only an example, and should not constitute any limitation to this application. This application does not exclude the use of other signaling or methods to indicate the reference in future protocols Signal resources are possible. For example, the network device may further indicate J (K ≧ J ≧ 1, and J is an integer) NZP CSI-RS resources currently available in K NZP CSI-RS resources through DCI.
2、时域行为(time domain behavior)参数:在参考信号资源配置以及CSI上报配置(CSI report setting)中,可以通过不同的时域行为参数来指示不同的时域行为。其中,参考信号资源配置的时域行为参数可用于指示终端设备接收参考信号的时域行为;CSI上报配置的时域行为参数可用于指示终端设备上报CSI的时域行为。2. Time domain behavior parameters: In the reference signal resource configuration and the CSI reporting configuration, different time domain behavior parameters can be used to indicate different time domain behaviors. The time domain behavior parameter of the reference signal resource configuration may be used to indicate the time domain behavior of the terminal device receiving the reference signal; the time domain behavior parameter configured by the CSI report may be used to indicate the time domain behavior of the terminal device to report the CSI.
作为示例而非限定,时域行为例如可以包括周期性(periodic)、半持续性 (semi-persistent)和非周期性(aperiodic)。By way of example and not limitation, the time domain behavior may include, for example, periodic, semi-persistent, and aperiodic.
3、天线端口(antenna port):简称端口。被接收端设备所识别的发射天线,或者在空间上可以区分的发射天线。针对每个虚拟天线可以配置一个天线端口,每个虚拟天线可以为多个物理天线的加权组合,每个天线端口可以与一个参考信号端口对应。3. Antenna port (referred to as port). Transmitting antennas recognized by the receiving end equipment, or transmitting antennas that are spatially distinguishable. One antenna port can be configured for each virtual antenna, each virtual antenna can be a weighted combination of multiple physical antennas, and each antenna port can correspond to a reference signal port.
4、准共址(quasi-co-location,QCL):具有QCL关系的天线端口对应的信号中具有相同的参数,或者,一个天线端口的参数可用于确定与该天线端口具有QCL关系的另一个天线端口的参数,或者,两个天线端口具有相同的参数,或者,两个天线端口间的参数差小于某阈值。其中,所述参数可以包括以下一项或多项:时延扩展(delay spread),多普勒扩展(Doppler spread),多普勒频移(Doppler shift),平均时延(average delay),平均增益,空间接收参数(spatial Rx parameters)。其中,空间接收参数可以包括以下的一项或多项:到达角(angle of arrival,AOA)、平均AOA、AOA扩展、离开角(angle of departure,AOD)、平均离开角AOD、AOD扩展、接收天线空间相关性参数、发送天线空间相关性参数、发送波束、接收波束以及资源标识。4. Quasi-co-location (QCL): The signals corresponding to the antenna ports with a QCL relationship have the same parameters, or the parameters of one antenna port can be used to determine another antenna with a QCL relationship to the antenna port. The parameters of the antenna ports, or the two antenna ports have the same parameters, or the parameter difference between the two antenna ports is less than a certain threshold. The parameters may include one or more of the following: delay spread, Doppler spread, Doppler shift, average delay, average Gain, spatial Rx parameters. Among them, the space receiving parameters may include one or more of the following: angle of arrival (AOA), average AOA, AOA extension, angle of departure (AOD), average departure angle AOD, AOD extension, reception Antenna spatial correlation parameters, transmitting antenna spatial correlation parameters, transmitting beams, receiving beams, and resource identifiers.
其中,上述角度可以为不同维度的分解值,或不同维度分解值的组合。天线端口为具有不同天线端口编号的天线端口,和/或,具有相同天线端口号在不同时间和/或频率和/或码域资源内进行信息发送或接收的天线端口,和/或,具有不同天线端口号在不同时间和/或频率和/或码域资源内进行信息发送或接收的天线端口。资源标识可以包括:CSI-RS资源标识,或SRS资源标识,或SSB资源标识,或物理随机接入信道(Physical Random Access Channel,PRACH)上传输的前导序列的资源标识,或解调参考信号(demodulation reference signal,DMRS)的资源标识,用于指示资源上的波束。The above-mentioned angle may be a decomposition value of different dimensions, or a combination of decomposition values of different dimensions. The antenna ports are antenna ports having different antenna port numbers, and / or, antenna ports having the same antenna port number for transmitting or receiving information at different times and / or frequencies and / or code domain resources, and / or, have different The antenna port number is an antenna port for transmitting or receiving information in different time and / or frequency and / or code domain resources. The resource identifier may include: a CSI-RS resource identifier, or an SRS resource identifier, or an SSB resource identifier, or a resource identifier of a preamble sequence transmitted on a physical random access channel (PRACH), or a demodulation reference signal ( demodulation (reference signal, DMRS) resource identifier, used to indicate the beam on the resource.
在NR协议中,上述具有QCL关系可以基于不同的参数分为以下四种类型:In the NR protocol, the above QCL relationships can be divided into the following four types based on different parameters:
类型A(type A):多普勒频移、多普勒扩展、平均时延、时延扩展;Type A (type A): Doppler frequency shift, Doppler spread, average delay, delay spread;
类型B(type B):多普勒频移、多普勒扩展;Type B (type B): Doppler frequency shift and Doppler spread;
类型C(type C):多普勒频移、平均时延;以及Type C (type C): Doppler shift, average delay; and
类型D(type D):空间接收参数。Type D (type D): space receiving parameters.
本申请实施例所涉及的QCL为类型D的QCL。下文中在没有特别说明的情况下,QCL可以理解为类型D的QCL,即,基于空间接收参数定义的QCL。The QCL involved in the embodiment of the present application is a QCL of type D. Unless otherwise specified below, the QCL can be understood as a QCL of type D, that is, a QCL defined based on a spatial receiving parameter.
当QCL关系指类型D的QCL关系时:下行信号的端口和下行信号的端口之间,或上行信号的端口和上行信号的端口之间的QCL关系,可以是两个信号具有相同的AOA或AOD,用于表示具有相同的接收波束或发送波束。又例如对于下行信号和上行信号间或上行信号与下行信号的端口间的QCL关系,可以是两个信号的AOA和AOD具有对应关系,或两个信号的AOD和AOA具有对应关系,即可以利用波束互易性,根据下行接收波束确定上行发送波束,或根据上行发送波束确定下行接收波束。When the QCL relationship refers to the QCL relationship of type D: the QCL relationship between the port of the downlink signal and the port of the downlink signal, or the port of the uplink signal and the port of the uplink signal, the two signals can have the same AOA or AOD , Is used to indicate that they have the same receive or transmit beam. For another example, for the QCL relationship between the downlink signal and the uplink signal or between the uplink signal and the port of the downlink signal, the AOA and AOD of the two signals have a corresponding relationship, or the AOD and AOA of the two signals have a corresponding relationship, that is, a beam can be used. Reciprocity, determining an uplink transmission beam according to a downlink reception beam, or determining a downlink reception beam according to an uplink transmission beam.
具有QCL关系的端口上传输的信号还可以具有对应的波束,对应的波束包括以下至少之一:相同的接收波束、相同的发送波束、与接收波束对应的发送波束(对应于有互易的场景)、与发送波束对应的接收波束(对应于有互易的场景)。A signal transmitted on a port with a QCL relationship may also have a corresponding beam, and the corresponding beam includes at least one of the following: the same receiving beam, the same transmitting beam, and the transmitting beam corresponding to the receiving beam (corresponding to a scenario with reciprocity) ), The receiving beam corresponding to the transmitting beam (corresponding to a scene with reciprocity).
具有QCL关系的端口上传输的信号还可以理解为使用相同的空间滤波器(spatial filter)接收或发送信号。空间滤波器可以为以下至少之一:预编码,天线端口的权值,天线端口的相位偏转,天线端口的幅度增益。Signals transmitted on ports with a QCL relationship can also be understood as receiving or sending signals using the same spatial filter. The spatial filter may be at least one of the following: precoding, weight of the antenna port, phase deflection of the antenna port, and amplitude gain of the antenna port.
具有QCL关系的端口上传输的信号还可以理解为具有对应的波束对连接(beam pair link,BPL),对应的BPL包括以下至少之一:相同的下行BPL,相同的上行BPL,与下行BPL对应的上行BPL,与上行BPL对应的下行BPL。A signal transmitted on a port with a QCL relationship can also be understood as having a corresponding beam pair connection (BPL). The corresponding BPL includes at least one of the following: the same downlink BPL, the same uplink BPL, and the downlink BPL. The uplink BPL corresponds to the downlink BPL corresponding to the uplink BPL.
因此,空间接收参数(即,类型D的QCL)可以理解为用于指示接收波束的方向信息的参数。Therefore, the spatial reception parameter (ie, QCL of type D) can be understood as a parameter for indicating the direction information of the received beam.
5、传输配置指示(transmission configuration indicator,TCI):可用于指示两种参考信号之间的QCL关系。网络设备可通过高层信令(如无线资源控制(radio resource control,RRC)消息)为终端设备配置TCI状态(TCI state)列表,并可以通过高层信令(如MAC CE)或物理层信令(如DCI激活或指示其中的一个或多个TCI状态。具体地,网络设备可通过RRC消息为终端设备配置TCI状态列表,终端设备在接收来自网络设备的物理下行控制信道(physical downlink control channel,PDCCH时,可以根据MAC CE的指示激活控制信道TCI状态列表中的一个或多个,其中控制信道TCI状态列表为上述TCI状态列表的一个子集;终端设备可以从PDCCH中获取DCI,进而根据DCI的指示选择数据信道TCI状态列表中的一个或多个TCI状态,其中所述数据信道TCI状态列表为上述TCI状态列表的一个子集,通过MAC-CE信令指示给终端设备。5. Transmission configuration indicator (TCI): can be used to indicate the QCL relationship between two reference signals. Network devices can configure TCI state (TCI state) lists for terminal devices through high-level signaling (such as radio resource control (RRC) messages), and can use high-level signaling (such as MAC CE) or physical layer signaling ( For example, DCI activates or indicates one or more TCI states. Specifically, the network device may configure a TCI status list for the terminal device through an RRC message. The terminal device receives a physical downlink control channel (physical downlink control channel, PDCCH) from the network device. At this time, one or more of the control channel TCI status list may be activated according to the instruction of the MAC CE, where the control channel TCI status list is a subset of the above TCI status list; the terminal device may obtain DCI from the PDCCH, and then according to the DCI Instructs selection of one or more TCI states in a data channel TCI state list, where the data channel TCI state list is a subset of the above TCI state list and is indicated to the terminal device through MAC-CE signaling.
一个TCI状态的配置信息可以包括一个或两个参考信号资源的标识,以及所关联的QCL类型。当QCL关系配置为类型A、或B、或C中的一种时,终端设备可以根据TCI状态的指示,解调PDCCH或PDSCH。The configuration information of a TCI state may include an identifier of one or two reference signal resources, and an associated QCL type. When the QCL relationship is configured as one of type A, or B, or C, the terminal device can demodulate the PDCCH or PDSCH according to the indication of the TCI state.
当QCL关系配置为类型D时,终端设备可以知道网络设备使用哪个发射波束发射信号,进而可以根据信道测量确定的波束配对关系确定使用哪个接收波束接收信号。When the QCL relationship is configured as type D, the terminal device can know which transmit beam is used by the network device to transmit the signal, and then can determine which receive beam to use to receive the signal according to the beam pairing relationship determined by the channel measurement.
6、波束失败监测机制:在NR中,网络设备可通过高层参数波束失败监测参考信号资源配置(Beam-Failure-Detection-RS-ResourceConfig)为终端设备配置一个周期性的参考信号资源集合q 0,该参考信号资源集合q 0中包括一组参考信号资源。终端设备可以基于该参考信号资源集合q 0接收参考信号,并基于接收到的参考信号评估基于波束的无线链路质量。可以理解,该无线链路质量是基于发射波束和/或接收波束建立起来的无线链路的质量。当链路质量监测结果满足预设条件时,可以触发波束失败恢复(beam failure recovery,BFR)。这种基于波束的无线链路质量监测可以简称为波束失败监测。 6. Beam failure monitoring mechanism: In NR, a network device can configure a periodic reference signal resource set q 0 for a terminal device through a high-level parameter beam failure monitoring reference signal resource configuration (Beam-Failure-Detection-RS-ResourceConfig). The reference signal resource set q 0 includes a set of reference signal resources. The terminal device may receive a reference signal based on the reference signal resource set q 0 , and evaluate a beam-based radio link quality based on the received reference signal. It can be understood that the quality of the wireless link is based on the quality of the wireless link established by the transmitting beam and / or the receiving beam. When the link quality monitoring result meets a preset condition, beam failure recovery (BFR) can be triggered. This kind of beam-based wireless link quality monitoring can be referred to simply as beam failure monitoring.
另外,网络设备可通过高层参数候选波束参考信号列表(Candidate-Beam-RS-List)为终端设备配置一个参考信号资源集合q 1,该参考信号资源集合q 1中也可包括一组参考信号资源。当波束失败恢复被触发时,该参考信号资源集合q 1中的参考信号资源可作为候选的参考信号资源用于波束恢复。 In addition, the network device may configure a reference signal resource set q 1 for the terminal device through a high-level parameter candidate beam reference signal list (Candidate-Beam-RS-List), and the reference signal resource set q 1 may also include a set of reference signal resources. . When the beam failure recovery is triggered, the reference signal resources in the reference signal resource set q 1 can be used as candidate reference signal resources for beam recovery.
下面以图1中示出的通信系统为例来说明本申请实施例。在下行信道测量中,发送端可以为网络设备,如图1中所示的网络设备110;接收端可以为终端设备,如图1中所示的终端设备120。The following uses the communication system shown in FIG. 1 as an example to describe the embodiment of the present application. In the downlink channel measurement, the transmitting end may be a network device, such as the network device 110 shown in FIG. 1; the receiving end may be a terminal device, such as the terminal device 120 shown in FIG. 1.
在本申请实施例中,终端设备120可以基于每个空间接收滤波器接收到的参考信号进行信道测量,并将测量得到的结果分组上报给网络设备110。终端设备120可以将基于同一个空间接收滤波器测量得到的结果归为一组测量报告。各组测量报告所对应的空间接收滤波器彼此各不相同。因此,本申请实施例中的测量报告与空间接收滤波器具有一一对应关系。网络设备110可以基于终端设备120上报的一组或多组测量报告,感知空间接收滤 波器与参考信号资源的对应关系,也就是感知一个或多个接收波束与一个或多个发射波束的配对关系。In the embodiment of the present application, the terminal device 120 may perform channel measurement based on the reference signal received by each spatial receiving filter, and report the measurement result to the network device 110 in groups. The terminal device 120 may classify the results measured based on the same spatial receiving filter into a set of measurement reports. The spatial receiving filters corresponding to each set of measurement reports are different from each other. Therefore, the measurement report and the spatial receiving filter in the embodiments of the present application have a one-to-one correspondence relationship. The network device 110 may, based on one or more measurement reports reported by the terminal device 120, perceive the correspondence between the spatial reception filter and the reference signal resource, that is, perceive the pairing relationship between one or more receive beams and one or more transmit beams. .
因此,网络设备110可以基于更多的接收波束与发射波束的配对关系进行波束管理。例如,网络设备110可以将终端设备120上报的参考信号资源标识按测量报告分组,保存在本地。终端设备120在接收到来自网络设备110的参考信号时,也可以将接收到的参考信号对应的参考信号资源标识与用于接收该参考信号的接收波束的对应关系保存在本地。网络设备110可以以TCI状态列表的形式将参考信号资源的标识配置并通知终端设备120,以便在此后的通信过程中选择与TCI状态列表中保存的某一参考信号资源的标识所对应的发射波束发送信号,并可通过MAC CE激活或通过DCI指示与所选择的发射波束对应的TCI状态,以帮助终端设备120判断并选择使用一个合适的接收波束接收信号。Therefore, the network device 110 can perform beam management based on more pairing relationships between the receiving beam and the transmitting beam. For example, the network device 110 may group the reference signal resource identifiers reported by the terminal device 120 according to the measurement report and store them locally. When receiving the reference signal from the network device 110, the terminal device 120 may also save the correspondence between the reference signal resource identifier corresponding to the received reference signal and the receiving beam used to receive the reference signal locally. The network device 110 may configure and notify the terminal device 120 of the identifier of the reference signal resource in the form of a TCI status list, so as to select a transmission beam corresponding to the identifier of a reference signal resource stored in the TCI status list in a subsequent communication process. Send the signal, and activate the MAC or CE or indicate the TCI status corresponding to the selected transmission beam through the DCI to help the terminal device 120 determine and select a suitable reception beam to receive the signal.
当终端设备120发生了倾侧或翻转导致某一接收波束对应的TCI状态列表失效时,由于网络设备110已经预先获取了更多的发射波束与接收波束的配对关系,网络设备110可以获得终端设备120接收质量较好的接收波束的信息,然后网络设备110可以直接切换到与该接收波束所对应的质量较好的发射波束。同时终端设备120可以也切换到该接收波束接收信号,这样可以避免频繁地触发波束失败恢复流程。因此,可以提高波束配对关系的鲁棒性,也就可以提高通信系统的鲁棒性,有利于提高传输效率,同时有利于提高用户体验。When the terminal device 120 tilts or rolls over and causes the TCI status list corresponding to a certain receiving beam to become invalid, since the network device 110 has obtained more pairing relationships between the transmitting beam and the receiving beam in advance, the network device 110 can obtain the terminal device 120 The information of the receiving beam with better quality is received, and then the network device 110 may directly switch to the transmitting beam with better quality corresponding to the receiving beam. At the same time, the terminal device 120 may also switch to the receiving beam to receive signals, which can avoid frequently triggering a beam failure recovery process. Therefore, the robustness of the beam pairing relationship can be improved, which can also improve the robustness of the communication system, which is beneficial to improving the transmission efficiency and at the same time it is beneficial to improving the user experience.
再例如,网络设备110将终端设备120上报的参考信号资源标识#1-#4按测量报告分组,保存在本地,假设测量报告分为组#1和组#2,分别对应终端设备120的接收波束#1和接收波束#2,其中参考信号资源标识#1和#2对应组#1,参考信号资源标识#3和#4对应组#2。当网络设备110使用参考信号资源标识#4所对应的发射波束为另一个终端设备服务的前提下,网络设备110可以优先调度使用参考信号资源标识#1或#2所对应的发射波束为当前终端设备120服务。For another example, the network device 110 groups the reference signal resource identifiers # 1- # 4 reported by the terminal device 120 according to the measurement report and stores them locally. It is assumed that the measurement report is divided into groups # 1 and # 2, which respectively correspond to the reception of the terminal device 120. Beam # 1 and receiving beam # 2, where reference signal resource identifiers # 1 and # 2 correspond to group # 1, and reference signal resource identifiers # 3 and # 4 correspond to group # 2. On the premise that the network device 110 uses the transmission beam corresponding to the reference signal resource identifier # 4 to serve another terminal device, the network device 110 can preferentially schedule the transmission beam corresponding to the reference signal resource identifier # 1 or # 2 to be the current terminal. Device 120 services.
参考信号资源标识#1或#2与参考信号资源标识#4分属不同的测量报告,对应当前终端设备不同的接收波束,因此若网络设备110选择参考信号资源标识#1或#2所对应的发射波束与终端设备120通信,可以最大程度地规避服务于另一个终端设备的发射波束的(如参考信号资源标识#4对应的发射波束)干扰。The reference signal resource identifier # 1 or # 2 and the reference signal resource identifier # 4 belong to different measurement reports and correspond to different receiving beams of the current terminal device. Therefore, if the network device 110 selects the reference signal resource identifier # 1 or # 2, The transmission beam communicates with the terminal device 120, which can avoid the interference of the transmission beam serving another terminal device (such as the transmission beam corresponding to the reference signal resource identifier # 4) to the greatest extent.
然而,如果终端设备110未能够基于空间接收滤波器上报测量报告,仅上报参考信号资源标识以及相对应的参考信号接收功率,而网络设备110也就无法感知终端设备120所上报的参考信号资源上传输的参考信号是否基于同一个接收波束接收并测量的,或者说,网络设备110无法感知终端设备120所上报的参考信号资源所对应的参考信号是由终端设备120的一个接收波束接收的,还是由多个接收波束接收的。网络设备110可能无法获取更多的发射波束与接收波束的配对关系的信息,从而合理地进行波束管理。However, if the terminal device 110 cannot report the measurement report based on the spatial receiving filter, only the reference signal resource identifier and the corresponding reference signal received power are reported, and the network device 110 cannot sense the reference signal resource reported by the terminal device 120. Whether the transmitted reference signal is received and measured based on the same receiving beam, or is the network device 110 unable to sense whether the reference signal corresponding to the reference signal resource reported by the terminal device 120 is received by a receiving beam of the terminal device 120 or Received by multiple receive beams. The network device 110 may not be able to obtain more information about the pairing relationship between the transmitting beam and the receiving beam, so as to perform beam management reasonably.
例如,在一种可能的情况中,终端设备120可能仅基于一个接收波束(例如,记作接收波束#1)接收到的参考信号进行信道测量,并将测量结果上报给网络设备110。此后,网络设备110可以根据终端设备120所上报的参考信号资源的标识和参考信号接收功率,与终端设备120传输数据或信令。但是,若终端设备120经历一个小小的倾侧或旋转,就有可能导致接收波束#1接收信号的质量变差,而此前上报的参考信号资源的标识都是基于该接收波束#1测量而上报的。这也就意味着,网络设备110所配置的TCI状态列表实 际上都基于同一个终端设备120的接收波束#1,此时这张TCI状态列表实际上可以认为已全部失效。若仍基于这张TCI状态列表,网络设备110选择对应的发射波束发送信号,且终端设备120根据TCI选择接收波束#1接收信号,可能链路质量严重下降,并可能会导致系统频繁地进入波束失败恢复(beam failure recovery,BFR)流程。因此,接收波束的选择过分依赖终端设备120的实现,可能导致波束配对关系不鲁棒,不利于提高传输效率,用户体验不佳。For example, in a possible situation, the terminal device 120 may perform channel measurement based on a reference signal received by only one receiving beam (for example, described as receiving beam # 1), and report the measurement result to the network device 110. Thereafter, the network device 110 may transmit data or signaling with the terminal device 120 according to the identifier of the reference signal resource and the received power of the reference signal reported by the terminal device 120. However, if the terminal device 120 undergoes a small tilt or rotation, the quality of the received signal of the receiving beam # 1 may be deteriorated, and the identifiers of the previously reported reference signal resources are reported based on the measurement of the receiving beam # 1. of. This means that the TCI status list configured by the network device 110 is actually based on the receiving beam # 1 of the same terminal device 120. At this time, this TCI status list can be considered to be all invalid. If it is still based on this TCI status list, the network device 110 selects the corresponding transmit beam to send the signal, and the terminal device 120 selects the receive beam # 1 to receive the signal according to the TCI, which may seriously degrade the link quality and may cause the system to frequently enter the beam Failure recovery (beam failure recovery) process. Therefore, the selection of the receiving beam depends too much on the implementation of the terminal device 120, which may cause the beam pairing relationship to be not robust, which is not conducive to improving the transmission efficiency and the user experience is not good.
在另一种可能的情况中,终端设备120也可能基于多个接收波束(例如,记作接收波束#1和接收波束#2)接收到的参考信号进行信道测量,并将测量结果上报给网络设备110。此后,网络设备110可以根据终端设备120所上报的参考信号资源的标识和参考信号接收功率,与终端设备120传输数据或信令。但是,网络设备110并不知道终端设备所上报的测量结果是基于多个接收波束测量得到的。若在终端设备120经历一个小小的倾侧或旋转,可能导致当前使用的接收波束(例如接收波束#1)接收信号的质量变差,网络设备110并不知道应该切换成哪个发射波束来发送信号,有可能仍然需要通过波束失败恢复,导致此前保存的TCI列表全部失效。因此,即便终端设备120包括多个接收波束,但实质上并未能够将此前通过波束扫描上报的测量结果及附加的信息充分利用,未能够提高传输系统的鲁棒性,用户体验不佳。In another possible situation, the terminal device 120 may also perform channel measurement based on reference signals received by multiple receiving beams (for example, denoted as receiving beam # 1 and receiving beam # 2), and report the measurement results to the network. Device 110. Thereafter, the network device 110 may transmit data or signaling with the terminal device 120 according to the identifier of the reference signal resource and the received power of the reference signal reported by the terminal device 120. However, the network device 110 does not know that the measurement result reported by the terminal device is obtained based on multiple received beam measurements. If the terminal device 120 experiences a small tilt or rotation, the quality of the received signal may be deteriorated in the currently used receiving beam (for example, receiving beam # 1), and the network device 110 does not know which transmitting beam to switch to to send the signal. It may still be necessary to recover through beam failures, causing all previously saved TCI lists to be invalidated. Therefore, even if the terminal device 120 includes multiple receiving beams, the measurement results and additional information previously reported through beam scanning cannot be fully utilized, the robustness of the transmission system cannot be improved, and the user experience is poor.
在又一种可能的情况中,网络设备110可能在同一个OFDM符号上向同一终端设备120发送两路不同的信号,例如,PDCCH和PDSCH,由于终端设备120可能不具备同时使用两个不同接收波束接收两路信号的能力,因此网络设备110可能需要确保在同一个OFDM符号上出现的这两路信号具有相同的空间接收参数,即,终端设备120可以用同一个接收波束接收两路信号。但是,若终端设备120仅向网络设备110上报参考信号资源的标识,网络设备110并不知道终端设备120上报的多个参考信号资源对应的发射波束是否与终端设备的一个接收波束对应。此时,网络设备110只能选择同一个发射波束来发送所述PDCCH和PDSCH,方可确保终端设备120能够使用同一个接收波束来接收。然而,应理解,在高频通信系统中,PDCCH作为控制信号,可能适合使用半功率点波束宽度(half power band width,HPBW)较大的波束提升角度域的覆盖,增强鲁棒性,而PDSCH作为数据信号,可能适合使用HPBW较小的波束提升接收时的SNR或SINR,增强吞吐。因此如采用数据信道的发射波束同时发送PDCCH和PDSCH,可能造成PDCCH检测鲁棒性下降,如采用控制信道的发射波束同时发送PDCCH和PDSCH,可能造成PDSCH的误码上升,吞吐下降。In another possible situation, the network device 110 may send two different signals to the same terminal device 120 on the same OFDM symbol, for example, PDCCH and PDSCH. Since the terminal device 120 may not have two different receptions at the same time The ability of the beam to receive two signals, so the network device 110 may need to ensure that the two signals appearing on the same OFDM symbol have the same spatial receiving parameters, that is, the terminal device 120 can receive the two signals with the same receiving beam. However, if the terminal device 120 only reports the identifier of the reference signal resource to the network device 110, the network device 110 does not know whether the transmission beam corresponding to the multiple reference signal resources reported by the terminal device 120 corresponds to one reception beam of the terminal device. At this time, the network device 110 can only select the same transmit beam to send the PDCCH and the PDSCH, so as to ensure that the terminal device 120 can receive using the same receive beam. However, it should be understood that in a high-frequency communication system, the PDCCH as a control signal may be suitable for using a half-power spot beam width (HPBW) larger beam to increase coverage in the angular domain and enhance robustness, while PDSCH As a data signal, it may be suitable to use a smaller HPBW beam to improve the SNR or SINR during reception and enhance throughput. Therefore, if the PDCCH and PDSCH are transmitted simultaneously using the transmission beam of the data channel, the robustness of PDCCH detection may be reduced. If the PDCCH and PDSCH are simultaneously transmitted using the transmission beam of the control channel, the PDSCH error may increase and the throughput may decrease.
综上可以看到,如果网络设备110无法获知发射波束与接收波束之间的配对关系,就可能无法合理地进行波束管理,这不利于系统的鲁棒性,不利于提高系统性能。In summary, it can be seen that if the network device 110 cannot know the pairing relationship between the transmitting beam and the receiving beam, it may not be able to perform beam management reasonably, which is not conducive to the robustness of the system and is not conducive to improving the system performance.
而在本申请实施例中,由于终端设备120基于空间接收滤波器上报测量报告,每组测量报告都是基于同一个空间接收滤波器接收到的参考信号测量得到的。网络设备110可以感知更多的发射波束与接收波束的配对信息,从而可以更合理地进行波束管理,这可以更大程度地提高波束赋形增益;同时,也有利于提高系统的鲁棒性,有利于提高传输效率,有利于提高用户体验。从整体上来说,有利于提高系统性能。In the embodiment of the present application, since the terminal device 120 reports the measurement report based on the spatial receiving filter, each group of measurement reports is measured based on the reference signal received by the same spatial receiving filter. The network device 110 can perceive more pairing information of the transmitting beam and the receiving beam, so that the beam management can be performed more reasonably, which can increase the beamforming gain to a greater extent; at the same time, it is also beneficial to improve the robustness of the system It is conducive to improving transmission efficiency and improving user experience. On the whole, it helps to improve system performance.
下面将结合附图详细说明本申请提供的发送和接收CSI的方法和装置。The method and device for sending and receiving CSI provided in this application will be described in detail below with reference to the accompanying drawings.
应理解,本申请实施例中的信道测量或波束测量可以是基于相同带宽部分(bandwidth  part,BWP)或同一个载波(component carrier,CC),也可以是不同的BWP或CC,同理,本申请实施例所述的CSI上报可以对应相同的BSP或CC,也可以对应不同的BWP或CC,本申请对此不做限定。It should be understood that the channel measurement or beam measurement in the embodiments of the present application may be based on the same bandwidth part (BWP) or the same carrier (component carrier, CC), or may be different BWP or CC. Similarly, this The CSI report described in the embodiment of the application may correspond to the same BSP or CC, or may correspond to different BWP or CC, which is not limited in this application.
还应理解,在下文示出的实施例中,第一、第二仅为便于区分不同的对象,而不应对本申请构成任何限定。例如,区分不同的指示信息、不同的上报方式等It should also be understood that, in the embodiments shown below, the first and second are only for the convenience of distinguishing different objects, and should not constitute any limitation to the present application. For example, distinguish between different instructions, different reporting methods, etc.
还应理解,在下文示出的实施例中,涉及的“时间”的单位例如可以为时隙(slot)或正交频分复用(orthogonal frequency division multiplexing)符号,也可以为秒、毫秒或微秒等。本申请对此不做限定。It should also be understood that, in the embodiments shown below, the unit of "time" involved may be, for example, a slot or orthogonal frequency division multiplexing symbol, or may be seconds, milliseconds, or Microseconds, etc. This application does not limit this.
还应理解,在下文示出的实施例中,“预先获取”可包括由网络设备信令指示或者预先定义,例如,协议定义。其中,“预先定义”可以通过在设备(例如,包括终端设备和网络设备)中预先保存相应的代码、表格或其他可用于指示相关信息的方式来实现,本申请对于其具体的实现方式不做限定。It should also be understood that in the embodiments shown below, "pre-acquisition" may include indication or pre-definition by network device signaling, for example, protocol definition. Among them, "pre-defined" can be achieved by pre-saving corresponding codes, tables, or other methods that can be used to indicate related information in devices (for example, including terminal devices and network devices), and this application does not make specific implementations thereof. limited.
还应理解,本申请实施例中涉及的“保存”,可以是指的保存在一个或者多个存储器中。所述一个或者多个存储器,可以是单独的设置,也可以是集成在编码器或者译码器,处理器、或通信装置中。所述一个或者多个存储器,也可以是一部分单独设置,一部分集成在译码器、处理器、或通信装置中。存储器的类型可以是任意形式的存储介质,本申请并不对此限定。It should also be understood that "save" involved in the embodiments of the present application may refer to saving in one or more memories. The one or more memories may be provided separately or integrated in an encoder or a decoder, a processor, or a communication device. The one or more memories may also be partly provided separately and partly integrated in a decoder, a processor, or a communication device. The type of the memory may be any form of storage medium, which is not limited in this application.
还应理解,本申请实施例中的“协议”可以是指通信领域的标准协议,例如可以包括LTE协议、NR协议以及应用于未来的通信系统中的相关协议,本申请对此不做限定。It should also be understood that the “protocol” in the embodiment of the present application may refer to a standard protocol in the communication field, for example, may include an LTE protocol, an NR protocol, and a related protocol applied in a future communication system, which is not limited in this application.
还应理解,“和/或”,描述关联对象的关联关系,表示可以存在三种关系,例如,A和/或B,可以表示:单独存在A,同时存在A和B,单独存在B这三种情况。字符“/”一般表示前后关联对象是一种“或”的关系。“至少一个”是指一个或一个以上;“A和B中的至少一个”,类似于“A和/或B”,描述关联对象的关联关系,表示可以存在三种关系,例如,A和B中的至少一个,可以表示:单独存在A,同时存在A和B,单独存在B这三种情况。It should also be understood that "and / or", which describes the association relationship of the associated objects, means that there can be three kinds of relationships, for example, A and / or B can mean: there are A alone, A and B, and B alone. Situation. The character "/" generally indicates that the related objects are an "or" relationship. "At least one" means one or more than one; "at least one of A and B", similar to "A and / or B", describes the association relationship of the associated objects, indicating that there can be three kinds of relationships, for example, A and B At least one of them may indicate that there are three cases in which A is present alone, A and B are present, and B is present alone.
本申请的技术方案可以应用于无线通信系统中,例如,图1中所示的通信系统100。处于无线通信系统中的两个通信装置之间可具有无线通信连接关系,该两个通信装置中的一个通信装置可对应于图1中所示的终端设备120,如,可以为图1中所示的终端设备,也可以为配置于终端设备中的芯片;该两个通信装置中的另一个通信装置可对应于图1中所示的网络设备110,如,可以为图1中所示的网络设备,也可以为配置于网络设备中的芯片。The technical solution of the present application can be applied to a wireless communication system, for example, the communication system 100 shown in FIG. 1. There may be a wireless communication connection relationship between two communication devices in a wireless communication system, and one communication device of the two communication devices may correspond to the terminal device 120 shown in FIG. 1, for example, it may be as shown in FIG. 1. The terminal device shown may also be a chip configured in the terminal device; the other communication device of the two communication devices may correspond to the network device 110 shown in FIG. 1, for example, it may be the device shown in FIG. 1. The network device may also be a chip configured in the network device.
以下,不失一般性,以一个终端设备与网络设备之间的交互过程为例详细说明本申请实施例。可以理解,处于无线通信系统中的任意一个终端设备或者配置于终端设备中的芯片均可以基于相同的方法接收参考信号并上报CSI,处于无线通信系统中的任意一个网络设备或者配置于网络设备中的芯片均可以基于相同的方法发送参考信号并接收CSI。本申请对此不做限定。In the following, without loss of generality, an embodiment of the present application will be described in detail by taking an interaction process between a terminal device and a network device as an example. It can be understood that any terminal device in the wireless communication system or a chip configured in the terminal device can receive the reference signal and report the CSI based on the same method. Any network device in the wireless communication system or configured in the network device All chips can send reference signals and receive CSI based on the same method. This application does not limit this.
图2是从设备交互的角度示出的发送和接收CSI的方法200的示意性流程图。如图所示,图2中示出的方法200可以包括步骤210至步骤290。下面结合图2对方法200进行详细说明。FIG. 2 is a schematic flowchart of a method 200 for sending and receiving CSI, which is shown from the perspective of device interaction. As shown, the method 200 shown in FIG. 2 may include steps 210 to 290. The method 200 is described in detail below with reference to FIG. 2.
在步骤210中,终端设备生成一个或多个CSI,每个CSI包括一组或多组测量报告,每组测量报告基于一个空间接收滤波器接收到的参考信号测量得到,且在测量报告的总组数为多组的情况下,各组测量报告所对应的空间接收滤波器彼此各不相同。In step 210, the terminal device generates one or more CSIs. Each CSI includes one or more sets of measurement reports. Each set of measurement reports is measured based on a reference signal received by a spatial receiving filter. When there are multiple groups, the spatial receiving filters corresponding to the measurement reports of each group are different from each other.
在步骤220中,终端设备发送该一个或多个CSI。In step 220, the terminal device sends the one or more CSIs.
相应地,在步骤220中,网络设备接收该一个或多个CSI。Accordingly, in step 220, the network device receives the one or more CSIs.
在步骤230中,网络设备根据该一个或多个CSI,确定各组测量报告所对应的空间接收滤波器彼此各不相同。In step 230, the network device determines, according to the one or more CSIs, that the spatial receiving filters corresponding to each set of measurement reports are different from each other.
也就是说,终端设备可以根据每一个空间接收滤波器接收到的参考信号进行测量,并将基于每个空间接收滤波器测量得到的结果通过测量报告的形式上报给网络设备。其中,每组测量报告可对应一个空间接收滤波器,或者说,每组测量报告可对应一个接收波束。在上报的测量报告的总组数为多组的情况下,多组测量报告与多个空间接收滤波器一一对应,或者说,多组测量报告与多个接收波束一一对应。当网络设备接收到上述一个或多个CSI时,便可以确定每组测量报告所对应的空间接收滤波器彼此各不相同。基于测量报告与空间接收滤波器的一一对应关系,网络设备也就可以感知每组测量报告所对应(例如可以包括或者预先约定)的参考信号资源与空间接收滤波器的对应关系,因此,网络设备可以感知哪几个发射波束对应于同一个接收波束。That is, the terminal device can perform measurement according to the reference signal received by each spatial receiving filter, and report the result obtained based on the measurement of each spatial receiving filter to the network device in the form of a measurement report. Each group of measurement reports may correspond to a spatial receiving filter, or each group of measurement reports may correspond to a receiving beam. In the case where the total number of reported measurement reports is multiple, the multiple measurement reports correspond one-to-one with multiple spatial reception filters, or in other words, the multiple measurement reports correspond one-to-one with multiple receive beams. When the network device receives the one or more CSIs described above, it can be determined that the spatial receiving filters corresponding to each set of measurement reports are different from each other. Based on the one-to-one correspondence between the measurement report and the spatial receiving filter, the network device can perceive the correspondence between the reference signal resources corresponding to each group of measurement reports (for example, can include or be pre-appointed) and the spatial receiving filter. The device can sense which several transmit beams correspond to the same receive beam.
为便于理解本实施例,在详细说明上述步骤210至步骤230之前,首先简单说明终端设备接收参考信号的具体过程。In order to facilitate understanding of this embodiment, before describing the foregoing steps 210 to 230 in detail, first, a specific process of receiving a reference signal by a terminal device is briefly described.
可选地,在步骤210之前,该方法200还包括步骤240:网络设备发送参考信号,该参考信号用于信道测量。Optionally, before step 210, the method 200 further includes step 240: the network device sends a reference signal, and the reference signal is used for channel measurement.
相应地,在步骤240中,终端设备接收参考信号,该参考信号用于信道测量。Accordingly, in step 240, the terminal device receives a reference signal, which is used for channel measurement.
如前所述,在下行信道测量中,该参考信号可以为CSI-RS,也可以为SSB,本申请对此不做限定。As mentioned above, in the downlink channel measurement, the reference signal may be a CSI-RS or an SSB, which is not limited in this application.
如前所述,网络设备可预先通过高层信令向终端设备发送参考信号的资源配置信息,如上文所列举的CSI资源配置以及SSB的资源配置信息。终端设备可以根据网络设备发送的参考信号的资源配置信息确定参考信号资源。因此,终端设备可以基于参考信号资源接收参考信号。As mentioned above, the network device may send the resource configuration information of the reference signal to the terminal device in advance through high-level signaling, such as the CSI resource configuration and SSB resource configuration information listed above. The terminal device may determine the reference signal resource according to the resource configuration information of the reference signal sent by the network device. Therefore, the terminal device can receive the reference signal based on the reference signal resource.
在本申请实施例中,信道测量可以理解为波束测量。网络设备可通过波束扫描的方式发送参考信号,终端设备也可以通过波束扫描的方式接收参考信号。In the embodiment of the present application, the channel measurement may be understood as a beam measurement. The network device can send the reference signal by means of beam scanning, and the terminal device can also receive the reference signal by means of beam scanning.
具体地,网络设备通过不同的发射波束发送的参考信号可以关联不同的参考信号资源,终端设备通过不同的接收波束接收的参考信号也可以关联不同的参考信号资源。因此,通过参考信号资源的标识,便可以区分不同的发射波束或接收波束。Specifically, the reference signals sent by the network device through different transmit beams may be associated with different reference signal resources, and the reference signals received by the terminal device through different receive beams may also be associated with different reference signal resources. Therefore, by referring to the identification of the signal resource, different transmit beams or receive beams can be distinguished.
举例而言,假设网络设备包括6个发射波束,例如可分别记为波束#1至#6。终端设备包括1个接收波束。若网络设备为终端设备配置了6个参考信号资源,资源标识例如可分别为#1至#6。为便于与上述波束区分,可将该6个参考信号资源分别记为资源#1至#6。网络设备可以基于资源#1至#6向终端设备发送参考信号,则该6个参考信号资源与6个发射波束一一对应,网络设备可以基于每个参考信号资源和对应的发射波束发送一个或多个参考信号。例如,网络设备可基于资源#1通过波束#1发送一个或多个参考信号;网络设备可基于资源#2通过波束#2发送一个或多个参考信号;以此类推,这里不再一一列举。For example, it is assumed that the network device includes 6 transmitting beams, which may be recorded as beams # 1 to # 6, respectively. The terminal equipment includes a receiving beam. If the network device is configured with 6 reference signal resources for the terminal device, the resource identifiers may be # 1 to # 6, respectively. In order to facilitate distinguishing from the foregoing beams, the six reference signal resources may be recorded as resources # 1 to # 6, respectively. The network device can send a reference signal to the terminal device based on the resources # 1 to # 6, then the 6 reference signal resources correspond to the 6 transmission beams one by one, and the network device can send one or Multiple reference signals. For example, the network device may send one or more reference signals through the beam # 1 based on the resource # 1; the network device may send one or more reference signals through the beam # 2 based on the resource # 2; and so on, no longer enumerated here .
若网络设备为终端设备配置了24个参考信号资源,资源标识例如可分别为资源#1至#24。为便于与上述波束区分,可将该24个参考信号资源分别记为资源#1至#24。网络设备可以通过资源#1至#24向终端设备发送参考信号,则该24个参考信号资源中的每6个参考信号资源与该6个发射波束一一对应,网络设备可以循环使用该6个发射波束基于该24个参考信号资源发送参考信号。例如,网络设备可基于资源#1通过波束#1发送一个或多个参考信号,基于资源#2通过波束#2发送一个或多个参考信号,以此类推,直至该网络设备基于资源#6通过波束#6发送一个或多个参考信号;此后,该网络设备可基于资源#7通过波束#1发送一个或多个参考信号,基于资源#8通过波束#2发送一个或多个参考信号,以此类推,直至该网络设备基于资源#12通过波束#6发送一个或多个参考信号;此后,该网络设备可基于资源#13通过波束#1发送一个或多个参考信号,基于资源#14通过波束#2发送一个或多个参考信号,以此类推,直至该网络设备基于资源#18通过波束#6发送一个或多个参考信号;此后,该网络设备可基于资源#19通过波束#1发送一个或多个参考信号;基于资源#20通过波束#2发送一个或多个参考信号,以此类推,直至该网络设备基于资源#24通过波束#6发送一个或多个参考信号。If the network device configures 24 reference signal resources for the terminal device, the resource identifiers may be resources # 1 to # 24, respectively. In order to facilitate distinguishing from the foregoing beams, the 24 reference signal resources may be recorded as resources # 1 to # 24, respectively. The network device can send the reference signal to the terminal device through the resources # 1 to # 24, then every 6 reference signal resources of the 24 reference signal resources correspond to the 6 transmitting beams one by one, and the network device can recycle the 6 The transmit beam transmits a reference signal based on the 24 reference signal resources. For example, the network device may send one or more reference signals through beam # 1 based on resource # 1, and one or more reference signals through beam # 2 based on resource # 2, and so on, until the network device passes based on resource # 6. Beam # 6 sends one or more reference signals; thereafter, the network device may send one or more reference signals through beam # 1 based on resource # 7, and one or more reference signals through beam # 2 based on resource # 8. By analogy, until the network device sends one or more reference signals through beam # 6 based on resource # 12; thereafter, the network device can send one or more reference signals through beam # 1 based on resource # 13, and pass through based on resource # 14. Beam # 2 sends one or more reference signals, and so on, until the network device sends one or more reference signals through beam # 6 based on resource # 18; thereafter, the network device can send through beam # 1 based on resource # 19. One or more reference signals; send one or more reference signals through beam # 2 based on resource # 20, and so on, until the network device sends one through beam # 6 based on resource # 24 Or multiple reference signals.
由于终端设备仅包括一个接收波束,则终端设备可通过该接收波束依次基于不同的参考信号资源接收网络设备不同的发射波束发送的参考信号。Because the terminal device includes only one receiving beam, the terminal device can sequentially receive the reference signals sent by different transmitting beams of the network device based on different reference signal resources through the receiving beam.
又例如,假设网络设备包括6个发射波束,例如可分别记作发射波束#1至#6,终端设备包括2个接收波束,例如可分别记作接收波束#1和#2。若网络设备为终端设备配置了6个参考信号资源,资源标识例如可分别为#1至#6。为了便于与上述波束区分,可将该6个参考信号资源分别记作资源#1至#6。网络设备可以基于资源#1至#6向终端设备发送参考信号,则该6个参考信号资源与6个发射波束一一对应,网络设备可以基于每个参考信号资源和对应的发射波束发送一个或多个参考信号。由于终端设备包括2个接收波束,终端设备可以先使用其中的一个接收波束基于该6个参考信号资源接收参考信号,然后使用另一个接收波束基于该6个参考信号资源接收参考信号。因此,网络设备可以重复两次通过该6个发射波束发射基于该6个参考信号资源的参考信号,以便于终端设备的2个接收波束都能够基于该6个参考信号资源接收参考信号以进行测量。例如,网络设备可基于资源#1通过发射波束#1发送一个或多个参考信号,终端设备可基于资源#1通过接收波束#1接收该一个或多个参考信号;网络设备可基于资源#2通过发射波束#2发送一个或多个参考信号,终端设备可基于资源#2通过接收波束#1接收该一个或多个参考信号;以此类推,直至网络设备基于资源#6通过发射波束#6发送一个或多个参考信号,终端设备基于资源#6通过接收波束#1接收该一个或多个参考信号。此后,网络设备可再依次基于资源#1至#6通过发射波束#1至#6发送参考信号,终端设备可依次基于资源#1至#6通过接收波束#2接收参考信号。As another example, it is assumed that the network device includes 6 transmitting beams, for example, which can be referred to as transmitting beams # 1 to # 6, and the terminal device includes 2 receiving beams, which can be referred to as receiving beams # 1 and # 2, respectively. If the network device is configured with 6 reference signal resources for the terminal device, the resource identifiers may be # 1 to # 6, respectively. In order to facilitate differentiation from the foregoing beams, the six reference signal resources may be recorded as resources # 1 to # 6, respectively. The network device can send a reference signal to the terminal device based on the resources # 1 to # 6, then the 6 reference signal resources correspond to the 6 transmission beams one by one, and the network device can send one or Multiple reference signals. Since the terminal device includes two receiving beams, the terminal device may first use one of the receiving beams to receive the reference signal based on the 6 reference signal resources, and then use the other receiving beam to receive the reference signal based on the 6 reference signal resources. Therefore, the network device can repeatedly transmit the reference signal based on the 6 reference signal resources through the 6 transmit beams, so that the 2 receive beams of the terminal device can receive the reference signal for measurement based on the 6 reference signal resources. . For example, the network device may send one or more reference signals through the transmitting beam # 1 based on the resource # 1, and the terminal device may receive the one or more reference signals through the receiving beam # 1 based on the resource # 1; Sending one or more reference signals through transmit beam # 2, the terminal device may receive the one or more reference signals through receive beam # 1 based on resource # 2; and so on, until the network device passes transmit beam # 6 based on resource # 6 Send one or more reference signals, and the terminal device receives the one or more reference signals through the receiving beam # 1 based on the resource # 6. Thereafter, the network device may send the reference signals through the transmitting beams # 1 to # 6 based on the resources # 1 to # 6 in turn, and the terminal device may receive the reference signals through the receiving beam # 2 based on the resources # 1 to # 6 in turn.
综上可以看到,终端设备可以固定某一接收波束,对网络设备的发射波束轮询,使用不同的发射波束发送参考信号,终端设备使用上述固定的接收波束来接收网络设备不同发射波束发送的参考信号,以进行信道测量。此后,终端设备可以切换至另一接收波束,重复执行上述步骤。网络设备可以固定某一发射波束,终端设备使用不同的接收波束接收来自网络设备同一发射波束的参考信号,终端设备可根据不同接收波束接收到的参考信号进行信道测量。此后,网络设备可以切换至另一发射波束,重复执行上述步骤。In summary, it can be seen that the terminal device can fix a certain receiving beam, poll the network device's transmitting beam, and use different transmitting beams to send reference signals. The terminal device uses the above-mentioned fixed receiving beam to receive the different transmitting beams sent by the network device. Reference signal for channel measurement. After that, the terminal device can switch to another receiving beam and repeat the above steps. Network equipment can fix a certain transmission beam. Terminal equipment uses different reception beams to receive reference signals from the same transmission beam of network equipment. Terminal equipment can perform channel measurement based on the reference signals received by different reception beams. After that, the network device can switch to another transmit beam and repeat the above steps.
应理解,上文中仅为便于理解,示出了用于波束扫描的两种可能的实现方式,但这不应对本申请构成任何限定,本申请对于波束扫描的具体实现方式不做限定。还应理解,上文仅为便于理解,示出了多个波束的标识与多个参考信号资源的标识之间的对应关系,但这不应对本申请构成任何限定,本申请对于波束与参考信号资源之间的对应关系不做限定。It should be understood that the foregoing only shows two possible implementation manners for beam scanning, but this should not constitute any limitation on this application, and the application does not limit the specific implementation manner of beam scanning. It should also be understood that the foregoing is only for easy understanding, and shows the correspondence between the identifiers of multiple beams and the identifiers of multiple reference signal resources, but this should not constitute any limitation on this application. The correspondence between resources is not limited.
需要说明的是,终端设备所包括的接收波束的数量可以大于或等于通过CSI上报的测量报告的总组数。例如,终端设备可以包括4个接收波束,但可以仅上报2组测量报告。后文中会详细说明终端设备的接收波束与上报的测量报告的组数之间的关系,这里暂且省略对该内容的详细说明。It should be noted that the number of receiving beams included in the terminal device may be greater than or equal to the total number of groups of measurement reports reported through CSI. For example, the terminal device may include 4 receiving beams, but may only report 2 sets of measurement reports. The relationship between the receiving beam of the terminal device and the number of groups of reported measurement reports will be described in detail later, and a detailed description of this content is omitted for now.
具体地,在步骤210和220中,终端设备可以通过以下任意一种方式生成并向网络设备上报测量报告:Specifically, in steps 210 and 220, the terminal device may generate and report a measurement report to the network device in any of the following ways:
方式一、上报一个CSI,该CSI中包括一组测量报告;或者Method 1: Report a CSI, where the CSI includes a set of measurement reports; or
方式二、上报一个CSI,该CSI中包括多组测量报告;或者Method 2: Report a CSI, which includes multiple sets of measurement reports; or
方式三、上报多个CSI,每个CSI包括一组测量报告;或者Method 3: Report multiple CSI, each CSI includes a set of measurement reports; or
方式四、上报多个CSI,每个CSI包括多组测量报告。Manner 4: Report multiple CSIs. Each CSI includes multiple sets of measurement reports.
换句话说,终端设备可以向网络设备上报一组测量报告,也可以向网络设备上报多组测量报告。若终端设备向网络设备上报多组测量报告,则该多组测量报告可以承载在一个CSI中,也可以承载在多个CSI中。当协议默认采用上述中的某一种方式上报测量报告时,终端设备可以基于相应的方式生成并发送CSI。In other words, the terminal device can report a group of measurement reports to the network device, and can also report multiple groups of measurement reports to the network device. If the terminal device reports multiple sets of measurement reports to the network device, the multiple sets of measurement reports may be carried in one CSI or multiple CSIs. When the protocol reports the measurement report by any one of the above methods by default, the terminal device may generate and send the CSI based on the corresponding method.
在终端设备上报多组测量报告的情况下,各组测量报告所对应的空间接收滤波器(或者说,接收波束)彼此各不相同。即,该终端设备上报的多组测量报告中,任意两组测量报告所对应的空间接收滤波器不同。When multiple sets of measurement reports are reported by the terminal device, the spatial receiving filters (or, in other words, the receiving beams) corresponding to the respective sets of measurement reports are different from each other. That is, among the multiple sets of measurement reports reported by the terminal device, the spatial receiving filters corresponding to any two sets of measurement reports are different.
在一种实施方式中,所述多个CSI基于同一个CSI上报配置。In one embodiment, the multiple CSIs are configured based on a same CSI report.
在另一种实施方式中,所述多个CSI基于多个CSI上报配置。此时,该多个CSI上报配置具有相同的时域行为参数。例如,基于多个CSI上报配置的所述多个CSI可以均为周期性上报、半持续性上报或非周期性上报。In another embodiment, the multiple CSIs are configured based on multiple CSI reports. At this time, the multiple CSI reporting configurations have the same time domain behavior parameters. For example, the multiple CSIs configured based on multiple CSI reports may all be periodic reports, semi-persistent reports, or aperiodic reports.
进一步地,终端设备可以基于以下至少一项参数生成并发送一个或多个CSI:Further, the terminal device may generate and send one or more CSIs based on at least one of the following parameters:
参数1:每个CSI上报的测量报告的组数M,M为正整数;Parameter 1: The number M of measurement reports reported by each CSI, where M is a positive integer;
参数2:通过多个CSI上报的测量报告的总组数Q,Q为正整数;以及Parameter 2: the total number of groups Q of measurement reports reported by multiple CSI, where Q is a positive integer; and
参数3:通过多个CSI上报测量报告时CSI的个数N,N为正整数。Parameter 3: The number of CSI N when reporting measurement reports through multiple CSIs, where N is a positive integer.
下面结合上文列举的发送CSI的四种方法详细说明终端设备发送CSI所基于的参数。The following describes in detail the parameters on which the terminal device sends CSI based on the four methods for sending CSI listed above.
当终端设备采用方式一或方式二生成并发送CSI时,终端设备可以仅基于参数1生成并发送CSI。此时,协议默认每一次CSI上报均是独立的,则,一次CSI上报中包括至少一组测量报告,不同组的测量报告对应终端设备不同的空间接收滤波器,参数M是终端设备一次CSI中允许上报的测量报告的数量。When the terminal device generates and sends the CSI in the first or second manner, the terminal device may generate and send the CSI based on only the parameter 1. At this time, the protocol defaults that each CSI report is independent. Then, one CSI report includes at least one set of measurement reports, and different sets of measurement reports correspond to different spatial reception filters of the terminal device. The parameter M is the terminal device's primary CSI. Number of measurement reports allowed to be reported.
当终端设备采用方式三生成并发送CSI时,终端设备可以基于参数2或参数3生成并发送CSI。此时,协议默认每个CSI只能包含一组测量报告,则,参数Q和参数N是等价的,且均对应终端设备不同的空间接收滤波器,终端设备仅基于参数2或参数3中任意一个即可确定通过多次CSI允许上报的测量报告的数量。When the terminal device generates and sends the CSI in the third manner, the terminal device may generate and send the CSI based on the parameter 2 or the parameter 3. At this time, the protocol defaults that each CSI can only include a set of measurement reports. Then, the parameters Q and N are equivalent and both correspond to different spatial receiving filters of the terminal device. The terminal device is only based on parameter 2 or parameter 3. Either one can determine the number of measurement reports allowed to be reported through multiple CSIs.
当终端设备采用方式四生成并发送CSI时,终端设备可以基于参数1至参数3中的任意两项生成并发送CSI。换言之,由于参数1至参数3满足如下关系式:Q=M*N,则通过M、Q和N中任意两项即可推算出第三项。此时,参数Q对应终端设备不同的空间接收滤波器,终端设备根据参数Q可确定通过多次CSI允许上报的测量报告的数量,通过参数M确定每次CSI允许上报的测量报告的数量,通过参数N确定共计需要的CSI次数。When the terminal device generates and sends the CSI by using the fourth method, the terminal device may generate and send the CSI based on any two items of parameters 1 to 3. In other words, since parameters 1 to 3 satisfy the following relationship: Q = M * N, the third term can be derived from any two of M, Q, and N. At this time, parameter Q corresponds to different spatial receiving filters of the terminal device. According to parameter Q, the terminal device can determine the number of measurement reports allowed to be reported through multiple CSIs, and parameter M to determine the number of measurement reports allowed to be reported per CSI. The parameter N determines the total number of CSI required.
需要说明的是,当CSI的个数为1时,每个CSI包括的测量报告的组数M与通过多个CSI上报的测量报告的总组数Q可以是相等的。同理,当每个CSI包括的测量报告数量为1时,通过多个CSI上报的测量报告的总组数Q和CSI的个数N也可以是相等的。It should be noted that when the number of CSIs is 1, the number of groups M of measurement reports included in each CSI and the total number Q of measurement reports reported by multiple CSIs may be equal. Similarly, when the number of measurement reports included in each CSI is 1, the total number Q of measurement reports and the number N of CSIs reported through multiple CSIs may also be equal.
具体地,参数二和参数三所涉及的“通过多个CSI上报测量报告”指的是,终端设备基于不同空间接收滤波器进行信道测量时,在一次CSI发送无法包含全部待上报的测量报告的情况下,需要通过多次CSI发送。因此,参数二和参数三种所涉及的“多个CSI”的个数可以是指CSI的发送次数。Specifically, the “reporting measurement reports through multiple CSIs” involved in parameters two and three refers to that when a terminal device performs channel measurement based on different spatial reception filters, a single CSI transmission cannot include all the measurements to be reported. In the case of a report, it needs to be sent through multiple CSIs. Therefore, the number of “multiple CSIs” involved in parameter two and parameter three may refer to the number of times of CSI transmission.
其中,所述全部待上报的测量报告的组数可以对应终端设备在波束训练中所使用的互不重复的空间接收滤波器的数量。例如,假设终端设备在波束训练中使用4个空间接收滤波器,因此通过信道测量可以获得共计4组测量报告,即全部待上报的测量报告共计4组,若一次CSI发送只能上报2组测量报告,此时,便需要通过2次CSI发送才能将所述4组测量报告发送给网络设备。此时,Q=4,M=2,N=2。The number of groups of all the measurement reports to be reported may correspond to the number of mutually exclusive spatial receiving filters used by the terminal device in beam training. For example, assuming that the terminal device uses 4 spatial receiving filters in beam training, a total of 4 sets of measurement reports can be obtained through channel measurement, that is, a total of 4 sets of measurement reports to be reported, and only 2 sets of measurements can be reported in one CSI transmission. At this time, it is necessary to send the 4 sets of measurement reports to the network device through 2 CSI transmissions. At this time, Q = 4, M = 2, and N = 2.
需要说明的是,终端设备在波束训练中所使用的空间接收滤波器的数量并不一定为终端设备中空间接收滤波器的数量,例如,终端设备可以包括8个空间接收滤波器,但在波束训练中可能仅使用4个空间接收滤波器。可以理解,终端设备在波束训练中所使用的空间接收滤波器的数量可以小于或等于终端设备中空间接收滤波器的数量。It should be noted that the number of spatial receiving filters used by the terminal device in the beam training is not necessarily the number of spatial receiving filters in the terminal device. For example, the terminal device may include eight spatial receiving filters, but It is possible to use only four spatial receive filters in training. It can be understood that the number of spatial receiving filters used by the terminal device in the beam training may be less than or equal to the number of spatial receiving filters in the terminal device.
以下,为了简洁,在未作出特别说明的情况下,参数二和参数三中所涉及的“多个CSI”可参考上文的定义,后文中不再赘述。In the following, for the sake of brevity, the “multiple CSIs” involved in parameter two and parameter three can be referred to the above definitions without special description, and will not be described in detail later.
在本申请实施例中,上述参数M、Q和N可以是预定义的,如协议定义;也可以是由网络设备确定并指示终端设备的;还可以将上述两种方式结合。本申请对此不做限定。In the embodiment of the present application, the above-mentioned parameters M, Q, and N may be predefined, such as a protocol definition; or may be determined by a network device and instruct the terminal device; the above two methods may also be combined. This application does not limit this.
应理解,上文结合四种不同的上报方式详细说明了参数M、Q和N之间的关系,为了简洁,后文中在涉及参数M、Q或N,不再重复说明M、Q和N之间的关系。It should be understood that the relationship between the parameters M, Q, and N has been described in detail in combination with four different reporting methods above. For the sake of brevity, the parameters M, Q, or N are referred to in the following, and the description of M, Q, and N will not be repeated. Relationship.
举例而言,若终端设备采用上述方式一或方式二发送CSI,则参数M可以是预先定义的,也可以是网络设备通过信令指示给终端设备的;若终端设备采用上述方式三发送CSI,则参数Q或N可以是预先定义的,也可以是网络设备通过信令指示给终端设备的;若终端设备采用上述方式四发送CSI时,则参数M、Q和N中的任意两项都可以是预先定义的,也可以是都是网络设备通过信令指示给终端设备的,或者也可以预先定义其中的一个参数,由网络设备通过信令指示另一个参数,例如,将参数N预先定义,网络设备通过信令指示M或Q。For example, if the terminal device sends the CSI by using the above method 1 or method 2, the parameter M may be predefined or may be instructed by the network device to the terminal device through signaling. If the terminal device sends the CSI by using the method 3 above, The parameter Q or N may be predefined or may be indicated by the network device to the terminal device through signaling. If the terminal device sends the CSI in the above manner, any two of the parameters M, Q, and N may be It is predefined, or it may be indicated by the network device to the terminal device through signaling, or one of the parameters may be defined in advance, and the network device indicates another parameter through signaling. For example, the parameter N is predefined, The network device indicates M or Q through signaling.
若上述参数M、Q和N由网络设备指示给终端设备,则在步骤210之前,可选地,该方法200还包括:步骤250,网络设备发送第二指示信息,该第二指示信息用于指示上述M、Q和N中的一项或多项。If the parameters M, Q, and N are indicated to the terminal device by the network device, before step 210, optionally, the method 200 further includes: step 250, the network device sends second instruction information, where the second instruction information is used for Indicate one or more of the above-mentioned M, Q, and N.
相应地,在步骤250中,终端设备接收上述第二指示信息,该第二指示信息用于指示上述M、Q和N中的一项或多项。Accordingly, in step 250, the terminal device receives the foregoing second instruction information, where the second instruction information is used to indicate one or more of M, Q, and N.
更进一步地,当上述参数由网络设备确定时,网络设备可以根据终端设备上报的能力信息确定。可选地,在步骤250之前,该方法200还包括:步骤260,终端设备发送能力信息,该能力信息包括以下一项或多项参数:Furthermore, when the above parameters are determined by the network device, the network device may be determined according to the capability information reported by the terminal device. Optionally, before step 250, the method 200 further includes: step 260, the terminal device sends capability information, where the capability information includes one or more of the following parameters:
参数i:空间接收滤波器的数量,或者称,接收波束的数量;Parameter i: the number of spatial receiving filters, or the number of receiving beams;
参数ii:每个CSI上报的测量报告的最大组数;Parameter ii: the maximum number of measurement reports reported by each CSI;
参数iii:通过多个CSI上报的测量报告的总组数的最大值;以及Parameter iii: the maximum number of total groups of measurement reports reported by multiple CSIs; and
参数iv:通过多个CSI上报测量报告时CSI的最大个数。Parameter iv: The maximum number of CSI when reporting measurement reports through multiple CSIs.
相应地,在步骤260中,网络设备接收上述能力信息。Accordingly, in step 260, the network device receives the above capability information.
其中,参数ii、参数iii和参数iv可以由参数i决定,即,空间接收滤波器的数量决定了上报的测量报告的总组数Q。例如,空间接收滤波器的数量为P(P>0且为整数),即,终端设备可以上报的测量报告的总组数可以为小于或等于P的整数。也就是说,上述通过多个CSI上报的测量报告的总组数Q可满足:Q≤P。Among them, the parameter ii, the parameter iii, and the parameter iv may be determined by the parameter i, that is, the number of the spatial receiving filters determines the total number Q of the measurement reports reported. For example, the number of spatial receiving filters is P (P> 0 and an integer), that is, the total number of measurement reports that a terminal device can report may be an integer less than or equal to P. That is, the total number of groups Q of the measurement reports reported through multiple CSIs can satisfy: Q ≦ P.
在一种可能的实现方式中,当终端设备通过能力信息向网络设备上报参数i(即,P)的情况下,参数iii默认等于P,此时,终端设备无需再通过能力信息上报参数iii;反之亦然。换句话说,终端设备可以通过上述能力信息向网络设备上报参数i和参数iii中的任意一项。In a possible implementation manner, when the terminal device reports the parameter i (that is, P) to the network device through the capability information, the parameter iii is equal to P by default. At this time, the terminal device does not need to report the parameter iii through the capability information; vice versa. In other words, the terminal device may report any one of the parameter i and the parameter iii to the network device through the above capability information.
与此相对应地,上述参数1每个CSI上报的测量报告的组数M可以小于或等于参数ii每个CSI上报的测量报告的最大组数;上述参数2通过多个CSI上报的测量报告的总组数Q可以小于或等于参数iii通过多个CSI上报的测量报告的总组数的最大值;上述参数3多个CSI的个数N可以小于或等于参数iv上报的CSI的最大个数。Correspondingly, the number of groups M of measurement reports reported by each CSI in parameter 1 above may be less than or equal to the maximum number of groups of measurement reports reported by each CSI in parameter ii; The total number of groups Q may be less than or equal to the maximum value of the total number of groups reported through measurement reported by multiple CSIs in parameter iii; the number N of multiple CSIs in parameter 3 above may be less than or equal to the maximum number of CSIs reported in parameter iv.
具体地,当终端设备采用上述方式一或方式二发送CSI时,终端设备向网络设备发送的能力信息可包括上述参数i或参数ii;当终端设备采用上述方式三发送CSI时,终端设备向网络设备发送的能力信息可包括上述参数i、参数iii或参数iv;当终端设备采用上述方式四发送CSI时,终端设备向网络设备发送的能力信息可包括上述参数ii、参数iii和参数iv中的任意两项,或者,该能力信息也可以包括上述参数i、参数ii和参数iv中的任意两项。Specifically, when the terminal device sends the CSI by using the first or second method, the capability information sent by the terminal device to the network device may include the foregoing parameter i or parameter ii. When the terminal device sends the CSI by using the third method, the terminal device sends the CSI to the network. The capability information sent by the device may include the above-mentioned parameter i, parameter iii, or parameter iv; when the terminal device sends the CSI by using the above method 4, the capability information sent by the terminal device to the network device may include the parameters ii, iii, and iv. Any two items, or the capability information may also include any two items of the parameters i, ii, and iv.
需要说明的是,上述空间接收滤波器的数量可以为配置在同一天线面板上的空间接收滤波器的数量,或者,也可以是配置在多个天线面板上的空间接收滤波器的总数量,或者,也可以是包含天线面板信息的空间接收滤波器的数量,例如,P panel1可用于表示配置在面板(panel)1的空间接收滤波器的数量,P panel2可用于表示配置在面板2的空间接收滤波器的数量。此时,参数i的形式可以为(P panel1,P panel2),或者说P不仅是一个数值,而是由多个数值组成的序列(sequence),该序列所包含的数值的个数可以等于天线面板的数量。 It should be noted that the number of the above-mentioned space receiving filters may be the number of the space receiving filters arranged on the same antenna panel, or may be the total number of the space receiving filters arranged on multiple antenna panels, or , Can also be the number of spatial receiving filters containing antenna panel information. For example, P panel1 can be used to indicate the number of spatial receiving filters configured on panel 1 and P panel2 can be used to indicate the spatial receiving filters configured on panel 2. Number of filters. At this time, the form of the parameter i can be (P panel1 , P panel2 ), or P is not only a value, but a sequence of multiple values, and the number of values included in the sequence can be equal to the antenna. The number of panels.
应理解,终端设备的能力可作为网络设备确定上述参数M、N或Q的一项因素,网络设备还可以基于其他的因素来确定上述参数,本申请对此不做限定。It should be understood that the capability of the terminal device may be used as a factor for the network device to determine the foregoing parameters M, N, or Q, and the network device may also determine the foregoing parameters based on other factors, which is not limited in this application.
在本申请实施例中,终端设备可以基于每个空间接收滤波器接收到的参考信号进行测量,并将测量得到的结果分组上报给网络设备。终端设备基于同一个空间接收滤波器接收到的参考信号可以得到一个或多个测量结果。在本实施例中,可以将基于同一个空间接收滤波器接收到的参考信号测量得到的一个或多个测量结果可以归为一组测量报告。In the embodiment of the present application, the terminal device may perform measurement based on the reference signal received by each spatial receiving filter, and report the measurement result to the network device in groups. The terminal device can obtain one or more measurement results based on the reference signal received by the same spatial receiving filter. In this embodiment, one or more measurement results obtained based on the reference signal measurement received by the same spatial receiving filter may be classified as a group of measurement reports.
其中,每个测量结果可以包括以下一项或多项:Among them, each measurement result can include one or more of the following:
参考信号资源的标识;和Identification of reference signal resources; and
参考信号接收功率信息。Reference signal received power information.
也就是说,每个测量结果可以仅上报参考信号资源的标识,也可以仅上报参考信号接收功率信息,或者上报参考信号资源的标识以及相对应的参考信号接收功率信息。换言之,每组测量报告可以包括一个或多个参考信号资源的标识,或一个或多个参考信号接收功率信息,或一个或多个参考信号资源的标识以及各参考信号资源的标识对应的参考信号接收功率信息。That is, each measurement result may only report the identifier of the reference signal resource, or only the reference signal received power information, or the identifier of the reference signal resource and the corresponding reference signal received power information. In other words, each set of measurement reports may include the identification of one or more reference signal resources, or the received power information of one or more reference signals, or the identification of one or more reference signal resources, and the reference signal corresponding to the identification of each reference signal resource. Receive power information.
在一种可能的设计中,网络设备和终端设备可以预先约定上报的参考信号资源的条件,比如,当RSRP大于预设门限时,将该参考信号对应的参考信号资源的标识上报网络设备。在这种设计中,终端设备可以仅上报参考信号资源的标识,网络设备可以直接根据接收到的参考信号资源的标识,确定相对应的发射波束。In a possible design, the network device and the terminal device may agree on the conditions of the reported reference signal resource, for example, when the RSRP is greater than a preset threshold, the identifier of the reference signal resource corresponding to the reference signal is reported to the network device. In this design, the terminal device can only report the identification of the reference signal resource, and the network device can directly determine the corresponding transmission beam based on the identification of the received reference signal resource.
在另一种可能的设计中,网络设备和终端设备可以预先约定针对某一个参考信号资源进行测量,终端设备可以将在该参考信号资源上接收参考信号的参考信号接收功率信息上报给网络设备。在这种设计中,终端设备可以仅上报参考信号接收功率信息。In another possible design, the network device and the terminal device may agree to measure for a certain reference signal resource in advance, and the terminal device may report the reference signal receiving power information of receiving the reference signal on the reference signal resource to the network device. In this design, the terminal device can only report the reference signal received power information.
在又一种可能的设计中,终端设备可以根据参考信号的接收功率,将参考信号接收功率较高的一个或多个参考信号资源的标识以及相对应的参考信号接收功率信息上报给网络设备。网络设备可以根据终端设备上报的参考信号资源的标识以及相对应的参考信号接收功率信息,确定相对应的发射波束,并选择RSRP较高(例如,RSRP大于某一预设门限)的发射波束发送信号。In another possible design, the terminal device may report the identification of one or more reference signal resources with higher reference signal received power and the corresponding reference signal received power information to the network device according to the received power of the reference signal. The network device may determine the corresponding transmission beam according to the identifier of the reference signal resource reported by the terminal device and the corresponding reference signal reception power information, and select a transmission beam with a higher RSRP (for example, the RSRP is greater than a preset threshold) for transmission. signal.
应理解,上文中仅为便于理解,列举了终端设备在不同的情况下向网络设备上报的测量报告中每个测量结果包含的不同内容的示例,但这不应对本申请构成任何限定。本申请并不排除在未来的协议中对测量报告定义更多或更少的内容的可能。It should be understood that the foregoing is merely for ease of understanding, and examples of different contents contained in each measurement result in the measurement reports reported by the terminal device to the network device under different circumstances are listed, but this should not constitute any limitation to this application. This application does not exclude the possibility of defining more or less content for measurement reports in future agreements.
当一组测量报告包括多个参考信号接收功率信息时,该多个参考信号接收功率信息可以为:多个RSRP,或者,多个RSRP中的最大值以及相对于最大值的差分值的指示信息。或者说,该多个参考信号接收功率信息可以直接通过RSRP的绝对数值上报;也可以对各组测量报告内的多个RSRP中除最大RSRP以外的RSRP采用差分方式上报,简单地说,可通过组内差分方式上报。When a set of measurement reports includes multiple reference signal received power information, the multiple reference signal received power information may be: multiple RSRPs, or indication information of a maximum value in multiple RSRPs and a difference value relative to the maximum value . In other words, the received power information of the multiple reference signals can be reported directly through the absolute value of RSRP; RSRPs other than the maximum RSRP among multiple RSRPs in each measurement report can also be reported in a differential manner. Report in a differential manner within the group.
当CSI中包含多组测量报告且每组测量报告包括一个或多个参考信号接收功率信息时,该CSI中可包含多个参考信号接收功率信息。该多个参考信号接收功率信息可以为:多个RSRP,或者,多个RSRP中的最大值以及相对于最大值的差分值的指示信息。或者说,该多个参考信号接收功率可以直接通过RSRP的绝对数值上报;也可以对多组测量报告中的多个RSRP中除最大RSRP以外的RSRP采用差分方式上报,简单地说,可通过组间差分方式上报。When multiple sets of measurement reports are included in the CSI and each set of measurement reports includes one or more reference signal received power information, the CSI may include multiple reference signal received power information. The plurality of reference signal received power information may be: multiple RSRPs, or indication information of a maximum value and a difference value relative to the maximum value among the multiple RSRPs. In other words, the received power of the multiple reference signals can be directly reported through the absolute value of RSRP; RSRPs other than the maximum RSRP among multiple RSRPs in multiple measurement reports can also be reported in a differential manner. Report in inter-differential mode.
当采用组内差分方式上报参考信号接收功率信息时,终端设备可以先从基于同一个接收波束接收的参考信号测量得到的多个RSRP中确定RSRP的最大值,然后将其他待上报的RSRP与上述RSRP的最大值的差分值上报给网络设备。When the reference signal received power information is reported in a differential manner within a group, the terminal device may first determine the maximum RSRP value from multiple RSRPs measured based on the reference signal received by the same receive beam, and then compare other RSRPs to be reported with the above. The maximum difference in RSRP is reported to the network device.
当采用组间差分方式上报参考信号接收功率信息时,终端设备可以先从基于多个接收波束接收的参考信号测量得到的多个RSRP中确定RSRP的最大值,然后将其他待上报的 RSRP与上述RSRP的最大值的差分值上报给网络设备。When the reference signal received power information is reported in a differential manner between the groups, the terminal device may first determine the maximum RSRP value from multiple RSRPs measured based on the reference signal received by multiple receiving beams, and then compare other RSRPs to be reported with the above. The maximum difference in RSRP is reported to the network device.
由于各组测量报告对应不同的接收波束,因此组间的RSRP值差距可能较大,若直接沿用现有技术的差分指示方法,可能会造成需要指示的RSRP值超出了通过现有协议中定义的差分步长和差分值的指示比特能够指示的范围。例如,现有技术中,差分步长是2dB,差分值的指示比特为4比特,这意味着差分值的有效指示范围最多是32dB。但若基于上文所描述的组间差分方式上报,两组测量报告之间的最大RSRP的绝对值的差值可能就超过32dB。Because each group of measurement reports corresponds to different receiving beams, the RSRP value gap between the groups may be large. If the differential indication method of the prior art is directly adopted, the RSRP value that needs to be indicated may exceed the value defined in the existing protocol. The range that can be indicated by the difference step and the indication bit of the difference value. For example, in the prior art, the difference step size is 2 dB, and the indication bit of the difference value is 4 bits, which means that the effective indication range of the difference value is at most 32 dB. However, if it is reported based on the inter-group difference method described above, the difference between the absolute values of the maximum RSRP between the two sets of measurement reports may exceed 32 dB.
此时,协议可以定义一个更大的差分步长或者更多位的指示比特。例如,可将差分步长定为4dB,并可进一步限定该4dB的差分步长默认在基于空间接收滤波器的分组上报开启时使用。又例如,可将差分值的指示比特定义为5比特,并可进一步限定该5比特默认在基于空间接收滤波器的分组上报开启时使用。At this time, the protocol can define a larger differential step size or more indicator bits. For example, the differential step size can be set to 4dB, and the 4dB differential step size can be further limited to be used by default when packet reporting based on the spatial reception filter is turned on. As another example, the indication bit of the difference value may be defined as 5 bits, and the 5 bits may be further limited to be used by default when packet reporting based on the spatial reception filter is turned on.
应理解,上文列举的差分步长以及用于指示差分值的比特位数仅为示例,不应对本申请构成任何限定。例如,协议可以定义更大或更小的差分步长,也可以定义更多或更少的比特位数来指示差分值。It should be understood that the above-mentioned difference step size and the number of bits used to indicate the difference value are merely examples, and should not be construed as limiting in this application. For example, a protocol may define a larger or smaller differential step size, or it may define more or fewer bits to indicate a differential value.
可选地,每组测量报告还包括组标识,每个组标识对应一个空间接收滤波器。Optionally, each group of measurement reports further includes a group identifier, and each group identifier corresponds to a spatial receiving filter.
每组测量报告中可包括组标识的指示字段。该组标识的指示字段例如可通过m个比特承载。当终端设备采用上述方式一或方式二发送CSI时,
Figure PCTCN2019093497-appb-000001
M为上文中所述的每个CSI上报的测量报告的组数;当终端设备采用上述方式三或方式四发送CSI时,
Figure PCTCN2019093497-appb-000002
Q为上文中所述的通过多个CSI上报的测量报告的总组数,可以理解,由于Q=M*N,因此当网络设备未指示参数Q时,仍可根据
Figure PCTCN2019093497-appb-000003
确定m。
An indication field of a group identification may be included in each group of measurement reports. The indication field of the group identifier may be carried by m bits, for example. When the terminal device sends the CSI by using the first method or the second method,
Figure PCTCN2019093497-appb-000001
M is the number of groups of measurement reports reported by each CSI described above; when the terminal device sends the CSI in the above manner 3 or manner 4,
Figure PCTCN2019093497-appb-000002
Q is the total number of measurement reports reported through multiple CSIs as described above. It can be understood that since Q = M * N, when the network device does not indicate the parameter Q, it can still be calculated based on
Figure PCTCN2019093497-appb-000003
Determine m.
在一种实现方式中,组标识也可以是局部的(local),即,任意两次CSI上报的测量报告中的组标识与空间接收滤波器的对应关系可能是不同的,或者说,每次CSI上报的测量报告中的组标识与空间接收滤波器的对应关系都是独立的。在这种实现方式中,组标识的数量可根据每个CSI上报的组数M决定。In an implementation manner, the group identifier may also be local, that is, the corresponding relationship between the group identifier and the spatial receiving filter in the measurement report reported by any two CSI may be different, or each time The correspondence between the group identifier in the measurement report reported by the CSI and the spatial receiving filter is independent. In this implementation manner, the number of group identifiers may be determined according to the number of groups M reported by each CSI.
若组标识是局部的,则网络设备可以基于同一次CSI上报中携带的组标识,确定发射波束与接收波束之间的对应关系。If the group identifier is local, the network device may determine the correspondence between the transmit beam and the receive beam based on the group identifier carried in the same CSI report.
举例来说,假设终端设备包括4个空间接收滤波器,例如可分别记作空间接收滤波器#0至#3,但在CSI上报中仅基于空间接收滤波器#1和#2接收到的参考信号进行了测量和上报,则组标识可以为#1和#2;在下一次CSI上报中,终端设备可以仅基于空间接收滤波器#0和#3接收到的参考信号进行了测量和上报,而组标识仍然可以为#1和#2,当然也可以为#3和#4。此时,网络设备无法确定上一次CSI上报中组标识为#1的测量报告对应的空间接收滤波器与下一次CSI上报中组标识为#1的测量报告对应空间接收滤波器是否为同一空间接收滤波器,也无法确定这两次CSI上报的组标识为#2的测量报告对应的空间接收滤波器是否为同一空间接收滤波器。可以看到,当组标识为局部的组标识时,仅有同一次CSI上报中不同的组标识才可用于区分不同的空间接收滤波器。For example, suppose that the terminal device includes 4 spatial receiving filters, for example, they can be described as spatial receiving filters # 0 to # 3, but in the CSI report, only the reference received by the spatial receiving filters # 1 and # 2 is used. Signals are measured and reported, the group identifiers can be # 1 and # 2; in the next CSI report, the terminal device may measure and report only based on the reference signals received by the spatial reception filters # 0 and # 3, and The group ID can still be # 1 and # 2, and of course it can be # 3 and # 4. At this time, the network device cannot determine whether the spatial reception filter corresponding to the measurement report with the group ID # 1 in the previous CSI report and the spatial reception filter corresponding to the measurement report with the group ID # 1 in the next CSI report are the same spatial reception. It is also impossible to determine whether the spatial reception filter corresponding to the measurement report with the group ID # 2 reported by the two CSIs is the same spatial reception filter. It can be seen that when the group identifier is a local group identifier, only different group identifiers in the same CSI report can be used to distinguish different spatial receiving filters.
在另一种实现方式中,组标识可以是全局的(global),即,多个组标识与多个空间接收滤波器之间的对应关系可以是在预定时段内不变的,或者说,在预定时间段内的多次CSI上报的测量报告中的组标识与空间接收滤波器的对应关系可保持不变。In another implementation, the group identifier may be global, that is, the correspondence between multiple group identifiers and multiple spatial receiving filters may be constant within a predetermined period of time, or in other words, The corresponding relationship between the group identifier in the measurement report reported by the CSI for multiple times in a predetermined period of time and the spatial receiving filter may remain unchanged.
在这种实现方式中,组标识的数量可以由通过CSI上报的测量报告的总组数Q决定。 当终端设备采用方式一或方式二上报CSI时,该总组数Q与每个CSI中包含的测量报告的组数M相等。In this implementation manner, the number of group identifiers may be determined by the total group number Q of a measurement report reported through CSI. When the terminal device reports the CSI in the first or second mode, the total group number Q is equal to the group number M of the measurement report included in each CSI.
若组标识是全局的,则网络设备可以基于多次CSI上报中携带的组标识,确定发射波束与接收波束之间的对应关系。If the group identifier is global, the network device may determine the correspondence between the transmit beam and the receive beam based on the group identifier carried in the multiple CSI reports.
举例来说,假设终端设备包括4个空间接收滤波器,则可以分别对应四个不同的组标识,例如,空间接收滤波器#0可对应组标识#0,空间接收滤波器#1可对应组标识#1,空间接收滤波器#2可对应组标识#2,空间接收滤波器#3可对应组标识#3。For example, if the terminal device includes 4 spatial receiving filters, it can correspond to four different group identifiers. For example, the spatial receiving filter # 0 can correspond to the group identifier # 0, and the spatial receiving filter # 1 can correspond to the group. The identifier # 1, the spatial receiving filter # 2 may correspond to the group identifier # 2, and the spatial receiving filter # 3 may correspond to the group identifier # 3.
在上一次CSI上报中,终端设备可能仅基于空间接收滤波器#1和#2接收到的参考信号进行了测量和上报,则组标识可以分别为#1和#2。在下一次CSI上报中,终端设备可能仅基于空间接收滤波器#2和#4接收到的参考信号进行了测量和上报,则组标识可以分别为#2和#4。此时,即便是通过两次CSI上报,网络设备仍然可以确定组标识为#1的测量报告与组标识为#4的测量报告对应不同的空间接收滤波器;同理,两次CSI上报中组标识为#2的测量报告对应的是同一个空间接收滤波器。In the last CSI report, the terminal device may only measure and report based on the reference signals received by the spatial receiving filters # 1 and # 2, and the group identifiers may be # 1 and # 2, respectively. In the next CSI report, the terminal device may only measure and report based on the reference signals received by the spatial reception filters # 2 and # 4, and the group identifiers may be # 2 and # 4, respectively. At this time, even through two CSI reports, the network device can still determine that the measurement report with the group ID # 1 and the measurement report with the group ID # 4 correspond to different spatial reception filters; similarly, the CSI reports in the two groups The measurement report identified as # 2 corresponds to the same spatial receiving filter.
上述多个组标识与多个空间接收滤波器之间的对应关系可以在预定时段内保持不变。该预定时段可以理解为,该多个组标识与多个空间接收滤波器之间的对应关系的有效时间窗。The corresponding relationship between the multiple group identifiers and multiple spatial receiving filters may remain unchanged for a predetermined period. The predetermined period may be understood as an effective time window of a correspondence relationship between the multiple group identifiers and multiple spatial receiving filters.
可选地,该预定时段可以为以下任意一项:Optionally, the predetermined period may be any one of the following:
a)两次CSI上报的时间间隔,所述两次CSI上报满足:基于同一个CSI上报配置或,基于具有相同时域行为参数的两个CSI上报配置;a) The time interval between two CSI reports, the two CSI reports satisfy: based on the same CSI report configuration or based on two CSI report configurations with the same time domain behavior parameters;
b)两次参考信号传输的时间间隔,所述两次参考信号传输满足:基于同一个参考信号资源配置传输,或,基于同一个参考信号资源集配置传输,或,基于同一个参考信号资源配置传输,或,基于具有相同时域行为参数的参考信号资源配置传输;b) The time interval between two reference signal transmissions, the two reference signal transmissions satisfy: transmission based on the same reference signal resource configuration, or transmission based on the same reference signal resource set configuration, or, based on the same reference signal resource configuration Transmission, or configuration transmission based on reference signal resource having the same time domain behavior parameter;
c)一个CSI上报配置从使能到重配置的时间间隔;c) a CSI report configuration interval from enabling to reconfiguring;
d)一个CSI资源配置从使能到重配置的时间间隔;d) a time interval from a CSI resource configuration to a reconfiguration;
e)一个CSI上报配置从使能到释放的时间间隔;e) a CSI report configuration interval from enable to release;
f)一个CSI资源配置从使能到释放的时间间隔;f) a time interval from a CSI resource configuration from enable to release;
g)一个CSI上报配置被使能之后的指定长度;g) a specified length after a CSI report configuration is enabled;
h)一个CSI资源配置被使能之后的指定长度。h) A specified length after a CSI resource configuration is enabled.
下面分别对上述列举的a)至h)做详细说明。The above-mentioned a) to h) are respectively described in detail below.
a)两次CSI上报的时间间隔:a) Time interval between two CSI reports:
两次CSI上报的时间间隔可以理解为,第i次CSI上报的时间与第i+j次CSI上报的时间的间隔,i、j均为正整数。也就是说,该预定时段的起始时间可以是第i次CSI上报的时间,结束时间可以是第i+j次CSI上报的时间。The time interval between two CSI reports can be understood as the interval between the i-th CSI report time and the i + j-th CSI report time, i and j are positive integers. That is, the start time of the predetermined period may be the time of the i-th CSI report, and the end time may be the time of the i + j CSI report.
其中,在第i次CSI上报至第i+j次CSI上报的j次CSI上报中,任意两次CSI上报基于的CSI上报配置的时域行为相同。换句话说,该j次CSI上报可以都是周期性、半持续性或者非周期性。Among the j times of CSI reports from the i-th CSI report to the i + j-th CSI report, the time domain behavior based on the CSI report configuration based on any two CSI reports is the same. In other words, the j CSI reports may all be periodic, semi-persistent, or non-periodic.
在本申请实施例中,该j次CSI上报可以全部基于同一个CSI上报配置,即,任意两次CSI上报基于同一个CSI上报配置;该j次CSI上报也可以部分基于同一个CSI上报配置,即,该j次中的至少两次CSI上报可以基于同一个CSI上报配置;该j次CSI上报也 可以基于不同的CSI上报配置,即,每次CSI上报所基于的CSI上报配置彼此各不相同。无论是否基于同一CSI上报配置,该j次CSI上报的时域行为相同。In the embodiment of the present application, the j times of CSI reporting may be all based on the same CSI reporting configuration, that is, any two times of CSI reporting are based on the same CSI reporting configuration; the j times of CSI reporting may also be partially based on the same CSI reporting configuration, That is, at least two CSI reports in the j times may be based on the same CSI report configuration; the j CSI reports may also be based on different CSI report configurations, that is, the CSI report configurations based on each CSI report are different from each other . Regardless of whether the configuration is based on the same CSI report, the time domain behavior of the j CSI reports is the same.
b)两次参考信号传输的时间间隔:b) Time interval between two reference signal transmissions:
两次参考信号传输的时间间隔可以理解为,第p次参考信号发送的时间与第p+q次参考信号发送的时间的间隔,p、q均为正整数。The time interval between the two reference signal transmissions can be understood as the interval between the time when the p-th reference signal is sent and the time when the p + q reference signal is sent.
也就是说,该预定时段的起始时间可以是第p次参考信号发送的时间,结束时间可以是第p+q次参考信号发送的时间。That is, the start time of the predetermined period may be the time of sending the p-th reference signal, and the end time may be the time of sending the p + q-th reference signal.
其中,在第p次参考信号传输至第p+q次参考信号传输的q次参考信号传输中,任意两次参考信号传输所使用的参考信号资源的时域行为相同。换句话说,该q次参考信号传输可以都是周期性、半持续性或者非周期性。Among the q reference signal transmissions from the p-th reference signal transmission to the p + q-th reference signal transmission, the time-domain behavior of the reference signal resources used for any two reference signal transmissions is the same. In other words, the q reference signal transmissions may all be periodic, semi-persistent, or non-periodic.
如前所述,该参考信号可以是CSI-RS或者SSB,CSI-RS可通过CSI resource setting中的CSI-RS resource set配置,SSB也可通过一种特殊的CSI-SSB-ResourceSet指示用作信道测量的SSB index。因此,在本申请实施例中,该q次参考信号传输全部可以基于同一个资源配置,如CSI resource setting;该q次参考信号传输也可以全部基于同一个参考信号资源集配置,如CSI-RS resource set或CSI-SSB-ResourceSet;该q次参考信号传输也可以全部基于同一个参考信号资源配置,如CSI-RS resource或SSB resource;该q次参考信号传输还可以基于不同的资源配置或参考信号资源集配置,即,每次参考信号发送所基于的资源配置彼此不同,且每次参考信号发送所基于的参考资源集配置彼此不同。无论是否基于同一资源配置或同一参考信号资源集配置,该q次参考信号发送所使用的参考信号资源的时域行为相同。As mentioned earlier, the reference signal can be CSI-RS or SSB. CSI-RS can be configured by CSI-RS resource set in CSI resource setting. SSB can also be used as a channel through a special CSI-SSB-ResourceSet indication. Measured SSB index. Therefore, in the embodiment of the present application, all the q reference signal transmissions can be based on the same resource configuration, such as CSI resource setting; the q reference signal transmissions can also be all based on the same reference signal resource set configuration, such as CSI-RS resource qset or CSI-SSB-ResourceSet; the q times of reference signal transmission can all be based on the same reference signal resource configuration, such as CSI-RS resource or SSB resource; the q times of reference signal transmission can also be based on different resource configurations or references The signal resource set configuration, that is, the resource configuration based on each reference signal transmission is different from each other, and the reference resource set configuration based on each reference signal transmission is different from each other. Regardless of whether it is based on the same resource configuration or the same reference signal resource set configuration, the time domain behavior of the reference signal resource used for the q times of reference signal transmission is the same.
c)一个CSI上报配置从使能到重配置的时间间隔:c) The time interval from a CSI report configuration from enable to reconfiguration:
也就是说,该预定时段的起始时间可以是分组上报的CSI上报配置被使能的时间,结束时间可以是同一个CSI上报配置被重配置的时间。为便于理解,下面首先对CSI上报配置被使能做详细说明。That is, the start time of the predetermined period may be the time when the CSI reporting configuration reported by the packet is enabled, and the end time may be the time when the same CSI reporting configuration is reconfigured. To facilitate understanding, the following first describes in detail the CSI reporting configuration is enabled.
在一种实现方式中,CSI上报配置被使能可以是指,使能分组上报的CSI上报配置被配置,则使能分组上报的CSI上报配置被使能的时间可以是指使能分组的CSI上报配置被配置的时间。在这种实现方式中,CSI上报配置被使能不区分时域行为。In one implementation, the CSI reporting configuration being enabled may mean that the CSI reporting configuration for enabling packet reporting is configured, and the time when the CSI reporting configuration for enabling packet reporting is enabled may be the CSI reporting for enabling packets Configure the configured time. In this implementation, the CSI reporting configuration is enabled to distinguish between time domain behavior.
在另一种实现方式中,CSI上报配置被使能可以与时域行为相关。由于CSI上报配置的时域行为可以包括:周期性、半持续性和非周期性。对于周期性的CSI上报配置而言,该CSI上报配置被使能的时间可以是该CSI上报配置被配置的时间,对于半持续性的CSI上报配置而言,该CSI上报配置被使能的时间可以是该CSI上报配置被激活的时间,对于非周期性的CSI上报配置而言,该CSI上报配置被使能的时间可以是该CSI上报配置被触发的时间。In another implementation, enabling CSI reporting configuration may be related to time domain behavior. The time domain behavior configured due to CSI reporting may include periodic, semi-persistent, and non-periodic. For periodic CSI reporting configuration, the time when the CSI reporting configuration is enabled may be the time when the CSI reporting configuration is configured, and for semi-persistent CSI reporting configuration, the time when the CSI reporting configuration is enabled It may be the time when the CSI report configuration is activated. For aperiodic CSI report configuration, the time when the CSI report configuration is enabled may be the time when the CSI report configuration is triggered.
具体地,CSI上报配置可通过例如RRC消息中的高层参数配置下来。例如,网络设备可通过RRC消息中的CSI上报配置增加状态列表(csi-ReportConfigToAddModList)指示被配置的CSI上报配置。当某一个CSI上报配置出现在上述csi-ReportConfigToAddModList中时,则表示该CSI上报配置被配置。Specifically, the CSI report configuration may be configured through, for example, a high-level parameter in an RRC message. For example, the network device may indicate the configured CSI report configuration by using the CSI report configuration increase status list (csi-ReportConfigToAddModList) in the RRC message. When a certain CSI report configuration appears in the above csi-ReportConfigToAddModList, it indicates that the CSI report configuration is configured.
对于周期性的CSI上报来说,当终端设备接收到RRC消息发送的CSI上报配置时,便可以根据CSI上报配置周期性地上报CSI。因此,对于周期性的CSI上报来说,使能分 组上报的CSI上报配置的时间可以是该CSI上报配置被配置的时间,也就是终端设备接收到该CSI上报配置的时间。For periodic CSI reporting, when the terminal device receives the CSI reporting configuration sent by the RRC message, it can periodically report the CSI according to the CSI reporting configuration. Therefore, for periodic CSI reporting, the time when the CSI reporting configuration enabled for group reporting can be the time when the CSI reporting configuration is configured, that is, the time when the terminal device receives the CSI reporting configuration.
对于半持续性的CSI上报来说,网络设备可以先通过RRC消息发送CSI上报配置,此后,网络设备可通过MAC CE或DCI激活终端设备进行CSI上报。For semi-persistent CSI reporting, the network device may first send the CSI reporting configuration through an RRC message, and thereafter, the network device may activate the terminal device to report the CSI through MAC or CEI.
例如,当CSI被配置在物理上行控制信道(physical uplink control channel,PUCCH)上上报时,网络设备可通过MAC CE激活和去激活CSI上报。终端设备可以在接收到MAC CE的激活(activate)指令后,便可以根据CSI上报配置周期性地上报CSI;终端设备还可以在接收到MAC CE的去激活(deactivate)指令后,停止上报CSI。For example, when the CSI is configured to report on a physical uplink control channel (PUCCH), the network device may activate and deactivate the CSI reporting through the MAC CE. After receiving the MAC CE activation command, the terminal device may periodically report the CSI according to the CSI reporting configuration; the terminal device may also stop reporting the CSI after receiving the MAC CE deactivation instruction.
当CSI被配置在物理上行共享信道(physical uplink shared channel,PUSCH)上上报时,网络设备可通过DCI激活和去激活CSI上报。终端设备可以在接收到DCI的激活指令后,根据CS上报配置周期性地上报CSI;终端设备还可以在接收到DCI的去激活指令后,停止上报CSI。因此,对于半持续性的CSI上报来说,使能分组上报的CSI上报配置的时间可以是该CSI上报配置被激活的时间,也就是终端设备接收到MAC CE或DCI的激活指令的时间。When the CSI is configured to report on a physical uplink shared channel (PUSCH), the network device can activate and deactivate the CSI report through DCI. After receiving the DCI activation instruction, the terminal device may periodically report CSI according to the CS reporting configuration; the terminal device may also stop reporting CSI after receiving the DCI deactivation instruction. Therefore, for semi-persistent CSI reporting, the time when the CSI reporting configuration with packet reporting enabled is the time when the CSI reporting configuration is activated, that is, the time when the terminal device receives the MAC CE or DCI activation instruction.
对于非周期性的CSI上报来说,网络设备也可以先通过RRC消息发送CSI上报配置,此后,网络设备可通过DCI触发(trigger)终端设备进行CSI上报。终端设备在接收到DCI的触发后,便可以根据CSI上报配置进行一次CSI上报。因此,对于非周期性的CSI上报来说,使能分组上报的CSI上报配置的时间可以是该CSI上报配置被触发的时间,也就是终端设备接收到DCI的触发的时间。For aperiodic CSI reporting, the network device may also first send the CSI reporting configuration via an RRC message. After that, the network device may report the CSI through a DCI trigger (trigger) terminal device. After receiving the trigger of the DCI, the terminal device can perform a CSI report according to the CSI report configuration. Therefore, for aperiodic CSI reporting, the time when the CSI reporting configuration with packet reporting enabled is the time when the CSI reporting configuration is triggered, that is, the time when the terminal device receives the DCI trigger.
下文中为了简洁,在未作出特别说明的情况下,对CSI上报配置被使能的理解均可参照上文所述。For the sake of brevity in the following, if there is no special explanation, the understanding of the CSI reporting configuration is enabled can refer to the above.
若预定时段为一个CSI上报配置从使能到重配置的时间间隔,则当使能分组上报的CSI上报配置被使能时,多个组标识与多个空间接收滤波器的对应关系生效,且保持不变,直到该CSI上报配置被重配置。If the CSI reporting configuration interval is enabled from re-configuration for a predetermined period of time, when the CSI reporting configuration for enabling group reporting is enabled, the correspondence between multiple group identifiers and multiple spatial receive filters takes effect, and It remains unchanged until the CSI report configuration is reconfigured.
应理解,将一个CSI上报配置从使能到重配置的时间间隔作为预定时段仅为一种示例,而不应对本申请构成任何限定。该预定时段也可以是一个CSI上报配置被使能至另一个CSI上报配置被配置或重配置的时间间隔。在预定时段被定义为使能分组上报的CSI上报配置被配置、被激活或被触发至另一个CSI上报配置被配置或重配置的时间间隔的情况下,该两个CSI上报配置的时域行为可以相同,例如都可以是周期性、半持续性或者非周期性。It should be understood that the time interval from the enabling to the reconfiguration of a CSI report configuration as a predetermined period is only an example, and should not be construed as any limitation in this application. The predetermined period may also be a time interval from when one CSI report configuration is enabled to another CSI report configuration is configured or reconfigured. The time domain behavior of the two CSI reporting configurations is defined when the CSI reporting configuration that enables packet reporting is configured, activated, or triggered to another CSI reporting configuration being configured or reconfigured for a predetermined period of time They can be the same, for example, they can be periodic, semi-persistent, or non-periodic.
d)一个CSI资源配置从使能到重配置的时间间隔:d) the time interval from a CSI resource configuration to the reconfiguration:
也就是说,该预定时段的起始时间可以是CSI资源配置被使能的时间,结束时间可以是同一个CSI资源配置被重配置的时间。That is, the start time of the predetermined period may be the time when the CSI resource configuration is enabled, and the end time may be the time when the same CSI resource configuration is reconfigured.
为便于理解,下面首先对CSI资源配置被使能做详细说明。To facilitate understanding, the following first describes in detail the CSI resource configuration is enabled.
在一种实现方式中,CSI资源配置被使能可以是指,CSI资源配置被配置,则CSI资源配置被使能的时间可以是CSI资源配置被配置的时间。在这种实现方式中,CSI资源配置不区分时域行为。In an implementation manner, the CSI resource configuration is enabled may refer to that the CSI resource configuration is configured, and the time when the CSI resource configuration is enabled may be the time when the CSI resource configuration is configured. In this implementation, the CSI resource configuration does not distinguish between time domain behavior.
在另一种实现方式中,CSI资源配置被使能可以与时域行为相关。由于CSI资源配置的时域行为可以包括周期性、半持续性和非周期性。对于周期性的CSI资源配置而言,该 CSI资源配置被使能的时间可以是该CSI资源配置被配置的时间,对于半持续性的CSI资源配置而言,该CSI资源配置被使能的时间可以是该CSI资源配置关联的一个CSI资源集被激活的时间,对于非周期性的CSI资源配置而言,该CSI资源配置被使能的时间可以是该CSI资源配置关联的一个CSI资源集被触发的时间。In another implementation, the CSI resource configuration is enabled may be related to time-domain behavior. The time domain behavior due to CSI resource configuration can include periodic, semi-persistent, and aperiodic. For periodic CSI resource configuration, the time when the CSI resource configuration is enabled may be the time when the CSI resource configuration is configured; for semi-persistent CSI resource configuration, the time when the CSI resource configuration is enabled It may be the time when a CSI resource set associated with the CSI resource configuration is activated. For aperiodic CSI resource configuration, the time when the CSI resource configuration is enabled may be the time when a CSI resource set associated with the CSI resource configuration is activated. The time when it was triggered.
具体地,CSI资源配置可通过例如RRC消息中的高层参数配置下来。例如,网络设备可通过RRC消息中的CSI资源配置增加状态列表(csi-ResourceConfigToAddModList)指示被配置的CSI资源配置(CSI resource setting),也可通过RRC消息中的NZP CSI-RS资源集增加状态列表(nzp-CSI-RS-ResourceSetToAddModList)指示被配置的CSI-RS资源集(CSI-RS resource set),也可通过RRC消息中的NZP CSI-RS资源增加状态列表(nzp-CSI-RS-ResourceToAddModList)指示被配置的CSI-RS资源(CSI-RS resource),还可通过RRC消息中的CSI-SSB资源集增加状态列表(CSI-SSB-ResourceSetToAddModList)指示被配置的SSB资源集(SSB resource set)。Specifically, the CSI resource configuration may be configured through, for example, a high-level parameter in an RRC message. For example, the network device can indicate the configured CSI resource configuration (CSI resource configuration) through the CSI resource configuration increase status list (csi-ResourceConfigToAddModList) in the RRC message, or can add the status list through the NZP CSI-RS resource set in the RRC message (nzp-CSI-RS-ResourceSetToAddModList) indicates the configured CSI-RS resource set (CSI-RS resource set), and the status list (nzp-CSI-RS-ResourceToAddModList) can also be added through the NZP CSI-RS resource in the RRC message It indicates the configured CSI-RS resource (CSI-RS resource), and can also indicate the configured SSB resource set (SSB resource set) through the CSI-SSB resource set addition status list (CSI-SSB-ResourceSetToAddModList) in the RRC message.
当某一个CSI-RS资源配置出现在上述csi-ResourceConfigToAddModList中时,可表示该CSI-RS资源配置被配置;当某一个CSI-RS资源集出现在nzp-CSI-RS-ResourceSetToAddModList中时,可表示该CSI-RS资源集被配置;当一个CSI-RS资源出现在nzp-CSI-RS-ResourceToAddModList中时,可表示该CSI-RS资源被配置;当某一个SSB资源集出现在CSI-SSB-ResourceSetToAddModList中时,可表示该SSB资源集被配置。对于周期性的参考信号传输来说,当终端设备接收到RRC消息发送的CSI资源配置时,便可以基于CSI资源配置周期性地接收参考信号,以进行信道测量。因此,对于周期性的CSI资源配置来说,使能分组上报的CSI资源配置的时间可以是该CSI资源配置被配置的时间,也就是终端设备接收到该CSI资源配置的时间。When a certain CSI-RS resource configuration appears in the above csi-ResourceConfigToAddModList, it may indicate that the CSI-RS resource configuration is configured; when a certain CSI-RS resource set appears in the nzp-CSI-RS-ResourceSetToAddModList, it may indicate The CSI-RS resource set is configured; when a CSI-RS resource appears in the nzp-CSI-RS-ResourceToAddModList, it can indicate that the CSI-RS resource is configured; when a SSB resource set appears in the CSI-SSB-ResourceSetToAddModList When it is medium, it can indicate that the SSB resource set is configured. For periodic reference signal transmission, when the terminal device receives the CSI resource configuration sent by the RRC message, it can periodically receive the reference signal based on the CSI resource configuration for channel measurement. Therefore, for periodic CSI resource configuration, the time for which the CSI resource configuration reported by the enable packet is the time when the CSI resource configuration is configured, that is, the time when the terminal device receives the CSI resource configuration.
对于半持续性的参考信号传输来说,网络设备可以先通过RRC消息发送CSI资源配置,此后,网络设备可通过MAC CE激活终端设备接收参考信号。终端设备在接收到MAC CE的激活指令后,便可以基于CSI资源配置被激活的CSI资源集周期性地接收参考信号;网络设备还可通过MAC CE去激活终端设备接收参考信号,终端设备在接收到MAC CE的去激活指令后,即停止接收参考信号。因此,对于半持续性的参考信号传输来说,使能CSI资源配置的时间可以是该CSI资源配置关联的一个CSI资源集被激活的时间,也就是终端设备接收到MAC CE的激活指令的时间。For semi-persistent reference signal transmission, the network device may first send the CSI resource configuration through an RRC message, after which the network device may activate the terminal device to receive the reference signal through the MAC CE. After receiving the MAC CE activation instruction, the terminal device can periodically receive the reference signal based on the CSI resource configuration activated CSI resource set; the network device can also deactivate the terminal device to receive the reference signal through the MAC CE. The terminal device is receiving After receiving the deactivation instruction of MAC CE, it stops receiving the reference signal. Therefore, for semi-continuous reference signal transmission, the time to enable CSI resource configuration can be the time when a CSI resource set associated with the CSI resource configuration is activated, that is, the time when the terminal device receives the MAC CE activation command. .
对于非周期性的参考信号传输来说,网络设备也可以先通过RRC消息发送CSI资源配置,此后,网络设备可通过DCI触发(trigger)终端设备接收参考信号,终端设备在接收到DCI的触发后,便可以基于CSI资源配置被触发的CSI资源集接收参考信号。因此,对于非周期性的参考信号传输来说,使能CSI资源配置的时间可以是该CSI资源配置关联的一个CSI资源集被触发的时间,也就是终端设备接收到DCI的触发的时间。For non-periodic reference signal transmission, the network device may also first send the CSI resource configuration through an RRC message. After that, the network device may receive the reference signal through a DCI trigger terminal device. After receiving the DCI trigger, the terminal device Then, the reference signal can be received based on the triggered CSI resource set based on the CSI resource configuration. Therefore, for aperiodic reference signal transmission, the time when the CSI resource configuration is enabled may be the time when a CSI resource set associated with the CSI resource configuration is triggered, that is, the time when the terminal device receives the trigger of the DCI.
其中,上文所述的CSI资源集例如可以是CSI-RS资源集或SSB资源集。The CSI resource set described above may be, for example, a CSI-RS resource set or an SSB resource set.
下文中为了简洁,在未作出特别说明的情况下,对CSI资源配置被使能的理解均可参照上文所述。For the sake of brevity, in the following, if there is no special explanation, the understanding of CSI resource allocation is enabled can refer to the above.
若预定时段为一个CSI资源从使能到重配置的时间间隔,则当CSI资源配置被使能时,多个组标识与多个空间接收滤波器的对应关系生效,且保持不变,直到该CSI资源配置被重配置。If the predetermined period is a time interval from a CSI resource to being reconfigured, when the CSI resource configuration is enabled, the correspondence between multiple group identifiers and multiple spatial receiving filters takes effect and remains unchanged until the The CSI resource configuration is reconfigured.
应理解,将一个CSI资源配置从使能到重配置的时间间隔作为预定时段仅为一种示例,而不应对本申请构成任何限定。该预定时段也可以是一个CSI上报配置被使能至另一个CSI上报配置被配置或重配置的时间间隔。在预定时段被定义为使能分组上报的CSI上报配置被配置、被激活或被触发至另一个CSI上报配置被配置或重配置的时间间隔的情况下,该两个CSI上报配置的时域行为可以相同,例如都可以是周期性、半持续性或者非周期性。It should be understood that the time interval from the enabling to the reconfiguration of a CSI resource configuration as a predetermined period is only an example, and should not constitute any limitation to the present application. The predetermined period may also be a time interval from when one CSI report configuration is enabled to another CSI report configuration is configured or reconfigured. The time domain behavior of the two CSI reporting configurations is defined when the CSI reporting configuration that enables packet reporting is configured, activated, or triggered to another CSI reporting configuration being configured or reconfigured for a predetermined period of time They can be the same, for example, they can be periodic, semi-persistent, or non-periodic.
e)一个CSI上报配置从使能到释放的时间间隔:e) A CSI report configures the time interval from enabling to releasing:
也就是说,该预定时段的起始时间可以是使能CSI上报配置的时间,结束时间可以是同一个CSI上报配置被释放的时间。That is, the start time of the predetermined period may be the time when the CSI report configuration is enabled, and the end time may be the time when the same CSI report configuration is released.
关于CSI上报配置被使能的理解在上文中已经做了详细说明,为了简洁,这里不再赘述。The understanding of the CSI reporting configuration is enabled has been described in detail above, for the sake of brevity, it will not be repeated here.
CSI上报释放可通过例如RRC消息中的高层参数配置下来。例如,网络设备可通过RRC消息中的CSI上报配置释放列表(csi-ReportConfigToReleaseList)指示被释放的CSI上报配置。当某一个CSI上报配置出现在上述csi-ReportConfigToReleaseList中时,则表示该CSI上报配置被释放。The CSI report release can be configured through high-level parameters in the RRC message, for example. For example, the network device may indicate the released CSI report configuration through the CSI report configuration release list (csi-ReportConfigToReleaseList) in the RRC message. When a certain CSI report configuration appears in the csi-ReportConfigToReleaseList, it means that the CSI report configuration is released.
f)一个CSI资源配置从使能到释放的时间间隔:f) The time interval from a CSI resource configuration to enabling and releasing:
也就是说,该预定时段的起始时间可以是使能CSI资源配置的时间,结束时间可以是同一个CSI资源配置被释放的时间。That is, the start time of the predetermined period may be the time when the CSI resource configuration is enabled, and the end time may be the time when the same CSI resource configuration is released.
关于CSI资源配置被使能的理解在上文中已经做了详细说明,为了简洁,这里不再赘述。The understanding of the CSI resource configuration is enabled has been described in detail above, for the sake of brevity, it will not be repeated here.
CSI资源释放可通过例如RRC消息中的高层参数配置下来。例如,网络设备可通过RRC消息中的的CSI资源配置释放列表(csi-ResourceConfigToReleaseList)指示被释放的CSI资源,也可通过RRC消息中的NZP CSI-RS资源集释放列表(nzp-CSI-RS-ResourceSetToReleaseList)指示被释放的CSI-RS资源集,也可通过RRC消息中的NZP CSI-RS资源释放列表(nzp-CSI-RS-ResourceReleaseList)指示被释放的CSI-RS资源,还可通过RRC消息中的CSI-SSB资源集释放列表(CSI-SSB-ResourceSetToReleaseList)指示被释放的SSB资源集。CSI resource release can be configured through, for example, high-level parameters in the RRC message. For example, the network device may indicate the released CSI resources through the CSI resource configuration release list (csi-ResourceConfigToReleaseList) in the RRC message, or may use the NZP CSI-RS resource set release list (nzp-CSI-RS-RS- ResourceSetToReleaseList) indicates the released CSI-RS resource set. It can also indicate the released CSI-RS resources through the NZP CSI-RS resource release list (nzp-CSI-RS-ResourceReleaseList) in the RRC message. The CSI-SSB-ResourceSetToReleaseList indicates the released SSB resource set.
当某一个CSI-RS资源配置出现在上述csi-ResourceConfigToReleaseList中时,可表示该CSI-RS资源配置被释放;当某一个CSI-RS资源集出现在nzp-CSI-RS-ResourceSetToReleaseList中时,可表示该CSI-RS资源集被释放;当一个CSI-RS资源出现在nzp-CSI-RS-ResourceToReleaseList中时,可表示该CSI-RS资源被释放;当某一个SSB资源集出现在CSI-SSB-ResourceSetToReleaseList中时,可表示该SSB资源被释放。When a certain CSI-RS resource configuration appears in the above csi-ResourceConfigToReleaseList, it may indicate that the CSI-RS resource configuration is released; when a certain CSI-RS resource set appears in the nzp-CSI-RS-ResourceSetToReleaseList, it may indicate The CSI-RS resource set is released; when a CSI-RS resource appears in the nzp-CSI-RS-ResourceToReleaseList, it can indicate that the CSI-RS resource is released; when an SSB resource set appears in the CSI-SSB-ResourceSetToReleaseList When it is medium, it can indicate that the SSB resource is released.
g)一个CSI上报配置被使能之后的指定长度:g) A specified length after a CSI report configuration is enabled:
也就是说,该预定时段的起始时间可以是使能CSI上报配置的时间,该预定时段的时间长度可以由网络设备指示或者也可以由协议定义。That is, the start time of the predetermined period may be a time configured to enable CSI reporting, and the length of the predetermined period may be indicated by a network device or may be defined by a protocol.
其中,该指定长度例如可以以绝对时长来计时,例如是一个或多个时隙、一个或多个符号,也可以是一秒或多秒、一毫秒或多个毫秒、一微秒或多个微秒等;该指定长度还可以是CSI上报次数,例如可以是一次或多次CSI上报。本申请对此不做限定。关于CSI 上报配置被使能的理解在上文中已经做了详细说明,为了简洁,这里不再赘述。The specified length may be measured in absolute time, for example, one or more time slots, one or more symbols, or one or more seconds, one millisecond or more, one microsecond or more. Microseconds, etc .; the specified length may also be the number of CSI reports, such as one or more CSI reports. This application does not limit this. The understanding of the CSI reporting configuration is enabled has been described in detail above, for the sake of brevity, it will not be repeated here.
h)一个CSI资源配置被使能之后的指定长度;h) a specified length after a CSI resource configuration is enabled;
也就是说,该预定时段的起始时间可以是使能CSI资源配置的时间,该预定时段的时间长度可以由网络设备指示或者也可以由协议定义。That is, the start time of the predetermined period may be the time when the CSI resource configuration is enabled, and the length of the predetermined period may be indicated by a network device or may be defined by a protocol.
关于CSI资源配置被使能的理解在上文中已经做了详细说明,为了简洁,这里不再赘述。The understanding of the CSI resource configuration is enabled has been described in detail above, for the sake of brevity, it will not be repeated here.
其中,该指定长度例如可以以绝对时长来计时,例如是一个或多个时隙、一个或多个符号,也可以是一秒或多秒、一毫秒或多个毫秒、一微秒或多个微秒等;该指定长度还可以是参考信号传输次数,例如可以是一次或多次参考信号传输。本申请对此不做限定。关于CSI资源配置被使能的理解在上文中已经做了详细说明,为了简洁,这里不再赘述。应理解,上文列举的指定时长的几种可能的定义仅为示例,而不应对本申请构成任何限定。The specified length may be measured in absolute time, for example, one or more time slots, one or more symbols, or one or more seconds, one millisecond or more, one microsecond or more. Microseconds, etc .; the specified length may also be the number of reference signal transmissions, such as one or more reference signal transmissions. This application does not limit this. The understanding of the CSI resource configuration is enabled has been described in detail above, for the sake of brevity, it will not be repeated here. It should be understood that the several possible definitions of the specified time periods listed above are merely examples, and should not be construed as limiting this application in any way.
在本申请实施例中,预定时段可以为上文列举的a)至h)中的任意一项,预定时段具体为上文列举的a)至h)中的哪一项可以由协议定义,也可以由网络设备预先指示给终端设备。例如,可通过位图来指示预定时段为上述a)至h)中的哪一项。In the embodiment of the present application, the predetermined time period may be any one of the items a) to h) listed above, and the predetermined time period may specifically be any one of the items a) to h) listed above may be defined by an agreement. The terminal device may be instructed in advance by the network device. For example, a bitmap may be used to indicate which of the above a) to h) the predetermined period is.
终端设备在确定了预定时段为上述a)至h)中的哪一项之后,还可进一步确定具体参数。After the terminal device determines which of the above a) to h) the predetermined period of time, the terminal device can further determine specific parameters.
可选地,该预定时段的具体参数可以是预先定义的,如协议定义。如协议定义上述a)至h)中的任意一项的具体参数。Optionally, specific parameters of the predetermined period may be predefined, such as a protocol definition. The specific parameters of any of a) to h) above are defined as defined in the protocol.
具体地,当预定时段为a)时,该预定时段的起始时间可以为第i次CSI上报的时间,结束时间可以为第i+j次CSI上报的时间,协议可定义上述i和j的值;当预定时段为b)时,则该预定时段的起始时间可以为第p次参考信号传输的时间,结束时间可以为第p+q次参考信号传输的时间,协议可定义上述p和q的值;当预定时段为c)至f)中任意一项时,可不进一步定义具体参数;当预定时段为g)或h)时,协议可定义指定长度,例如,可通过绝对时长来定义该指定长度,如x(x>0)个时隙或符号、y(y>0)秒、毫秒或微秒等,或者也可通过CSI上报次数或参考信号传输次数来定义该指定时长,如,z(z>0且为整数)次CSI上报或z次参考信号传输。Specifically, when the predetermined period is a), the start time of the predetermined period may be the time of the i-th CSI report, and the end time may be the time of the i + j CSI report. The protocol may define the above i and j Value; when the predetermined period is b), the start time of the predetermined period can be the time of the p-th reference signal transmission, and the end time can be the time of the p + q reference signal transmission. The protocol can define the above-mentioned p and The value of q; when the predetermined period is any one of c) to f), specific parameters may not be further defined; when the predetermined period is g) or h), the protocol may define a specified length, for example, it may be defined by absolute time The specified length, such as x (x> 0) timeslots or symbols, y (y> 0) seconds, milliseconds, or microseconds, or the specified length can also be defined by the number of CSI reports or the number of reference signal transmissions, such as , Z (z> 0 and an integer) CSI reports or z reference signal transmissions.
应理解,上文仅为便于理解,列举了协议定义预定时段的具体方法和内容,但这不应对本申请构成任何限定,预定时段的定义方法并不仅限于上文所列举。It should be understood that the above is merely for the convenience of understanding, and enumerates the specific methods and contents of the agreement to define the predetermined period, but this should not constitute any limitation to this application, and the method of defining the predetermined period is not limited to the above.
可选地,该预定时段的具体参数也可以由网络设备确定并指示给终端设备。可选地,该方法200还包括:网络设备接收第四指示信息,该第四指示信息用于指示上述预定时段的起始时间和长度。Optionally, specific parameters of the predetermined period may also be determined by the network device and indicated to the terminal device. Optionally, the method 200 further includes: the network device receives fourth indication information, where the fourth indication information is used to indicate a start time and a length of the predetermined period.
相应地,终端设备接收上述第四指示信息。Accordingly, the terminal device receives the fourth instruction information.
具体地,当预定时段为a)时,该预定时段的起始时间可以为第i次CSI上报的时间,结束时间可以为第i+j次CSI上报的时间,则网络设备可通过第四指示信息向终端设备指示i和j;当预定时段为b)时,该预定时段的起始时间可以为第p次参考信号传输的时间,结束时间可以为第p+q次参考信号传输的时间,则网络设备可通过第四指示信息向终端设备指示p和q;当预定时段为c)至f)中任意一项时,网络设备可以不指示具体参数;当预定时段为g)或h)时,网络设备可以通过第四指示信息向终端设备指示该预定时段的指定时长,如协议可预先定义该指定时长的定义方式及计时单位,如,以绝对时长来定义, 协议可预先定义该指定时长的单位,网络设备可通过第四指示信息指示具体的数值,如上述x或y;又如,以CSI上报次数或参考信号传输次数来定义,协议可预先定义具体是以CSI上报次数还是参考信号传输次数来定义,网络设备可通过第四指示信息指示具体的数值,如上述z。Specifically, when the predetermined period is a), the start time of the predetermined period may be the time of the i-th CSI report, and the end time may be the time of the i + j CSI report, the network device may pass the fourth instruction The information indicates i and j to the terminal device; when the predetermined period is b), the start time of the predetermined period may be the time of the p-th reference signal transmission, and the end time may be the time of the p + q reference signal transmission, Then the network device may indicate p and q to the terminal device through the fourth instruction information; when the predetermined period is any one of c) to f), the network device may not indicate specific parameters; when the predetermined period is g) or h) The network device may indicate the specified duration of the predetermined time period to the terminal device through the fourth instruction information. For example, the protocol may define the definition method and timing unit of the specified duration in advance. For example, the absolute duration may be used for the protocol definition. The network device may indicate a specific value through the fourth instruction information, such as the above x or y; for another example, it may be defined by the number of CSI reports or the number of reference signal transmissions. The protocol may be defined in advance. CSI is reported the number of the reference signal is defined based on the number of transmissions, the network device may indicate information specific numerical values indicated by the fourth, as described above z.
应理解,上文仅为便于理解,列举了网络设备指示预定时段的具体方法和内容,但这不应对本申请构成任何限定。由起始时间和长度可以推算出结束时间,因此,网络设备可以向终端设备指示该预定时段的起始时间、长度和结束时间中的任意两项,终端设备可以根据网络设备所指示的任意两项推算出另一项。因此,网络设备向终端设备通过第四指示信息向终端设备指示该预定时段的起始时间、长度和结束时间中的任意两项时,均应落入本申请的保护范围内。It should be understood that the foregoing is merely for ease of understanding, and the specific methods and contents of the network device indicating the predetermined time period are listed, but this should not constitute any limitation to this application. The end time can be calculated from the start time and length. Therefore, the network device can indicate any two items of the start time, length, and end time of the predetermined period to the terminal device. The terminal device can Term infers another term. Therefore, when the network device indicates to the terminal device any of the start time, length, and end time of the predetermined period by the fourth instruction information, it should fall within the protection scope of this application.
还应理解,该预定时段的定义方法并不仅限于上文所列举。例如,该预定时段也可通过协议定义和网络设备指示结合的方式来确定。又例如,当网络设备向终端设备发送第四指示信息来指示预定时段时,该预定时段的起始时间还可以为终端设备接收到该第四指示信息的时间。此时,该第四指示信息可以进指示该预定时段的时长。终端设备确定预定时段的方法包括但不限于上文所列举,为了简洁,这里不再一一举例说明。It should also be understood that the method for defining the predetermined period is not limited to the above. For example, the predetermined period may also be determined through a combination of a protocol definition and a network device indication. As another example, when the network device sends the fourth instruction information to the terminal device to indicate the predetermined period, the start time of the predetermined period may also be the time when the terminal device receives the fourth instruction information. At this time, the fourth instruction information may further indicate the duration of the predetermined period. The method for the terminal device to determine the predetermined time period includes, but is not limited to, the foregoing list. For the sake of brevity, no further examples are given here.
综上,通过在测量报告中携带组标识,可以方便网络设备获取发射波束与接收波束之间的对应关系。然而,应理解,这并不是用于确定发射波束与接收波束的对应关系的唯一方式。例如,当终端设备通过多个CSI上报多组测量报告时,终端设备还可以在每次CSI上报时,通过一个比特的指示字段来指示本次CSI上报与上一次CSI上报所对应的空间接收滤波器是否相同。如“0”表示不同,“1”表示相同。In summary, by carrying the group identifier in the measurement report, it is convenient for the network device to obtain the correspondence between the transmitting beam and the receiving beam. However, it should be understood that this is not the only way to determine the correspondence between the transmit beam and the receive beam. For example, when a terminal device reports multiple sets of measurement reports through multiple CSIs, the terminal device may also use a one-bit indication field to indicate the spatial reception filter corresponding to the current CSI report and the previous CSI report each time the CSI reports The device is the same. For example, "0" means different, and "1" means the same.
在本申请实施例中,为便于区分和说明,可以将上述基于一个空间接收滤波器接收到的参考信号测量得到的结果可以归为一组测量报告,由此可以得到与一个或多个空间滤波器对应的一组或多组测量报告,终端设备可通过CSI将测量得到的结果按组上报给网络设备,这种基于空间接收滤波器分组上报CSI的方式称为基于空间接收滤波器的分组上报,或者称为基于接收波束(UE Rx beam based)的分组上报。简单地说,本申请实施例中的测量报告是基于空间接收滤波器来分组的,通过不同的测量报告上报的CSI可以认为是不同组的。In the embodiment of the present application, for the convenience of differentiation and description, the results obtained based on the measurement of the reference signal received by a spatial receiving filter may be classified into a group of measurement reports, and thus one or more spatial filtering may be obtained. One or more sets of measurement reports corresponding to the device, the terminal device can report the measurement results to the network device in groups by CSI. This method of group report CSI based on spatial reception filter is called group report based on spatial reception filter. , Or a packet reporting based on a receiving beam (UE Rx beam based). To put it simply, the measurement reports in the embodiments of the present application are grouped based on a spatial reception filter, and the CSI reported through different measurement reports can be considered as different groups.
与此相对应地,可以将现有技术中基于同时接收到的多个参考信号测量得到的CSI上报给网络设备的方式称为基于同时接收(Simultaneous reception based)的分组上报。可以理解,上述两种上报方式都可以称为基于分组的波束上报(group based beam reporting),简称分组上报。与此相对应地,CSI上报方式还可以包括非分组上报。Corresponding to this, the manner in which the CSI measured based on multiple reference signals received simultaneously in the prior art can be reported to a network device is referred to as simultaneous reporting (Simultaneous reception based) packet reporting. It can be understood that both of the above reporting methods can be referred to as group-based beam reporting (group reporting based), which is referred to as group reporting for short. Correspondingly, the CSI reporting method may also include non-packet reporting.
可选地,在步骤210之前,该方法200还包括:步骤270,网络设备发送第一指示信息,该第一指示信息用于指示第一上报方式,该第一上报方式为基于空间接收滤波器的分组上报。Optionally, before step 210, the method 200 further includes: step 270, the network device sends first indication information, where the first indication information is used to indicate a first reporting mode, and the first reporting mode is based on a spatial reception filter Reported in groups.
相应地,在步骤270中,终端设备接收上述第一指示信息。Accordingly, in step 270, the terminal device receives the first indication information.
在一种可能的设计中,该第一指示信息可以携带在RRC消息的CSI上报配置(CSI report setting)中。此时,第一指示信息可用来指示多种上报方式中的一种,所述多种上报方式至少包括基于空间接收滤波器的分组上报。具体地,当第一指示信息携带在CSI上报配置中时,例如可以在CSI上报配置(CSI-ReportConfig)这个信息元素(information  element,IE)中携带第一指示信息的指示域,用于通知终端设备当前的CSI上报配置所使用的上报方式。In a possible design, the first indication information may be carried in a CSI report configuration (CSI report setting) of the RRC message. At this time, the first indication information may be used to indicate one of a plurality of reporting methods, and the multiple reporting methods at least include group reporting based on a spatial receiving filter. Specifically, when the first indication information is carried in the CSI report configuration, for example, the indication field of the first indication information may be carried in an information element (CSI-ReportConfig), which is used to notify the terminal. The reporting method used by the device for the current CSI reporting configuration.
应理解,未来协议可能支持不止一种上报方式,例如,除上述第一上报方式(即,基于空间接收滤波器的分组上报方式)之外,可能还有第二、第三上报方式甚至更多的上报方式。其中,第二上报方式例如可以为基于同时接收的分组上报,第三上报方式例如可以为非分组上报等。本申请对此不做限定。It should be understood that future protocols may support more than one reporting method. For example, in addition to the above-mentioned first reporting method (that is, a group reporting method based on a spatial reception filter), there may be second and third reporting methods and even more. Way of reporting. The second reporting method may be, for example, packet reporting based on simultaneous reception, and the third reporting method may be, for example, non-packet reporting. This application does not limit this.
在另一种可能的设计中,该第一指示信息可以携带在上述CSI上报配置的分组上报参数中。此时,第一上报方式可以理解为第一分组上报方式,第一指示信息可用来指示多种分组上报方式中的一种,所述多种分组上报方式至少包括基于空间接收滤波器的分组上报。当第一指示信息携带在CSI上上报配置的分组上报参数中时,例如可以配置在CSI上报配置信息元素中的波束分组上报(groupbasedbeamreporting)参数域中,或者配置在CSI上报配置信息元素中的波束分组上报参数域下的使能(enable)状态下。In another possible design, the first indication information may be carried in a packet reporting parameter of the above-mentioned CSI reporting configuration. At this time, the first reporting method can be understood as the first packet reporting method, and the first indication information can be used to indicate one of multiple packet reporting methods. The multiple packet reporting methods at least include packet reporting based on a spatial receiving filter. . When the first indication information is carried in the packet reporting parameters configured in the CSI reporting, for example, the first indication information may be configured in a beam based reporting field in the CSI reporting configuration information element, or a beam in the CSI reporting configuration information element. The packet is reported in the enabled state in the parameter field.
应理解,未来协议可能支持不止一种分组上报方式,例如,除上述第一上报方式(基于空间接收滤波器的分组上报方式)之外,可能还有第二、第四上报方式甚至更多的上报方式。其中,第二上报方式例如可以为基于同时接收的分组上报,第四上报方式例如可以为基于干扰测量的分组上报等。本申请对此不做限定。It should be understood that future protocols may support more than one reporting method. For example, in addition to the above-mentioned first reporting method (group-based reporting method based on the spatial reception filter), there may be second and fourth reporting methods and even more. Reporting method. The second reporting method may be, for example, packet reporting based on simultaneous reception, and the fourth reporting method may be, for example, packet reporting based on interference measurement. This application does not limit this.
应理解,上文列举的几种可能的上报方式仅为示例,不应对本申请构成任何限定,本申请并不排除在未来的协议中定义更多或者更少的上报方式的可能。It should be understood that the several possible reporting methods listed above are merely examples, and should not constitute any limitation to this application, and this application does not exclude the possibility of defining more or fewer reporting methods in future agreements.
同时,本申请对于指示上报方式的具体方式不做限定,携带该第一指示信息的信息元素或域可以通过枚举的形式,枚举某一种上报方式,例如,该第一指示信息可以指示基于空间接收滤波器的上报方式;也可以通过指示比特来指示某一种上报方式的索引或标识等,例如,该第一指示信息可以指示基于空间接收滤波器的上报方式所对应的索引或标识等。At the same time, this application does not limit the specific manner of the indication reporting method. The information element or field carrying the first indication information may be enumerated in a form of enumeration, for example, the first indication information may indicate Reporting method based on the spatial receiving filter; the index or identification of a certain reporting method may also be indicated by an indication bit, for example, the first indication information may indicate the index or identification corresponding to the reporting method based on the spatial receiving filter Wait.
在又一种可能的设计中,基于CSI上报配置的时域行为不同,该第一指示信息也可以携带在不同的信令中。可选地,该第一指示信息可以携带在RRC消息、MAC CE和DCI的一项或多项中。In another possible design, the time domain behavior based on the CSI reporting configuration is different, and the first indication information may also be carried in different signaling. Optionally, the first indication information may be carried in one or more of an RRC message, a MAC CE, and a DCI.
举例而言,CSI上报配置的时域行为可以是周期性上报,该第一指示信息可以携带在RRC消息中。比如,网络设备可以通过RRC消息发送CSI上报配置和CSI资源配置,该第一指示信息可以在CSI上报配置或CSI资源配置中携带。For example, the time domain behavior of the CSI reporting configuration may be periodic reporting, and the first indication information may be carried in an RRC message. For example, the network device may send a CSI report configuration and a CSI resource configuration through an RRC message, and the first indication information may be carried in the CSI report configuration or the CSI resource configuration.
又例如,CSI上报配置的时域行为可以是半持续上报,该第一指示信息可以携带在MAC CE中。比如,网络设备可以预先通过RRC消息发送CSI上报配置和CSI资源配置。网络设备可以通过MAC CE或DCI激活所述CSI上报配置或者,也可通过MAC CE接活CSI资源配置。该第一指示信息可以携带在该MAC CE或DCI的激活指令中。终端设备在接收到MAC CE或DCI的激活指令时,可以根据该第一指示信息所指示的上报方式进行CSI上报。As another example, the time domain behavior of the CSI reporting configuration may be semi-continuous reporting, and the first indication information may be carried in the MAC CE. For example, the network device may send a CSI report configuration and a CSI resource configuration through an RRC message in advance. The network device can activate the CSI reporting configuration through MAC CE or DCI or can also connect with CSI resource configuration through MAC CE. The first indication information may be carried in an activation instruction of the MAC CE or DCI. When receiving a MAC CE or DCI activation instruction, the terminal device may perform CSI reporting according to the reporting manner indicated by the first instruction information.
再例如,CSI上报配置的时域行为可以是非周期性上报,该第一指示信息可通过RRC消息和DCI联合指示。比如,网络设备可以预先通过RRC消息发送CSI上报配置和CSI资源配置。此后,网络设备可以通过DCI触发CSI上报和/或接收参考信号。该第一指示信息可以携带在该DCI中。即,终端设备可以根据DCI指示的CSI上报方式进行CSI上 报。As another example, the time domain behavior configured by the CSI report may be aperiodic reporting, and the first indication information may be jointly indicated by an RRC message and a DCI. For example, the network device may send a CSI report configuration and a CSI resource configuration through an RRC message in advance. After that, the network device can trigger the CSI report and / or receive the reference signal through DCI. The first indication information may be carried in the DCI. That is, the terminal device can perform CSI reporting according to the CSI reporting mode indicated by the DCI.
应理解,上文中结合不同的实现方式列举了携带上述第一指示信息的各种可能的设计,但这不应对本申请构成任何限定,只要网络设备向终端设备发送第一上报方式的指示信息,均应落入本申请要求的保护范围内。It should be understood that various possible designs for carrying the first indication information are listed above in combination with different implementation manners, but this should not constitute any limitation on this application, as long as the network device sends the indication information of the first reporting method to the terminal device, Shall fall within the scope of protection required by this application.
基于上述技术方案,终端设备可以基于每个接收波束接收到的参考信号进行信道测量和上报,使得网络设备可以获取到更多有关发射波束与接收波束的配对关系的信息。网络设备可以根据该波束配对关系进行更合理的进行波束管理,从而更大程度地获得波束赋形的增益,有利于提高系统性能。并且,终端设备可以基于多个接收波束接收的参考信号进行信道测量和上报,使得网络设备可以获取多个接收波束与发射波束的配对关系,在终端设备发生倾侧或翻转导致某一接收波束对应的TCI状态列表失效时,网络设备还可以切换到其他质量较好的无线链路所对应的发射波束,以使终端设备切换到相对应的接收波束接收信号,这样可以避免频繁地触发波束失败恢复流程。因此,可以提高波束配对关系的鲁棒性,也就可以提高通信系统的鲁棒性,有利于提高传输效率,同时有利于提高用户体验。Based on the above technical solution, the terminal device can perform channel measurement and reporting based on the reference signal received by each receiving beam, so that the network device can obtain more information about the pairing relationship between the transmitting beam and the receiving beam. The network device can perform more reasonable beam management according to the beam pairing relationship, so as to obtain a beam forming gain to a greater extent, which is beneficial to improving system performance. In addition, the terminal device can perform channel measurement and reporting based on the reference signals received by multiple receiving beams, so that the network device can obtain the pairing relationship between multiple receiving beams and transmitting beams, and a tilting or flipping of the terminal device results in a corresponding receiving beam When the TCI status list is invalid, the network device can also switch to the transmit beam corresponding to another wireless link with better quality, so that the terminal device switches to the corresponding receive beam to receive the signal, which can avoid frequent triggering of the beam failure recovery process. . Therefore, the robustness of the beam pairing relationship can be improved, which can also improve the robustness of the communication system, which is beneficial to improving the transmission efficiency and at the same time it is beneficial to improving the user experience.
出于鲁棒性的考虑,网络设备应该尽量监控基于终端设备不同接收波束的无线链路质量,这样即便由于终端设备倾侧或翻转导致其当前使用的接收波束的接收质量下降,在监控到其他链路质量较好的接收波束时,终端设备可以进行接收波束切换,进而可以避免频繁地触发波束失败恢复流程。For the sake of robustness, network equipment should try to monitor the quality of the wireless link based on the different receiving beams of the terminal equipment, so that even if the terminal equipment tilts or rolls over, the receiving quality of the currently used receiving beam is reduced, and other chains are being monitored. When receiving beams with better channel quality, the terminal device can switch the receive beam, thereby avoiding frequent triggering of beam failure recovery procedures.
有鉴于此,本申请另提出了波束多样性质量监测机制。波束多样性质量监测机制以监控基于终端设备不同接收波束的无线链路质量为目标。网络设备和终端设备之间可以维护基于多个波束或波束对的多条无线链路的质量。其中,终端设备可以通过接收网络设备的配置信息,测量获得上述与多个波束或波束对对应的多条无线链路的质量(也就是测量多个波束质量),并按照网络设备的配置将测量得到的结果上报,以使得网络设备能够获得多条无线链路的质量监测结果。In view of this, this application further proposes a beam diversity quality monitoring mechanism. The beam diversity quality monitoring mechanism aims to monitor the radio link quality based on different receiving beams of the terminal equipment. The quality of multiple wireless links based on multiple beams or beam pairs can be maintained between the network equipment and the terminal equipment. The terminal device can receive the configuration information of the network device, measure and obtain the quality of the multiple wireless links corresponding to multiple beams or beam pairs (that is, measure the quality of multiple beams), and measure the quality according to the configuration of the network device. The obtained results are reported, so that the network device can obtain the quality monitoring results of multiple wireless links.
因此,网络设备在步骤220中接收到终端设备上报的一个或多个CSI之后,可以进一步确定用于波束多样性质量监控的参考信号资源集合。基于该参考信号资源集合发送的参考信号可用于检测与多个波束或波束对对应的多条无线链路的质量。Therefore, after receiving one or more CSIs reported by the terminal device in step 220, the network device may further determine a reference signal resource set for beam diversity quality monitoring. The reference signal sent based on the reference signal resource set can be used to detect the quality of multiple wireless links corresponding to multiple beams or beam pairs.
在步骤230之后,可选地,该方法200还包括:步骤280,终端设备接收第三指示信息,该第三指示信息用于指示多个参考信号资源,该多个参考信号资源由至少两组测量报告确定。After step 230, optionally, the method 200 further includes: step 280, the terminal device receives third indication information, where the third indication information is used to indicate multiple reference signal resources, and the multiple reference signal resources are composed of at least two groups Measurement report confirmed.
相应地,在步骤280中,网络设备发送上述第三指示信息,该第三指示信息用于指示多个参考信号资源,该多个参考信号资源由至少两组测量报告确定。Correspondingly, in step 280, the network device sends the third instruction information, where the third instruction information is used to indicate multiple reference signal resources, where the multiple reference signal resources are determined by at least two sets of measurement reports.
该第三指示信息所指示的多个参考信号资源即为用于上述波束多样性质量监测的参考信号资源。The multiple reference signal resources indicated by the third indication information are reference signal resources used for the foregoing beam diversity quality monitoring.
具体地,上述测量报告可以为上文中步骤210和步骤220中描述的测量报告,每组测量报告可对应于一个空间接收滤波器,不同组的测量报告对应不同的空间接收滤波器。可选地,该第三指示信息包括多个参考信号资源的标识,且该多个参考信号资源的标识来自至少两组上述测量报告。换言之,该第三指示信息所指示的多个参考信号资源可以与至少两个空间接收滤波器对应。应理解,参考信号资源的标识仅为第三指示信息的一例,不应对本申请构成任何限定,该第三指示信息也可以为其他用于指示参考信号资源的信息。Specifically, the above measurement reports may be the measurement reports described in steps 210 and 220 above. Each group of measurement reports may correspond to one spatial reception filter, and different groups of measurement reports correspond to different spatial reception filters. Optionally, the third indication information includes identifiers of multiple reference signal resources, and the identifiers of the multiple reference signal resources are from at least two groups of the foregoing measurement reports. In other words, the multiple reference signal resources indicated by the third indication information may correspond to at least two spatial receiving filters. It should be understood that the identifier of the reference signal resource is only an example of the third indication information and should not be construed as any limitation in this application. The third indication information may also be other information used to indicate the reference signal resource.
在一种实现方式中,该第三指示信息所指示的多个参考信号资源与多个空间接收滤波器一一对应。In an implementation manner, the plurality of reference signal resources indicated by the third indication information correspond to the plurality of spatial receiving filters on a one-to-one basis.
换句话说,每个参考信号资源可对应一个空间接收滤波器,或者说,每个参考信号资源可以是由上文中所描述的一组测量报告确定。该多个参考信号资源可以是网络设备配置给终端设备以进行波束多样性质量监控的。在一种可能的设计中,该第三指示信息所指示的多个参考信号资源可以通过高层信令配置,例如,通过RRC消息配置一个参考信号资源集合,例如记作q A,该参考信号资源集合q A可以包括上述与多个空间接收滤波器一一对应的多个参考信号资源。 In other words, each reference signal resource may correspond to a spatial receiving filter, or each reference signal resource may be determined by a set of measurement reports described above. The multiple reference signal resources may be configured by the network device to the terminal device to perform beam diversity quality monitoring. In a possible design, the multiple reference signal resources indicated by the third indication information may be configured through high-level signaling, for example, a reference signal resource set is configured through an RRC message, for example, denoted as q A , the reference signal resource. The set q A may include the plurality of reference signal resources corresponding to the plurality of spatial receiving filters on a one-to-one basis.
在另一种实现方式中,该第三指示信息所指示的多个参考信号资源可对应多个空间接收滤波器。In another implementation manner, the multiple reference signal resources indicated by the third indication information may correspond to multiple spatial receiving filters.
例如,I个参考信号资源可对应于J个空间接收滤波器,(I>J>1,I、J为整数)。具体地,该I个参考信号资源中的L个参考信号资源可对应于J个空间接收滤波器,剩余的I-J个参考信号资源可对应于J个空间接收滤波器中的至少一个。其中,L≥J,L为整数。可以理解,当L=J时,该L个参考信号资源与J个空间接收滤波器一一对应,当L>J时,该L个参考信号资源中至少有J个参考信号资源与J个空间接收滤波器一一对应。For example, I reference signal resources may correspond to J spatial receiving filters (I> J> 1, I and J are integers). Specifically, the L reference signal resources of the I reference signal resources may correspond to J spatial receiving filters, and the remaining I-J reference signal resources may correspond to at least one of the J spatial receiving filters. Among them, L≥J, and L is an integer. It can be understood that when L = J, the L reference signal resources correspond to the J space receiving filters one by one. When L> J, there are at least J reference signal resources and J spaces in the L reference signal resources. Receive filters correspond one-to-one.
在这种设计中,该第三指示信息所指示的多个参考信号资源可分为第一资源组和第二资源组。其中,第一资源组中的参考信号资源例如可对应于上述I-L个参考信号资源,可用于现有协议中定义的波束失败监测;第二资源组中的参考信号资源可对应于上述L个参考信号资源,可用于波束多样性质量监测。In this design, the multiple reference signal resources indicated by the third indication information can be divided into a first resource group and a second resource group. The reference signal resources in the first resource group may correspond to, for example, the above-mentioned IL reference signal resources, and may be used for beam failure monitoring defined in the existing protocol; the reference signal resources in the second resource group may correspond to the above-mentioned L references. Signal resources can be used for beam diversity quality monitoring.
具体地,当基于用于波束失败监测的参考信号资源(即,第一资源组中的参考信号资源)进行波束质量测量所得到的测量结果满足预设条件时,该测量结果可以被计入波束失败次数统计。例如,该第一资源组可以为上文中所介绍的Beam-Failure-Detection-RS-ResourceConfig中所配置的参考信号资源集合q 0。当波束失败次数大于波束失败实例最大次数(beamFailureInstanceMaxCount)时,可触发波束失败恢复流程。应理解,波束失败检测的具体过程和方法可参考现有技术,为了简洁,这里省略对其具体过程和方法的详细说明。 Specifically, when a measurement result obtained by performing beam quality measurement based on a reference signal resource (ie, a reference signal resource in a first resource group) used for beam failure monitoring satisfies a preset condition, the measurement result may be counted into a beam Failure count. For example, the first resource group may be the reference signal resource set q 0 configured in Beam-Failure-Detection-RS-ResourceConfig introduced above. When the number of beam failures is greater than the beamFailureInstanceMaxCount, a beam failure recovery process may be triggered. It should be understood that the specific process and method of beam failure detection can refer to the prior art. For brevity, detailed description of the specific process and method is omitted here.
与此相对地,当基于用于波束多样性质量监测的参考信号资源(即,第二资源组中的参考信号资源)进行波束质量测量时,所得到的测量结果不被计入波束失败次数统计。In contrast, when the beam quality measurement is performed based on the reference signal resources (that is, the reference signal resources in the second resource group) for beam diversity quality monitoring, the measurement results obtained are not included in the beam failure count. .
由于上述L个参考信号资源的波束质量监测的测量结果可以不被计入波束失败次数统计。此时,网络设备除了通过第三指示信息向终端设备指示I个参考信号资源之外,还可以通过额外的指示信息通知终端设备上述L个参考信号资源。因此,在步骤230之后,可选地,该方法200还包括步骤290:网络设备发送第五指示信息,该第五指示信息用于指示L个参考信号资源。The measurement results of the beam quality monitoring of the L reference signal resources may not be included in the statistics of the number of beam failures. At this time, in addition to indicating the I reference signal resources to the terminal device by using the third instruction information, the network device may also notify the terminal device of the L reference signal resources by using the additional instruction information. Therefore, after step 230, optionally, the method 200 further includes step 290: the network device sends fifth indication information, where the fifth indication information is used to indicate L reference signal resources.
相应地,在步骤290中,终端设备接收上述第五指示信息。Accordingly, in step 290, the terminal device receives the foregoing fifth instruction information.
具体地,该第五指示信息所指示的第二资源组中的参考信号资源可以为上述L个参考信号资源。该第五指示信息具体可以为该L个参考信号资源的标识,或标识序列,或者,该L个参考信号资源在I个参考信号资源中的索引,或索引序列。该第五指示信息也可以指示参考信号资源的数量L,例如,可通过协议约定上述L个参考信号资源总是按照顺序放在I个参考信号的最开头或最末尾,终端设备只需知道数量L,便可以知道哪些参考信 号资源是不被计入波束失败次数统计的。Specifically, the reference signal resources in the second resource group indicated by the fifth indication information may be the aforementioned L reference signal resources. The fifth indication information may specifically be an identifier of the L reference signal resources, or an identification sequence, or an index of the L reference signal resources in the I reference signal resource, or an index sequence. The fifth indication information may also indicate the number L of reference signal resources. For example, it may be agreed through the protocol that the above-mentioned L reference signal resources are always placed at the beginning or end of the I reference signals in order. L, you can know which reference signal resources are not counted in the beam failure count.
应理解,上文列举了两种配置参考信号资源的可能的实现方式,但这不应对本申请构成任何限定,本申请对于配置参考信号资源的具体方式不做限定。It should be understood that the foregoing lists two possible implementation manners for configuring reference signal resources, but this should not constitute any limitation on this application, and this application does not limit the specific manner of configuring reference signal resources.
可选地,该方法200还包括:网络设备基于该多个参考信号资源发送参考信号。Optionally, the method 200 further includes: the network device sends a reference signal based on the multiple reference signal resources.
相应地,终端设备基于该多个参考信号资源接收参考信号。Accordingly, the terminal device receives a reference signal based on the plurality of reference signal resources.
终端设备可以基于步骤280中接收的第三指示信息,基于多个参考信号资源接收网络设备发送的参考信号,以评估无线链路质量。The terminal device may receive the reference signal sent by the network device based on the third reference information received in step 280, based on the multiple reference signal resources, to evaluate the radio link quality.
应理解,在波束多样性质量监测中,终端设备基于配置的参考信号资源进行波束质量测量的具体方法可以参考现有技术中波束失败监测中基于参考信号资源进行波束质量测量的具体方法,为了简洁,这里省略对该具体方法的详细说明。需要注意的是,在本申请所提出的波束多样性质量监测中,网络设备所配置的参考信号资源可对应于终端设备的多个接收波束,因此可以对于多个接收波束对应的多条无线链路进行质量监测。It should be understood that in the beam diversity quality monitoring, the specific method for the terminal device to perform beam quality measurement based on the configured reference signal resource may refer to the specific method for beam quality measurement based on the reference signal resource in the prior art for beam failure monitoring. Here, a detailed description of the specific method is omitted here. It should be noted that in the beam diversity quality monitoring proposed in this application, the reference signal resources configured by the network device may correspond to multiple receive beams of the terminal device, so multiple wireless chains corresponding to multiple receive beams may be used. Road for quality monitoring.
当网络设备通过上述基于空间接收滤波器的分组上报方法获得终端设备基于空间接收滤波器的测量报告,并配置用于波束多样性质量监测的参考信号资源后,终端设备可以通过波束多样性质量监测机制获得基于不同空间接收滤波器的波束质量。After the network device obtains the measurement report of the terminal device based on the spatial reception filter through the packet reporting method based on the spatial reception filter, and configures a reference signal resource for beam diversity quality monitoring, the terminal device can use the beam diversity quality monitoring The mechanism obtains beam quality based on different spatial receive filters.
由于无论是控制信道或是数据信道的传输,终端设备都会获得网络设备通过信令指示的一个空间接收滤波器的指示信息,例如上文所述的TCI状态列表,其具体的指示方法可参考现有技术,在此不再赘述。当控制信道或数据信道的传输质量下降时,例如其BLER、SNR或SINR下降,通过波束多样性质量监测机制,终端设备可能会发现当前使用的空间接收滤波器所对应的波束质量下降了,而其他空间接收滤波器所对应的波束质量上升或维持在一个较好的水准。其中,所述较好的水准例如可以是一个门限。此时,终端设备可通过如下的实现方式来避免进入波束失败恢复。在一种实现方式中,终端设备可以首先自行调整空间接收滤波器,在调整后可以将该调整信息上报给网络设备。这种实现方式的有益效果是,终端设备通过直接调整空间接收滤波器,当前链路的通信不容易中断,并且调整了空间接收滤波器后的链路质量可能可以恢复到门限以上,可以保证正常通信。终端设备可以在确保正常通信的前提下,再将该空间接收滤波器的调整信息(即,接收波束的调整信息)上报网络设备,以帮助网络设备调整发射波束。Because no matter whether it is a control channel or a data channel transmission, the terminal device will obtain the indication information of a spatial reception filter indicated by the network device through signaling, such as the TCI status list described above. For the specific indication method, please refer to the current There are technologies, which are not repeated here. When the transmission quality of the control channel or data channel decreases, for example, its BLER, SNR, or SINR decreases, through the beam diversity quality monitoring mechanism, the terminal device may find that the beam quality corresponding to the currently used spatial receiving filter decreases, and The quality of the beams corresponding to other spatial receiving filters has risen or maintained at a better level. The better level may be a threshold, for example. At this time, the terminal device can avoid the failure to recover from entering the beam through the following implementation methods. In an implementation manner, the terminal device may first adjust the spatial receiving filter by itself, and may report the adjustment information to the network device after the adjustment. The beneficial effect of this implementation mode is that the terminal device directly adjusts the spatial reception filter, the current link communication is not easy to be interrupted, and the link quality after adjusting the spatial reception filter may be restored to above the threshold, which can ensure normality. Communication. The terminal device can report the adjustment information of the spatial receiving filter (that is, the adjustment information of the received beam) to the network device on the premise of ensuring normal communication, to help the network device adjust the transmit beam.
可选地,终端设备可以通过物理随机接入信道(physical random access channel,PRACH)上报所述空间接收滤波器的调整信息。Optionally, the terminal device may report adjustment information of the spatial receiving filter through a physical random access channel (physical random access channel (PRACH)).
可选地,终端设备可以通过物理上行控制信道(physical uplink control channel,PUCCH)上报所述空间接收滤波器的调整信息。Optionally, the terminal device may report the adjustment information of the spatial receiving filter through a physical uplink control channel (PUCCH).
所述空间接收滤波器的调整信息为终端设备选择的那一个空间接收滤波器所对应的标识,该标识可以为与空间接收滤波器对应的参考信号资源的指示信息,该参考信号资源的指示信息例如可以为上文所列举的参考信号资源在参考信号资源集合中的索引或参考信号资源的标识等,本申请对此不做限定。可以理解的是,所述参考信号资源为配置在用于波束多样性质量监测的参考信号资源集合中的某一个参考信号资源。The adjustment information of the spatial reception filter is an identifier corresponding to the spatial reception filter selected by the terminal device, and the identifier may be indication information of a reference signal resource corresponding to the spatial reception filter, and the indication information of the reference signal resource. For example, it may be an index of the reference signal resource listed in the reference signal resource set or an identifier of the reference signal resource, which is not limited in this application. It can be understood that the reference signal resource is a certain reference signal resource configured in a reference signal resource set used for beam diversity quality monitoring.
可选地,网络设备将发射波束的调整信息通知终端设备。该通知信息例如可携带在RRC,MAC-CE或动态信令中。该调整信息可以是一个指示信息(indication),也可以是一个确认信息(acknowlegeement)或响应(response)。Optionally, the network device notifies the terminal device of the adjustment information of the transmission beam. The notification information may be carried in RRC, MAC-CE, or dynamic signaling, for example. The adjustment information may be an indication, an acknowlegeement, or a response.
可选地,网络设备无需将发射波束的调整信息通知终端设备。此时终端设备可默认网络设备根据所述空间接收滤波器的调整信息调整了发射波束。Optionally, the network device does not need to notify the terminal device of the adjustment information of the transmission beam. At this time, the terminal device may default the network device to adjust the transmit beam according to the adjustment information of the spatial receiving filter.
在另一种实现方式中,终端设备可以根据波束多样性质量监测结果,将较优的空间接收滤波器上报给网络设备,然后再由网络设备选择并指示对应的空间接收滤波器给终端设备。In another implementation manner, the terminal device may report a better spatial receiving filter to the network device according to the monitoring result of the beam diversity quality, and then the network device selects and instructs the corresponding spatial receiving filter to the terminal device.
基于上述技术方案,网络设备可以为终端设备配置对应了不同接收波束的参考信号资源,因此在终端设备发生倾侧或翻转导致部分接收波束的接收质量下降时,可以使用其他接收波束评估无线链路质量。从而可以避免频繁地进入波束失败恢复,有利于提高波束配对关系的鲁棒性,从而有利于提高传输系统的鲁棒性,并且有利于提高用户体验。Based on the above technical solution, the network device can configure the terminal device with reference signal resources corresponding to different receiving beams. Therefore, when the terminal device's tilt or rollover causes the reception quality of some of the receiving beams to decrease, other receiving beams can be used to evaluate the wireless link quality . Thereby, frequent failure recovery from entering the beam can be avoided, which is beneficial to improving the robustness of the beam pairing relationship, thereby improving the robustness of the transmission system, and improving the user experience.
本申请还提供了一种接收和发送参考信号的方法,有利于提高传输系统的鲁棒性和用户体验。This application also provides a method for receiving and sending reference signals, which is beneficial to improving the robustness and user experience of the transmission system.
图3是从设备交互的角度示出的本申请另一实施例提供的接收和发送参考信号的方法300的示意性流程图。如图所示,图3中示出的方法300包括:步骤310至步骤330。下面结合图3对方法300进行详细说明。FIG. 3 is a schematic flowchart of a method 300 for receiving and sending a reference signal according to another embodiment of the present application, which is shown from the perspective of device interaction. As shown, the method 300 shown in FIG. 3 includes steps 310 to 330. The method 300 is described in detail below with reference to FIG. 3.
在步骤310中,网络设备发送第三指示信息,该第三指示信息用于指示多个参考信号资源,该多个参考信号资源与至少两个空间接收滤波器对应。In step 310, the network device sends third indication information, where the third indication information is used to indicate multiple reference signal resources, and the multiple reference signal resources correspond to at least two spatial receiving filters.
相应地,在步骤310中,终端设备接收第三指示信息,该第三指示信息用于指示多个参考信号资源,该多个参考信号资源与至少两个空间接收滤波器对应。Correspondingly, in step 310, the terminal device receives third indication information, where the third indication information is used to indicate multiple reference signal resources that correspond to at least two spatial receiving filters.
具体地,该第三指示信息所指示的多个参考信号资源可用于波束多样性质量监控。该多个参考信号资源可对应于至少两个空间接收滤波器。其中,任一个空间接收滤波器可对应一个或多个参考信号资源。若终端设备基于空间接收滤波器进行分组上报,则每组测量报告是基于一个空间接收滤波器接收到的参考信号测量得到。其中,该测量报告可以为上文中方法200中所描述基于空间接收滤波器分组上报的测量报告。Specifically, the multiple reference signal resources indicated by the third indication information may be used for beam diversity quality monitoring. The multiple reference signal resources may correspond to at least two spatial receiving filters. Any one of the spatial receiving filters may correspond to one or more reference signal resources. If the terminal device reports in groups based on the spatial receiving filter, each group of measurement reports is measured based on a reference signal received by a spatial receiving filter. The measurement report may be a measurement report reported based on the spatial receiving filter packet described in the method 200 above.
应理解,波束多样性质量监测在上文方法200中已经做了详细说明,为了简洁,这里不再赘述。It should be understood that the beam diversity quality monitoring has been described in detail in the method 200 above, and for the sake of brevity, it will not be repeated here.
还应理解,方法300中的步骤310与上文中的方法200中的步骤280相同。由于上文已经结合图2对步骤280做了详细说明,为了简洁,这里不再赘述。It should also be understood that step 310 in method 300 is the same as step 280 in method 200 above. Since step 280 has been described in detail with reference to FIG. 2 above, for the sake of brevity, it will not be repeated here.
在步骤320中,网络设备在该多个参考信号资源上发送参考信号。In step 320, the network device sends a reference signal on the multiple reference signal resources.
相应地,在步骤320中,终端设备在该多个参考信号资源上接收参考信号。Accordingly, in step 320, the terminal device receives a reference signal on the multiple reference signal resources.
可选地,该第三指示信息所指示的多个参考信号资源与多个空间接收滤波器一一对应。Optionally, the plurality of reference signal resources indicated by the third indication information correspond to the plurality of spatial receiving filters on a one-to-one basis.
可选地,该第三指示信息所指示的多个参考信号资源可对应多个空间接收滤波器。例如,I个参考信号资源与J个空间接收滤波器对应,I>J>1,且I、J为整数。Optionally, the multiple reference signal resources indicated by the third indication information may correspond to multiple spatial receiving filters. For example, I reference signal resources correspond to J spatial receiving filters, I> J> 1, and I and J are integers.
该多个参考信号资源包括第一资源组和第二资源组,该第二资源组包括与J个空间接收滤波器对应的L(L≥J)个参考信号资源,第一资源组包括与J个空间接收滤波器中的至少一个对应的I-L个参考信号资源。其中,仅有第一资源组中的参考信号资源的波束质量监测结果可以被计入波束失败次数统计,例如,该第一资源组中的参考信号资源可以为上文中所介绍的Beam-Failure-Detection-RS-ResourceConfig中的q 0The multiple reference signal resources include a first resource group and a second resource group. The second resource group includes L (L ≧ J) reference signal resources corresponding to the J spatial receiving filters. The first resource group includes IL reference signal resources corresponding to at least one of the three spatial receiving filters. Among them, only the beam quality monitoring results of the reference signal resources in the first resource group can be counted into the number of beam failures. For example, the reference signal resources in the first resource group can be the Beam-Failure- Q 0 in Detection-RS-ResourceConfig.
可选地,该方法300还包括:步骤330,网络设备发送第五指示信息,该第五指示信 息指示第二资源组中的参考信号资源。Optionally, the method 300 further includes: Step 330: The network device sends fifth indication information, where the fifth indication information indicates a reference signal resource in the second resource group.
相应地,在步骤330中,终端设备接收上述第五指示信息。Accordingly, in step 330, the terminal device receives the foregoing fifth instruction information.
应理解,方法300中的步骤330与上文中的方法200中的步骤290相同。由于上文中已经结合图2中对步骤290做了详细说明,为了简洁,这里不再赘述。It should be understood that step 330 in method 300 is the same as step 290 in method 200 above. Since step 290 has been described in detail in conjunction with FIG. 2 above, for the sake of brevity, it will not be repeated here.
基于上述技术方案,网络设备可以为终端设备配置对应了不同接收波束的参考信号资源,因此在终端设备发生倾侧或翻转导致部分接收波束的接收质量下降时,可以使用其他接收波束评估无线链路质量。从而可以避免频繁地进入波束失败恢复,有利于提高传输系统的鲁棒性,并且有利于提高用户体验。Based on the above technical solution, the network device can configure the terminal device with reference signal resources corresponding to different receiving beams. Therefore, when the terminal device is tilted or flipped and the receiving quality of some receiving beams is degraded, other receiving beams can be used to evaluate the quality of the wireless link. . Thus, frequent failure recovery of beams can be avoided, which is beneficial to improving the robustness of the transmission system and to improving the user experience.
本申请还提供了一种接收和发送CSI的方法,有利于提高系统鲁棒性。This application also provides a method for receiving and sending CSI, which is beneficial to improve the robustness of the system.
图4是从设备交互的角度示出的本申请又一实施例提供的接收和发送CSI的方法的示意性流程图。如图所示,图4示出的方法400包括步骤410至步骤450。下面结合图4对方法400进行详细说明。FIG. 4 is a schematic flowchart of a method for receiving and sending CSI according to another embodiment of the present application, which is shown from the perspective of device interaction. As shown, the method 400 shown in FIG. 4 includes steps 410 to 450. The method 400 is described in detail below with reference to FIG. 4.
在步骤410中,终端设备生成CSI,该CSI包括一组或多组测量信息,每组测量信息是基于可被同时接收的多个参考信号测量得到,每组测量信息至少包括第一指示比特,该第一指示比特用于指示接收该多个参考信号的空间接收滤波器的数量。In step 410, the terminal device generates CSI, where the CSI includes one or more sets of measurement information, each set of measurement information is obtained based on multiple reference signal measurements that can be received simultaneously, and each set of measurement information includes at least a first indication bit, The first indication bit is used to indicate the number of spatial receiving filters that receive the multiple reference signals.
在步骤420中,终端设备发送该CSI。In step 420, the terminal device sends the CSI.
相应地,在步骤420中,网络设备接收该CSI。Accordingly, in step 420, the network device receives the CSI.
在步骤430在,网络设备根据CSI,确定每组测量信息所对应的多个参考信号是否被同一个空间接收滤波器接收。In step 430, the network device determines whether multiple reference signals corresponding to each set of measurement information are received by the same spatial receiving filter according to the CSI.
也就是说,终端设备可以基于可被同时接收到的多个参考信号进行测量,并将基于可被同时接收到的多个参考信号测量得到的结果通过测量信息的形式上报给网络设备。That is, the terminal device can measure based on multiple reference signals that can be received simultaneously, and report the results obtained based on the multiple reference signals that can be received simultaneously to the network device in the form of measurement information.
其中,每组测量信息可对应多个参考信号资源,如,每组测量信息可包括多个参考信号资源的标识,或者,每组测量信息可包括根据预先约定的多个参考信号资源进行测量得到的RSRP。而参考信号是基于参考信号资源传输的,因此每组测量信息可对应多个参考信号。Each group of measurement information may correspond to multiple reference signal resources. For example, each group of measurement information may include identifiers of multiple reference signal resources, or each group of measurement information may include measurements obtained according to multiple predetermined reference signal resources. RSRP. The reference signal is transmitted based on the reference signal resource, so each set of measurement information can correspond to multiple reference signals.
该测量信息中还可以包括用于指示接收该多个参考信号的空间接收滤波器的数量的指示比特,以便网络设备获知每一组测量信息所对应的多个参考信号可以由一个还是多个空间接收滤波器接收到。从而有利于网络设备获取更多的关于接收波束与发射波束对应关系的信息。The measurement information may further include an indication bit for indicating the number of spatial receiving filters that receive the multiple reference signals, so that the network device learns whether the multiple reference signals corresponding to each set of measurement information can be composed of one or more spaces. Receive filter received. Therefore, it is beneficial for the network device to obtain more information about the correspondence between the receiving beam and the transmitting beam.
例如,当第一指示比特指示该测量信息所对应的多个参考信号是基于同一个空间接收滤波器接收,则网络设备可直接确定该测量信息中的多个参考信号资源对应于同一个空间接收滤波器,也就可以确定该多个参考信号资源对应的发射波束对应于一个接收波束。For example, when the first indication bit indicates that multiple reference signals corresponding to the measurement information are received based on the same spatial reception filter, the network device may directly determine that multiple reference signal resources in the measurement information correspond to the same spatial reception. The filter can also determine that the transmit beam corresponding to the multiple reference signal resources corresponds to a receive beam.
可选地,在步骤410之前,该方法400还包括:步骤440,网络设备发送参考信号,该参考信号用于信道测量。Optionally, before step 410, the method 400 further includes: step 440, the network device sends a reference signal, where the reference signal is used for channel measurement.
相应地,在步骤440中,终端设备接收参考信号,该参考信号用于信道测量。Accordingly, in step 440, the terminal device receives a reference signal, which is used for channel measurement.
应理解,步骤440与上文中方法200中的步骤240相同,为了简洁,这里不再赘述。It should be understood that step 440 is the same as step 240 in method 200 described above. For brevity, details are not described herein again.
需要说明的是,这里所说的“可被同时接收”指的是,终端设备具有同时接收多个参考信号的能力,而并不代表该多个参考信号一定被终端设备同时接收到。是否可被同时接收与终端设备的能力相关。It should be noted that “can be received simultaneously” here means that the terminal device has the ability to receive multiple reference signals at the same time, and does not mean that the multiple reference signals must be received by the terminal device at the same time. Whether it can be received simultaneously is related to the capabilities of the terminal device.
举例而言,假设终端设备具有同一时刻通过两个接收波束接收的能力,称为接收波束#1和接收波束#2,而网络设备的发射波束#1-#8通过轮询的方式发送,假设对接收波束#1而言,发射波束#1的信道质量最好,对接收波束#2而言,发射波束#6的信道质量最好。由于接收波束#1和#2是可以同时接收的,所以发射波束#1和#6虽然是经过轮询发送,但如果它们被网络设备同时发射,终端设备也可以同时接收。假如终端设备同一时刻只能通过一个接收波束接收,则上述例子中的发射波束#1和#6只有在被这同一个接收波束接收到的情况下,才能被认为可以被终端设备同时接收。For example, suppose that the terminal device has the ability to receive through two receiving beams at the same time, which are called receiving beam # 1 and receiving beam # 2, and the transmitting beams # 1- # 8 of the network device are sent by polling. For receiving beam # 1, the channel quality of transmitting beam # 1 is the best, and for receiving beam # 2, the channel quality of transmitting beam # 6 is the best. Because the receiving beams # 1 and # 2 can be received at the same time, although the transmitting beams # 1 and # 6 are transmitted through polling, if they are transmitted by the network device at the same time, the terminal device can also receive at the same time. If the terminal equipment can only be received by one receiving beam at the same time, the transmitting beams # 1 and # 6 in the above example can be considered to be simultaneously received by the terminal equipment only when they are received by the same receiving beam.
在现有技术中,终端设备可以上报两个参考信号资源标识,该两个参考信号资源标识可以被终端设备同时接收,但现有技术并不区分,这两个参考信号资源标识是被终端设备同一个空间接收滤波器接收的,或是多个空间接收滤波器接收。In the prior art, a terminal device can report two reference signal resource identifiers, and the two reference signal resource identifiers can be received by the terminal device at the same time, but the prior art does not distinguish between these two reference signal resource identifiers. Received by the same spatial reception filter, or received by multiple spatial reception filters.
在本申请实施例中,终端设备可以根据可被同时接收的多个参考信号测量得到的结果分组上报,并在上报测量结果的同时通过第一指示比特进一步指示所上报的可被同时接收的多个参考信号是被同一接收波束同时接收,还是被多个接收波束同时接收。为便于与上文中基于空间接收滤波器的分组上报的测量报告区分,在本实施例中,可以将基于可被同时接收到的多个参考信号测量得到的多个测量结果归为一组测量信息。In the embodiment of the present application, the terminal device may report in groups according to the measurement results of multiple reference signals that can be received at the same time, and further indicate the reported multiple signals that can be received at the same time through the first indication bit while reporting the measurement results. Whether the two reference signals are received by the same receiving beam at the same time or by multiple receiving beams at the same time. In order to distinguish the measurement report from the group report based on the spatial receiving filter in the foregoing, in this embodiment, multiple measurement results obtained based on multiple reference signal measurements that can be received simultaneously can be classified as a set of measurement information. .
其中,每个测量结果可包括以下一项或多项:Among them, each measurement result can include one or more of the following:
参考信号资源的标识;和Identification of reference signal resources; and
参考信号接收功率信息。Reference signal received power information.
应理解,参考信号资源的标识和参考信号接收功率信息是相对应的。即,每个参考信号接收功率信息可以是基于一个参考信号资源的标识所指示的参考信号资源接收参考信号并进行测量得到的。但本申请对于终端设备上报的具体内容并不限定,如上所述,该测量结果可以仅包括参考信号资源的标识,也可以仅包括参考信号接收功率信息,也可以包括参考信号资源的标识和参考信号接收功率信息,甚至还可以包括除参考信号资源的标识或参考信号接收功率信息外的其他信息。It should be understood that the identifier of the reference signal resource corresponds to the received power information of the reference signal. That is, each reference signal received power information may be obtained by receiving a reference signal based on a reference signal resource indicated by an identifier of a reference signal resource and performing measurement. However, this application does not limit the specific content reported by the terminal device. As described above, the measurement result may include only the identifier of the reference signal resource, or only the reference signal received power information, or the identifier and reference of the reference signal resource. The signal received power information may even include information other than the identification of the reference signal resource or the reference signal received power information.
另外,参考信号资源的标识和参考信号接收功率信息的具体内容在上文方法200中已经做了详细说明,为了简洁,这里不再赘述。In addition, the specific content of the reference signal resource identification and the reference signal received power information has been described in detail in the method 200 above. For the sake of brevity, it will not be repeated here.
除了上述多个测量结果之外,一组测量信息还可包括一个第一指示比特,用于指示该组测量信息中的多个测量结果对应的多个参考信号是否由同一个空间接收滤波器接收。In addition to the above multiple measurement results, a set of measurement information may further include a first indication bit, which is used to indicate whether multiple reference signals corresponding to the multiple measurement results in the set of measurement information are received by the same spatial receiving filter. .
在一种实现方式中,协议可以预先定义一种新的上报量report quantity,该report quantity可通过高层参数指示。协议可进一步通过CSI report setting配置与该report quantity对应的格式,例如“CRI-RSRP-nrofReceivedBeam”、或“CRI-nrofReceivedBeam”、或“RSRP-nrofReceivedBeam”、或“SSBRI-RSRP-nrofReceivedBeam”、或“SSBRI-nrofReceivedBeam”等。其中,“nrofReceivedBeam”为上文所述的第一指示比特。其中RSRP可直接上报RSRP的绝对数值,也可以通过差分方式上报。In an implementation manner, the protocol may define a new report quantity in advance, and the report quantity may be indicated by a high-level parameter. The protocol can further configure the format corresponding to the report through CSI reporting settings, such as "CRI-RSRP-nrofReceivedBeam", or "CRI-nrofReceivedBeam", or "RSRP-nrofReceivedBeam", or "SSBRI-RSRP-nrofReceivedBeam", or "SSBRI-RSRP-nrofReceivedBeam", or SSBRI-nrofReceivedBeam "and so on. Wherein, "nrofReceivedBeam" is the first indication bit described above. Among them, RSRP can directly report the absolute value of RSRP, or it can be reported in a differential manner.
可选地,终端设备配置的report quantity包含所述第一指示比特的情况下,终端设备可以根据实际的测量结果,在CSI上报时将该bit置“0”表示所上报的参考信号资源标识可以同时被一个空间接收滤波器接收,反之置“1”表示所上报的参考信号资源标识可以同时被多个空间接收滤波器接收。在本实施例中,可选地,协议默认当该第一指示比特置“1”时,所上报的参考信号资源标识与空间接收滤波器之间有一一对应关系,例如上报两个 CRI时,该两个CRI分别被两个空间接收滤波器同时接收,同时也相当于默认终端设备具有同时通过两个空间接收滤波器接收的能力。Optionally, when the report quantity configured by the terminal device includes the first indication bit, the terminal device may set the bit to "0" when reporting the CSI according to the actual measurement result, indicating that the reported reference signal resource identifier may be Received by a spatial receiving filter at the same time, otherwise set to "1" indicates that the reported reference signal resource identifier can be received by multiple spatial receiving filters at the same time. In this embodiment, optionally, the protocol defaults that when the first indication bit is set to "1", there is a one-to-one correspondence between the reported reference signal resource identifier and the spatial reception filter, for example, when two CRIs are reported The two CRIs are received by two spatial receiving filters simultaneously, which is also equivalent to the default terminal device having the capability of receiving through two spatial receiving filters at the same time.
因此,网络设备可以根据第一指示比特确定终端设备接收该多个参考信号使用的空间接收滤波器的数量,并可进一步确定每组测量信息中的参考信号资源与终端设备的空间接收滤波器的对应关系,也就是可以确定发射波束与接收波束的配对关系。Therefore, the network device may determine the number of spatial receiving filters used by the terminal device to receive the multiple reference signals according to the first indication bit, and may further determine the reference signal resources in each set of measurement information and the spatial receiving filters of the terminal device. The corresponding relationship, that is, the pairing relationship between the transmission beam and the reception beam can be determined.
可选地,如果report quantity包含所述第一指示比特,但网络设备没有配置基于同时接收的分组上报,此时网络设备可以忽略所述CSI中的第一指示比特,或终端设备可以忽略所述report quantity中所述第一指示比特的上报要求。Optionally, if the report quantity includes the first indication bit, but the network device is not configured to report based on the simultaneously received packet, the network device may ignore the first indication bit in the CSI, or the terminal device may ignore the The reporting requirement of the first indication bit in the report quantity.
应理解,上文示出了通过CSI上报测量结果的同时发送第一指示比特的一种可能的实现方式,但这不应对本申请构成任何限定。It should be understood that the foregoing illustrates a possible implementation manner of sending the first indication bit while reporting the measurement result through CSI, but this should not constitute any limitation to the present application.
还应理解,上文中列举的通过不同的指示比特指示不同的值的方法仅为便于理解而示出,本申请对于指示比特中的值与所指示的信息的对应关系并未特别限定。It should also be understood that the methods listed above for indicating different values by different indication bits are shown for ease of understanding only, and the correspondence relationship between the values in the indication bits and the indicated information is not particularly limited in this application.
另外,终端设备可以在一个CSI中上报一组或多组测量信息。本申请对此不做限定。In addition, the terminal device can report one or more sets of measurement information in one CSI. This application does not limit this.
举例而言,终端设备可以配置有一个射频通道(radio fequency chain,RF chain),每个射频通道在同一时刻只能通过一个接收波束接收信号。因此,不论网络设备是同时发送多个发射波束,还是轮询发送多个发射波束,该终端设备基于一个接收波束可以同时接收的多个参考信号测量得到的结果归为一组测量信息。此时,该CSI可包括一组测量信息,且这组测量信息中的的多个测量结果对应的参考信号由同一个接收波束接收。For example, a terminal device may be configured with a radio frequency (RF) chain, and each radio frequency channel can only receive signals through one receiving beam at the same time. Therefore, regardless of whether the network device sends multiple transmit beams at the same time or polls multiple transmit beams, the terminal device is classified into a set of measurement information based on the measurement results of multiple reference signals that can be simultaneously received by one receive beam. At this time, the CSI may include a set of measurement information, and reference signals corresponding to multiple measurement results in the set of measurement information are received by a same receiving beam.
又例如,终端设备可以配置有多个射频通道。因每个射频通道在同一时刻只能通过一个接收波束接收信号,则该多个射频通道在同一时刻可通过多个接收波束接收信号。假设终端设备配置有射频通道#1和#2,射频通道#1可通过轮询的方式依次使用接收波束#1至#4接收信号,射频通道#2可通过轮询的方式依次使用接收波束#5至#8接收信号。当网络设备发送多个发射波束时,例如记作发射波束#1至#8。在同一时刻,射频通道#1和#2可分别使用一个接收波束接收信号。例如,接收波束#1和#5可同时接收到发射波束#2和#7,接收波束#2和#6可同时接收到发射波束#3和#5,接收波束#3和#7可同时接收到发射波束#4和#8,接收波束#4和#8可同时接收到发射波束#3和#6。此时,该CSI可包括四组测量信息,每组测量信息包括两个测量结果,且每组测量信息中的两个测量结果所对应的参考信号由不同的两个接收波束接收。As another example, the terminal device may be configured with multiple radio frequency channels. Because each radio frequency channel can only receive signals through one receiving beam at the same time, the multiple radio frequency channels can receive signals through multiple receiving beams at the same time. Assume that the terminal equipment is configured with radio frequency channels # 1 and # 2. Radio frequency channel # 1 can use the receiving beams # 1 to # 4 to receive signals in turn, and radio frequency channel # 2 can use the receiving beam # in turn. 5 to # 8 receive signals. When the network device sends multiple transmission beams, it is recorded as transmission beams # 1 to # 8, for example. At the same time, the RF channels # 1 and # 2 can use one receiving beam to receive signals, respectively. For example, receiving beams # 1 and # 5 can simultaneously receive transmitting beams # 2 and # 7, receiving beams # 2 and # 6 can simultaneously receive transmitting beams # 3 and # 5, and receiving beams # 3 and # 7 can simultaneously receive To transmit beams # 4 and # 8, receive beams # 4 and # 8 can receive transmit beams # 3 and # 6 at the same time. At this time, the CSI may include four sets of measurement information, each set of measurement information includes two measurement results, and the reference signals corresponding to the two measurement results in each set of measurement information are received by different two receiving beams.
应理解,上文所列举的接收波束与发射波束的对应关系仅为便于理解而做出的示例性说明,本申请对于接收波束与发射波束间的对应关系并不限定。It should be understood that the correspondence between the receiving beam and the transmitting beam listed above is only an exemplary description made for ease of understanding, and the correspondence between the receiving beam and the transmitting beam is not limited in this application.
应理解,上文举例仅为便于理解而示出,不应对本申请构成任何限定。终端设备还可以在其他可能的情况下上报一组或多组测量信息。为了简洁,这里不再一一举例说明。可选地,该方法400还包括:步骤450,网络设备发送第六指示信息,该第六指示信息用于指示第二上报方式,该第二上报方式为基于可被同时接收的参考信号的分组上报。It should be understood that the above examples are shown for ease of understanding only, and should not be construed as limiting this application in any way. The terminal device may also report one or more sets of measurement information in other possible situations. For the sake of brevity, we will not explain them one by one here. Optionally, the method 400 further includes: Step 450, the network device sends sixth indication information, where the sixth indication information is used to indicate a second reporting mode, and the second reporting mode is a packet based on a reference signal that can be received simultaneously. Escalation.
相应地,在步骤450中,终端设备接收上述第六指示信息。Accordingly, in step 450, the terminal device receives the foregoing sixth instruction information.
如前所述,CSI上报方式可以包括基于空间接收滤波器的分组上报,也可以包括基于可被同时接收的参考信号的分组上报,还可以包括非分组上报。因此,网络设备可以预先向终端设备指示上报方式。As mentioned above, the CSI reporting method may include packet reporting based on a spatial reception filter, may also include packet reporting based on a reference signal that can be simultaneously received, and may also include non-packet reporting. Therefore, the network device can indicate the reporting mode to the terminal device in advance.
在本实施例中,可选地,用于指示第二上报方式的第六指示信息可以携带在RRC消 息中。例如,可以在携带在RRC消息的CSI上报配置中,或者,也可以携带在CSI上报配置的分组上报参数中。通过RRC消息携带第六指示信息的具体方法可以与方法200中的步骤270通过RRC消息携带第一指示信息的具体方法相似,为了简洁,这里省略对该具体方法的详细说明。In this embodiment, optionally, the sixth instruction information used to indicate the second reporting mode may be carried in the RRC message. For example, it may be carried in the CSI reporting configuration carried in the RRC message, or it may be carried in the packet reporting parameters of the CSI reporting configuration. The specific method for carrying the sixth indication information through the RRC message may be similar to the specific method for carrying the first indication information through the RRC message in step 270 in the method 200. For brevity, a detailed description of the specific method is omitted here.
可选地,该第六指示信息可以携带在以下一项或多项中:RRC消息、MAC CE以及DCI。通过不同的信令携带第六指示信息的具体方法可以与方法200中的步骤270中通过不同的信令携带第一指示信息的具体方法相似,为了简洁,这里省略对该具体方法的详细说明。Optionally, the sixth indication information may be carried in one or more of the following: an RRC message, a MAC CE, and a DCI. A specific method for carrying the sixth instruction information through different signaling may be similar to the specific method for carrying the first instruction information through different signaling in step 270 in the method 200. For the sake of brevity, a detailed description of the specific method is omitted here.
基于上述技术方案,终端设备在基于同时接收到的多个参考信号上报CSI时,携带用于指示接收该多个参考信号的空间接收滤波器的数量的指示比特,以便网络设备获取参考信号资源和空间接收滤波器的对应关系,也就是可以获取多个接收波束与发射波束的配对关系。在终端设备发生倾侧或翻转导致某一接收波束对应的TCI状态列表失效时,还可以切换到其他链路质量较好的接收波束,这样可以避免频繁地触发波束失败恢复流程。从而提高了波束配对关系的鲁棒性,有利于提高传输系统的鲁棒性,有利于提高传输效率,同时有利于提高用户体验。此外,根据发射波束与接收波束的配对关系可以选择对应于不同接收波束的发射波束与不同的终端设备通信,可以最大程度地规避多用户间的干扰,也就是提高了抗干扰性。从整体上说,提高了系统性能。Based on the above technical solution, when the terminal device reports the CSI based on the multiple reference signals received at the same time, the terminal device carries indication bits for indicating the number of spatial receiving filters that receive the multiple reference signals, so that the network device can obtain the reference signal resources and The corresponding relationship of the spatial receiving filter, that is, the pairing relationship between multiple receiving beams and transmitting beams can be obtained. When the TCI status list corresponding to a certain receiving beam is invalid due to the tilting or overturning of the terminal device, it can also switch to other receiving beams with better link quality, which can avoid frequent triggering of the beam failure recovery process. Therefore, the robustness of the beam pairing relationship is improved, which is conducive to improving the robustness of the transmission system, improving the transmission efficiency, and at the same time improving the user experience. In addition, according to the pairing relationship between the transmission beam and the reception beam, transmission beams corresponding to different reception beams can be selected to communicate with different terminal devices, which can avoid interference between multiple users to the greatest extent, that is, improve the interference resistance. Overall, system performance is improved.
应理解,上述实施例中,各过程的序号的大小并不意味着执行顺序的先后,各过程的执行顺序应以其功能和内在逻辑确定,而不应对本申请实施例的实施过程构成任何限定。It should be understood that in the above embodiments, the size of the sequence numbers of the processes does not mean the order of execution. The execution order of each process should be determined by its function and internal logic, and should not constitute any limitation on the implementation process of the embodiments of this application. .
以上,结合图2至图4详细说明了本申请实施例提供的方法。以下,结合图5至图7详细说明本申请实施例提供的装置。In the foregoing, the methods provided by the embodiments of the present application have been described in detail with reference to FIGS. 2 to 4. Hereinafter, the apparatus provided by the embodiment of the present application will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 5 to 7.
图5是本申请实施例提供的通信装置的示意性框图。如图5所示,该通信装置500可以包括处理单元510和收发单元520。FIG. 5 is a schematic block diagram of a communication device according to an embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 5, the communication device 500 may include a processing unit 510 and a transceiver unit 520.
在一种可能的设计中,该通信装置500可对应于上文方法实施例中的终端设备,例如,可以为终端设备,或者配置于终端设备中的芯片。In a possible design, the communication device 500 may correspond to the terminal device in the foregoing method embodiment. For example, the communication device 500 may be a terminal device or a chip configured in the terminal device.
具体地,该通信装置500可对应于根据本申请实施例的方法200、300或400中的终端设备,该通信装置500可以包括用于执行图2中的方法200、图3中的方法300或图4中的方法400中的终端设备执行的方法的单元。并且,该通信装置500中的各单元和上述其他操作和/或功能分别为了实现图2中的方法200、图3中的方法300或图4中的方法400的相应流程。Specifically, the communication device 500 may correspond to the terminal device in the method 200, 300, or 400 according to the embodiment of the present application. The communication device 500 may include a method for performing the method 200 in FIG. 2, the method 300 in FIG. 3, or Elements of the method performed by the terminal device in the method 400 in FIG. 4. In addition, each unit in the communication device 500 and the other operations and / or functions described above are respectively used to implement a corresponding process of the method 200 in FIG. 2, the method 300 in FIG. 3, or the method 400 in FIG. 4.
其中,当该通信装置500用于执行图2中的方法200时,处理单元510可用于执行方法200中的步骤210,收发单元520可用于执行方法200中的步骤220、步骤240至步骤290。When the communication device 500 is used to execute the method 200 in FIG. 2, the processing unit 510 may be used to perform step 210 in the method 200, and the transceiver unit 520 may be used to perform steps 220 and 240 to step 290 in the method 200.
当该通信装置500用于执行图3中的方法300时,收发单元510可用于执行方法300中的步骤310至步骤330。When the communication device 500 is used to execute the method 300 in FIG. 3, the transceiver unit 510 may be used to execute steps 310 to 330 in the method 300.
当该通信装置500用于执行图4中的方法400时,处理单元510可用于执行方法400中的步骤410,收发单元510可用于执行方法400中的步骤420、步骤440和步骤450。When the communication device 500 is used to execute the method 400 in FIG. 4, the processing unit 510 may be used to execute step 410 in the method 400, and the transceiver unit 510 may be used to execute steps 420, 440, and 450 in the method 400.
应理解,各单元执行上述相应步骤的具体过程在上述方法实施例中已经详细说明,为了简洁,在此不再赘述。It should be understood that the specific process of each unit performing the foregoing corresponding steps has been described in detail in the foregoing method embodiment, and for the sake of brevity, it will not be repeated here.
应理解,该通信装置500中的,处理单元510可对应于图6中示出的终端设备600中的处理器601,收发单元520可对应于图6中示出的终端设备600中的收发器602。It should be understood that, in the communication device 500, the processing unit 510 may correspond to the processor 601 in the terminal device 600 shown in FIG. 6, and the transceiver unit 520 may correspond to the transceiver in the terminal device 600 shown in FIG. 602.
在另一种可能的设计中,该通信装置500可对应于上文方法实施例中的网络设备,例如,可以为网络设备,或者配置于网络设备中的芯片。In another possible design, the communication device 500 may correspond to the network device in the foregoing method embodiment. For example, the communication device 500 may be a network device or a chip configured in the network device.
具体地,该通信装置500可对应于根据本申请实施例的方法200、300或400中的网络设备,该通信装置500可以包括用于执行图2中的方法200、图3中的方法300或图4中的方法400中的网络设备执行的方法的单元。并且,该通信装置500中的各单元和上述其他操作和/或功能分别为了实现图2中的方法200、图3中的方法300或图4中的方法400的相应流程。Specifically, the communication device 500 may correspond to the network device in the method 200, 300, or 400 according to the embodiment of the present application. The communication device 500 may include a method for performing the method 200 in FIG. 2, the method 300 in FIG. 3, or The elements of the method performed by the network device in the method 400 in FIG. 4. In addition, each unit in the communication device 500 and the other operations and / or functions described above are respectively used to implement a corresponding process of the method 200 in FIG. 2, the method 300 in FIG. 3, or the method 400 in FIG. 4.
其中,当该通信装置500用于执行图2中的方法200时,收发单元520可用于执行方法200中的步骤220以及步骤240至步骤290,处理单元510可用于执行方法200中的步骤230。When the communication device 500 is used to execute the method 200 in FIG. 2, the transceiver unit 520 may be used to execute step 220 and steps 240 to 290 in the method 200, and the processing unit 510 may be used to execute step 230 in the method 200.
当该通信装置500用于执行图3中的方法300时,收发单元520可用于执行方法300中的步骤310至步骤330。When the communication device 500 is used to execute the method 300 in FIG. 3, the transceiver unit 520 may be used to execute steps 310 to 330 in the method 300.
当该通信装置500用于执行图4中的方法400时,收发单元520可用于执行方法400中的步骤420、步骤440和步骤450,处理单元510可用于执行方法400中的步骤430。When the communication device 500 is used to execute the method 400 in FIG. 4, the transceiver unit 520 may be used to execute steps 420, 440, and 450 in the method 400, and the processing unit 510 may be used to execute step 430 in the method 400.
应理解,各单元执行上述相应步骤的具体过程在上述方法实施例中已经详细说明,为了简洁,在此不再赘述。It should be understood that the specific process of each unit performing the foregoing corresponding steps has been described in detail in the foregoing method embodiment, and for the sake of brevity, it will not be repeated here.
还应理解,该通信装置500中的处理单元510可对应于图7中示出的网络设备700中的处理器710,收发单元520可对应于图7中示出的网络设备700中的收发器720。It should also be understood that the processing unit 510 in the communication device 500 may correspond to the processor 710 in the network device 700 shown in FIG. 7, and the transceiver unit 520 may correspond to the transceiver in the network device 700 shown in FIG. 7. 720.
图6是本申请实施例提供的终端设备600的结构示意图。如图所示,该终端设备600包括处理器601和收发器602。可选地,该终端设备500还包括存储器603。其中,处理器601、收发器602和存储器603之间可以通过内部连接通路互相通信,传递控制和/或数据信号,该存储器603用于存储计算机程序,该处理器601用于从该存储器603中调用并运行该计算机程序,以控制该收发器602收发信号。可选地,终端设备500还可以包括天线504,用于将收发器602输出的上行数据或上行控制信令通过无线信号发送出去。FIG. 6 is a schematic structural diagram of a terminal device 600 according to an embodiment of the present application. As shown, the terminal device 600 includes a processor 601 and a transceiver 602. Optionally, the terminal device 500 further includes a memory 603. Among them, the processor 601, the transceiver 602, and the memory 603 can communicate with each other through an internal connection path to transfer control and / or data signals. The memory 603 is used to store a computer program, and the processor 601 is used to store the computer program from the memory 603. The computer program is called and executed to control the transceiver 602 to send and receive signals. Optionally, the terminal device 500 may further include an antenna 504 for sending uplink data or uplink control signaling output by the transceiver 602 through a wireless signal.
上述处理器601和存储器603可以合成一个处理装置,处理器601用于执行存储器603中存储的程序代码来实现上述功能。应理解,图中所示的处理装置仅为示例。在具体实现时,该存储器603也可以集成在处理器601中,或者独立于处理器601。本申请对此不做限定。The processor 601 and the memory 603 may be combined into a processing device, and the processor 601 is configured to execute program codes stored in the memory 603 to implement the foregoing functions. It should be understood that the processing devices shown in the figures are merely examples. In specific implementation, the memory 603 may also be integrated in the processor 601 or independent of the processor 601. This application does not limit this.
上述终端设备600还包括天线610,用于将收发器602输出的上行数据或上行控制信令通过无线信号发送出去。The above-mentioned terminal device 600 further includes an antenna 610 for sending uplink data or uplink control signaling output by the transceiver 602 through a wireless signal.
当存储器603中存储的程序指令被处理器601执行时,该处理器601用于生成一个或多个CSI,并控制收发器602发送一个或多个CSI。其中,每个CSI包括一组或多组测量报告,每组测量报告基于一个空间接收滤波器接收到的参考信号测量得到,且在测量报告的总组数为多组的情况下,各组测量报告所对应的空间接收滤波器彼此各不相同。When the program instructions stored in the memory 603 are executed by the processor 601, the processor 601 is configured to generate one or more CSIs, and control the transceiver 602 to send one or more CSIs. Each CSI includes one or more sets of measurement reports, and each set of measurement reports is obtained based on a reference signal measurement received by a spatial receiving filter, and each group of measurements is performed when the total number of measurement reports is multiple. The spatial receiving filters corresponding to the report are different from each other.
具体地,该终端设备600可对应于根据本申请实施例的方法200、300或400中的终端设备,该终端设备600可以包括用于执行图2中的方法200、图3中的方法300或图4中的方法400中的终端设备执行的方法的单元。并且,该终端设备600中的各单元和上述 其他操作和/或功能分别为了实现图2中的方法200、图3中的方法300或图4中的方法400的相应流程。上述处理器601可以用于执行前面方法实施例中描述的由终端设备内部实现的动作,而收发器602可以用于执行前面方法实施例中描述的终端设备向网络设备发送或从网络设备接收的动作。具体请见前面方法实施例中的描述,此处不再赘述。Specifically, the terminal device 600 may correspond to the terminal device in the method 200, 300, or 400 according to the embodiment of the present application, and the terminal device 600 may include a method for performing the method 200 in FIG. 2, the method 300 in FIG. 3, or Elements of the method performed by the terminal device in the method 400 in FIG. 4. In addition, each unit in the terminal device 600 and the other operations and / or functions described above respectively implement the corresponding processes of the method 200 in FIG. 2, the method 300 in FIG. 3, or the method 400 in FIG. 4. The foregoing processor 601 may be used to execute the actions implemented in the terminal device described in the foregoing method embodiment, and the transceiver 602 may be used to execute the terminal device described in the foregoing method embodiment that is sent to or received from the network device by the terminal device. action. For details, refer to the description in the foregoing method embodiment, and details are not described herein again.
可选地,上述终端设备600还可以包括电源605,用于给终端设备中的各种器件或电路提供电源。Optionally, the above-mentioned terminal device 600 may further include a power source 605 for supplying power to various devices or circuits in the terminal device.
除此之外,为了使得终端设备的功能更加完善,该终端设备600还可以包括输入单元606、显示单元607、音频电路608、摄像头609和传感器622等中的一个或多个,所述音频电路还可以包括扬声器6082、麦克风6084等。In addition, in order to make the functions of the terminal device more complete, the terminal device 600 may further include one or more of an input unit 606, a display unit 607, an audio circuit 608, a camera 609, and a sensor 622, and the audio circuit It may also include a speaker 6082, a microphone 6084, and the like.
图7是本申请实施例提供的网络设备700的结构示意图。如图所示,该网络设备700包括处理器710和收发器720。可选地,该网络设备700还包括存储器730。其中,处理器710、收发器720和存储器730之间通过内部连接通路互相通信,传递控制和/或数据信号,该存储器730用于存储计算机程序,该处理器710用于从该存储器730中调用并运行该计算机程序,以控制该收发器720收发信号。FIG. 7 is a schematic structural diagram of a network device 700 according to an embodiment of the present application. As shown, the network device 700 includes a processor 710 and a transceiver 720. Optionally, the network device 700 further includes a memory 730. Among them, the processor 710, the transceiver 720, and the memory 730 communicate with each other through an internal connection path to transfer control and / or data signals. The memory 730 is used to store a computer program, and the processor 710 is used to call from the memory 730. The computer program is run to control the transceiver 720 to send and receive signals.
上述处理器710和存储器730可以合成一个处理装置,处理器710用于执行存储器730中存储的程序代码来实现上述功能。具体实现时,该存储器730也可以集成在处理器710中,或者独立于处理器710。The processor 710 and the memory 730 may be combined into a processing device, and the processor 710 is configured to execute program codes stored in the memory 730 to implement the foregoing functions. In specific implementation, the memory 730 may also be integrated in the processor 710 or independent of the processor 710.
上述网络设备700还可以包括天线740,用于将收发器720输出的下行数据或下行控制信令通过无线信号发送出去。The above-mentioned network device 700 may further include an antenna 740 for sending downlink data or downlink control signaling output by the transceiver 720 through a wireless signal.
当存储器730中存储的程序指令被处理器710执行时,该处理器710用于控制收发器720接收一个或多个CSI,并用于根据该一个或多个CSI确定每组测量报告对应一个空间接收滤波器,且在接收到多组测量报告的情况下,各组测量报告所对应的空间接收滤波器彼此各不相同。When the program instructions stored in the memory 730 are executed by the processor 710, the processor 710 is used to control the transceiver 720 to receive one or more CSIs, and is used to determine that each set of measurement reports corresponds to one space reception according to the one or more CSIs Filters, and when multiple sets of measurement reports are received, the spatial receiving filters corresponding to each set of measurement reports are different from each other.
具体地,该网络设备700可对应于根据本申请实施例的方法200、300或400中的网络设备,该网络设备700可以包括用于执行图2中的方法200、图3中的方法300或图4中的方法400中的网络设备执行的方法的单元。并且,该网络设备700中的各单元和上述其他操作和/或功能分别为了实现图2中的方法200、图3中的方法300或图4中的方法400的相应流程,各单元执行上述相应步骤的具体过程在上述方法实施例中已经详细说明,为了简洁,在此不再赘述。Specifically, the network device 700 may correspond to the network device in the method 200, 300, or 400 according to the embodiment of the present application, and the network device 700 may include a method for performing the method 200 in FIG. 2, the method 300 in FIG. 3, or The elements of the method performed by the network device in the method 400 in FIG. 4. In addition, each unit in the network device 700 and the other operations and / or functions described above respectively implement the corresponding processes of the method 200 in FIG. 2, the method 300 in FIG. 3, or the method 400 in FIG. 4, and each unit executes the corresponding operations. The specific process of the steps has been described in detail in the foregoing method embodiments, and for the sake of brevity, they are not repeated here.
上述处理器710可以用于执行前面方法实施例中描述的由网络设备内部实现的动作,而收发器720可以用于执行前面方法实施例中描述的网络设备向终端设备发送或从终端设备接收的动作。具体请见前面方法实施例中的描述,此处不再赘述。The foregoing processor 710 may be configured to perform the actions implemented by the network device described in the foregoing method embodiment, and the transceiver 720 may be configured to execute the network device described in the foregoing method embodiment to send or receive from the terminal device to the terminal device. action. For details, refer to the description in the foregoing method embodiment, and details are not described herein again.
应理解,本申请实施例中的处理器可以为中央处理单元(central processing unit,CPU),该处理器还可以是其他通用处理器、数字信号处理器(digital signal processor,DSP)、专用集成电路(application specific integrated circuit,ASIC)、现成可编程门阵列(field programmable gate array,FPGA)或者其他可编程逻辑器件、分立门或者晶体管逻辑器件、分立硬件组件等。It should be understood that the processor in the embodiment of the present application may be a central processing unit (CPU), and the processor may also be other general-purpose processors, digital signal processors (DSPs), and application-specific integrated circuits. (application specific integrated circuit, ASIC), ready-made programmable gate array (field programmable gate array, FPGA) or other programmable logic devices, discrete gate or transistor logic devices, discrete hardware components, etc.
还应理解,本申请实施例中的存储器可以是易失性存储器或非易失性存储器,或可包括易失性和非易失性存储器两者。其中,非易失性存储器可以是只读存储器(ROM)、 可编程只读存储器(programmable ROM,PROM)、可擦除可编程只读存储器(erasable PROM,EPROM)、电可擦除可编程只读存储器(electrically EPROM,EEPROM)或闪存。易失性存储器可以是随机存取存储器(random access memory,RAM),其用作外部高速缓存。通过示例性但不是限制性说明,许多形式的随机存取存储器(random access memory,RAM)可用,例如静态随机存取存储器(static RAM,SRAM)、动态随机存取存储器(DRAM)、同步动态随机存取存储器(synchronous DRAM,SDRAM)、双倍数据速率同步动态随机存取存储器(double data rate SDRAM,DDR SDRAM)、增强型同步动态随机存取存储器(enhanced SDRAM,ESDRAM)、同步连接动态随机存取存储器(synchlink DRAM,SLDRAM)和直接内存总线随机存取存储器(direct rambus RAM,DR RAM)。It should also be understood that the memory in the embodiments of the present application may be a volatile memory or a non-volatile memory, or may include both volatile and non-volatile memory. Among them, the non-volatile memory may be a read-only memory (ROM), a programmable read-only memory (PROM), an erasable programmable read-only memory (EPROM), and an electrically erasable programmable ROM. Read memory (electrically EPROM, EEPROM) or flash memory. The volatile memory may be random access memory (RAM), which is used as an external cache. By way of example, but not limitation, many forms of random access memory (RAM) are available, such as static random access memory (SRAM), dynamic random access memory (DRAM), synchronous dynamic random access Access memory (synchronous DRAM, SDRAM), double data rate synchronous dynamic random access memory (double SDRAM, DDR SDRAM), enhanced synchronous dynamic random access memory (enhanced SDRAM, ESDRAM), synchronous connection dynamic random access Fetch memory (synchlink DRAM, SLDRAM) and direct memory bus random access memory (direct RAMbus RAM, DR RAM).
根据本申请实施例提供的方法,本申请还提供一种计算机程序产品,该计算机程序产品包括:计算机程序代码,当该计算机程序代码在计算机上运行时,使得该计算机执行图2、图3或图4所示实施例中的方法。According to the method provided in the embodiment of the present application, the present application also provides a computer program product, the computer program product includes: computer program code, when the computer program code is run on a computer, the computer executes FIG. 2, FIG. 3, or The method in the embodiment shown in FIG. 4.
根据本申请实施例提供的方法,本申请还提供一种计算机可读介质,该计算机可读介质存储有程序代码,当该程序代码在计算机上运行时,使得该计算机执行图2、图3或图4所示实施例中的方法。According to the method provided in the embodiment of the present application, the present application further provides a computer-readable medium, where the computer-readable medium stores program code, and when the program code runs on the computer, the computer executes FIG. 2, FIG. 3, or The method in the embodiment shown in FIG. 4.
根据本申请实施例提供的方法,本申请还提供一种系统,其包括前述的一个或多个终端设备以及一个或多个网络设备。According to the method provided in the embodiment of the present application, the present application further provides a system, which includes the foregoing one or more terminal devices and one or more network devices.
上述实施例,可以全部或部分地通过软件、硬件、固件或其他任意组合来实现。当使用软件实现时,上述实施例可以全部或部分地以计算机程序产品的形式实现。所述计算机程序产品包括一个或多个计算机指令。在计算机上加载或执行所述计算机程序指令时,全部或部分地产生按照本发明实施例所述的流程或功能。所述计算机可以为通用计算机、专用计算机、计算机网络、或者其他可编程装置。所述计算机指令可以存储在计算机可读存储介质中,或者从一个计算机可读存储介质向另一个计算机可读存储介质传输,例如,所述计算机指令可以从一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心通过有线(例如红外、无线、微波等)方式向另一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心进行传输。所述计算机可读存储介质可以是计算机能够存取的任何可用介质或者是包含一个或多个可用介质集合的服务器、数据中心等数据存储设备。所述可用介质可以是磁性介质(例如,软盘、硬盘、磁带)、光介质(例如,数字通用光盘(digital versatile disc,DVD))、或者半导体介质。半导体介质可以是固态硬盘。The above embodiments may be implemented in whole or in part by software, hardware, firmware, or any other combination. When implemented using software, the above embodiments may be implemented in whole or in part in the form of a computer program product. The computer program product includes one or more computer instructions. When the computer program instructions are loaded or executed on a computer, the processes or functions according to the embodiments of the present invention are wholly or partially generated. The computer may be a general-purpose computer, a special-purpose computer, a computer network, or other programmable devices. The computer instructions may be stored in a computer-readable storage medium, or transmitted from one computer-readable storage medium to another computer-readable storage medium, for example, the computer instructions may be from a website site, a computer, a server, or a data center. Transmission by wire (eg infrared, wireless, microwave, etc.) to another website site, computer, server or data center. The computer-readable storage medium may be any available medium that can be accessed by a computer, or a data storage device such as a server, a data center, and the like, including one or more sets of available media. The usable medium may be a magnetic medium (for example, a floppy disk, a hard disk, a magnetic tape), an optical medium (for example, a digital versatile disc (DVD)), or a semiconductor medium. The semiconductor medium may be a solid state drive.
本领域普通技术人员可以意识到,结合本文中所公开的实施例描述的各示例的单元及算法步骤,能够以电子硬件、或者计算机软件和电子硬件的结合来实现。这些功能究竟以硬件还是软件方式来执行,取决于技术方案的特定应用和设计约束条件。专业技术人员可以对每个特定的应用来使用不同方法来实现所描述的功能,但是这种实现不应认为超出本申请的范围。Those of ordinary skill in the art may realize that the units and algorithm steps of each example described in combination with the embodiments disclosed herein can be implemented by electronic hardware, or a combination of computer software and electronic hardware. Whether these functions are performed in hardware or software depends on the specific application and design constraints of the technical solution. A professional technician can use different methods to implement the described functions for each specific application, but such implementation should not be considered to be beyond the scope of this application.
所属领域的技术人员可以清楚地了解到,为描述的方便和简洁,上述描述的系统、装置和单元的具体工作过程,可以参考前述方法实施例中的对应过程,在此不再赘述。Those skilled in the art can clearly understand that, for the convenience and brevity of description, the specific working processes of the systems, devices, and units described above can refer to the corresponding processes in the foregoing method embodiments, and are not repeated here.
在本申请所提供的几个实施例中,应该理解到,所揭露的系统、装置和方法,可以通过其它的方式实现。例如,以上所描述的装置实施例仅仅是示意性的,例如,所述单元 的划分,仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分,实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式,例如多个单元或组件可以结合或者可以集成到另一个系统,或一些特征可以忽略,或不执行。另一点,所显示或讨论的相互之间的耦合或直接耦合或通信连接可以是通过一些接口,装置或单元的间接耦合或通信连接,可以是电性,机械或其它的形式。In the several embodiments provided in this application, it should be understood that the disclosed systems, devices, and methods may be implemented in other ways. For example, the device embodiments described above are only schematic. For example, the division of the unit is only a logical function division. In actual implementation, there may be another division manner. For example, multiple units or components may be combined or Can be integrated into another system, or some features can be ignored or not implemented. In addition, the displayed or discussed mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection may be indirect coupling or communication connection through some interfaces, devices or units, which may be electrical, mechanical or other forms.
所述作为分离部件说明的单元可以是或者也可以不是物理上分开的,作为单元显示的部件可以是或者也可以不是物理单元,即可以位于一个地方,或者也可以分布到多个网络单元上。可以根据实际的需要选择其中的部分或者全部单元来实现本实施例方案的目的。The units described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and the components displayed as units may or may not be physical units, that is, may be located in one place, or may be distributed on multiple network units. Some or all of the units may be selected according to actual needs to achieve the objective of the solution of this embodiment.
另外,在本申请各个实施例中的各功能单元可以集成在一个处理单元中,也可以是各个单元单独物理存在,也可以两个或两个以上单元集成在一个单元中。In addition, each functional unit in each embodiment of the present application may be integrated into one processing unit, or each of the units may exist separately physically, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit.
所述功能如果以软件功能单元的形式实现并作为独立的产品销售或使用时,可以存储在一个计算机可读取存储介质中。基于这样的理解,本申请的技术方案本质上或者说对现有技术做出贡献的部分或者该技术方案的部分可以以软件产品的形式体现出来,该计算机软件产品存储在一个存储介质中,包括若干指令用以使得一台计算机设备(可以是个人计算机,服务器,或者网络设备等)执行本申请各个实施例所述方法的全部或部分步骤。而前述的存储介质包括:U盘、移动硬盘、只读存储器(ROM)、随机存取存储器(random access memory,RAM)、磁碟或者光盘等各种可以存储程序代码的介质。When the functions are implemented in the form of software functional units and sold or used as independent products, they can be stored in a computer-readable storage medium. Based on this understanding, the technical solution of the present application is essentially a part that contributes to the existing technology or a part of the technical solution can be embodied in the form of a software product. The computer software product is stored in a storage medium, including Several instructions are used to cause a computer device (which may be a personal computer, a server, or a network device, etc.) to perform all or part of the steps of the method described in the embodiments of the present application. The foregoing storage medium includes various media that can store program codes, such as a U disk, a mobile hard disk, a read-only memory (ROM), a random access memory (RAM), a magnetic disk, or an optical disk.
以上所述,仅为本申请的具体实施方式,但本申请的保护范围并不局限于此,任何熟悉本技术领域的技术人员在本申请揭露的技术范围内,可轻易想到变化或替换,都应涵盖在本申请的保护范围之内。因此,本申请的保护范围应以所述权利要求的保护范围为准。The above is only a specific implementation of this application, but the scope of protection of this application is not limited to this. Any person skilled in the art can easily think of changes or replacements within the technical scope disclosed in this application. It should be covered by the protection scope of this application. Therefore, the protection scope of this application shall be subject to the protection scope of the claims.

Claims (64)

  1. 一种发送信道状态信息CSI的方法,其特征在于,包括:A method for transmitting channel state information CSI, comprising:
    生成一个或多个CSI,每个CSI包括一组或多组测量报告,每组测量报告基于一个空间接收滤波器接收到的参考信号测量得到,且在所述测量报告的总组数为多组的情况下,各组测量报告所对应的空间接收滤波器彼此各不相同;Generate one or more CSI, each CSI includes one or more groups of measurement reports, each group of measurement reports is obtained based on a reference signal received by a spatial receiving filter, and the total number of groups in the measurement report is multiple groups In the case of the receivers, the spatial receiving filters corresponding to each set of measurement reports are different from each other;
    发送所述一个或多个CSI。The one or more CSIs are transmitted.
  2. 如权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method of claim 1, further comprising:
    接收第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息用于指示第一上报方式,所述第一上报方式为基于空间接收滤波器的分组上报。Receive first indication information, where the first indication information is used to indicate a first reporting mode, and the first reporting mode is packet reporting based on a spatial receiving filter.
  3. 如权利要求1或2所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一指示信息携带在无线资源控制RRC消息的CSI上报配置中,或,所述第一指示信息携带在所述CSI上报配置的分组上报参数中。The method according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the first indication information is carried in a CSI report configuration of a radio resource control RRC message, or the first indication information is carried in a CSI report configuration of the CSI report Group reporting parameters.
  4. 如权利要求1至3中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 1 to 3, further comprising:
    接收第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息用于指示以下一项或多项:Receiving second instruction information, where the second instruction information is used to indicate one or more of the following:
    每个CSI上报的测量报告的组数;Number of groups of measurement reports reported by each CSI;
    通过多个CSI上报的测量报告的总组数;以及The total number of measurement reports reported through multiple CSIs; and
    通过多个CSI上报测量报告时所述CSI的个数。The number of CSIs when the measurement report is reported through multiple CSIs.
  5. 如权利要求4所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 4, further comprising:
    发送能力信息,所述能力信息用于指示以下一项或多项:Send capability information, which is used to indicate one or more of the following:
    空间接收滤波器的数量;The number of spatial receive filters;
    每个CSI上报的测量报告的最大组数;Maximum number of measurement reports reported by each CSI;
    通过多个CSI上报的测量报告的总组数的最大值;以及The maximum value of the total number of groups of measurement reports reported through multiple CSIs; and
    通过多个CSI上报测量报告时所述CSI的最大个数。The maximum number of CSIs when a measurement report is reported through multiple CSIs.
  6. 如权利要求1至4中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 1 to 4, further comprising:
    接收第三指示信息,所述第三指示信息用于指示多个参考信号资源,所述多个参考信号资源由至少两组测量报告确定。Receive third indication information, where the third indication information is used to indicate multiple reference signal resources, where the multiple reference signal resources are determined by at least two sets of measurement reports.
  7. 如权利要求6所述的方法,其特征在于,所述多个参考信号资源与多个空间接收滤波器一一对应。The method according to claim 6, wherein the plurality of reference signal resources correspond to the plurality of spatial receiving filters on a one-to-one basis.
  8. 如权利要求6所述的方法,其特征在于,所述多个参考信号资源包括第一资源组和第二资源组,其中,仅有所述第一资源组中的参考信号资源的测量结果记入波束失败次数统计。The method according to claim 6, wherein the plurality of reference signal resources includes a first resource group and a second resource group, wherein only measurement results of reference signal resources in the first resource group are recorded. Statistics of the number of incoming beam failures.
  9. 如权利要求1至8中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,每组测量报告还包括组标识,每个组标识对应一个空间接收滤波器。The method according to any one of claims 1 to 8, wherein each group of measurement reports further includes a group identifier, and each group identifier corresponds to a spatial receiving filter.
  10. 一种接收信道状态信息CSI的方法,其特征在于,包括:A method for receiving channel state information CSI, comprising:
    接收一个或多个CSI,每个CSI包括一组或多组测量报告,每组测量报告基于一个空间接收滤波器接收到的参考信号测量得到,各组测量报告所对应的空间接收滤波器彼此各不相同;Receive one or more CSI, each CSI includes one or more sets of measurement reports, each set of measurement reports is obtained based on a reference signal received by a spatial receiving filter, and the spatial receiving filters corresponding to each set of measurement reports are different from each other Not the same;
    根据所述一个或多个CSI,确定每组测量报告对应一个空间接收滤波器,且在接收到多组测量报告的情况下,各组测量报告所对应的空间接收滤波器彼此各不相同。According to the one or more CSIs, it is determined that each group of measurement reports corresponds to a spatial receiving filter, and when multiple groups of measurement reports are received, the spatial receiving filters corresponding to each group of measurement reports are different from each other.
  11. 如权利要求10所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method of claim 10, further comprising:
    发送第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息用于指示第一上报方式,所述第一上报方式为基于空间接收滤波器的分组上报。Sending first indication information, where the first indication information is used to indicate a first reporting mode, and the first reporting mode is packet reporting based on a spatial receiving filter.
  12. 如权利要求10或11所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一指示信息携带在无线资源控制RRC消息的CSI上报配置中,或,所述第一指示信息携带在所述CSI上报配置的分组上报参数中。The method according to claim 10 or 11, wherein the first indication information is carried in a CSI report configuration of a radio resource control RRC message, or the first indication information is carried in a CSI report configuration of the CSI report Group reporting parameters.
  13. 如权利要求10至12中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 10 to 12, further comprising:
    发送第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息用于指示以下一项或多项:Send second instruction information, where the second instruction information is used to indicate one or more of the following:
    每个CSI上报的测量报告的组数;Number of groups of measurement reports reported by each CSI;
    通过多个CSI上报的测量报告的总组数;以及The total number of measurement reports reported through multiple CSIs; and
    通过多个CSI上报测量报告时所述CSI的个数。The number of CSIs when the measurement report is reported through multiple CSIs.
  14. 如权利要求13所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 13, further comprising:
    接收能力信息,所述能力信息用于指示以下一项或多项:Receive capability information, which is used to indicate one or more of the following:
    空间接收滤波器的数量;The number of spatial receive filters;
    每个CSI上报的测量报告的最大组数;Maximum number of measurement reports reported by each CSI;
    通过多个CSI上报的测量报告的总组数的最大值;以及The maximum value of the total number of groups of measurement reports reported through multiple CSIs; and
    通过多个CSI上报测量报告时所述CSI的最大个数。The maximum number of CSIs when a measurement report is reported through multiple CSIs.
  15. 如权利要求10至14中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 10 to 14, further comprising:
    发送第三指示信息,所述第三指示信息用于指示多个参考信号资源,所述多个参考信号资源由至少两组测量报告确定。Send third indication information, where the third indication information is used to indicate multiple reference signal resources, where the multiple reference signal resources are determined by at least two sets of measurement reports.
  16. 如权利要求15所述的方法,其特征在于,所述多个参考信号资源与多个空间接收滤波器一一对应。The method according to claim 15, wherein the plurality of reference signal resources correspond to the plurality of spatial receiving filters on a one-to-one basis.
  17. 如权利要求15所述的方法,其特征在于,所述多个参考信号资源包括第一资源组和第二资源组,其中,仅有所述第一资源组中的参考信号资源的测量结果记入波束失败次数统计。The method according to claim 15, wherein the plurality of reference signal resources includes a first resource group and a second resource group, and only measurement results of reference signal resources in the first resource group are recorded. Statistics of the number of incoming beam failures.
  18. 如权利要求10至17中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,每组测量报告还包括组标识,每个组标识对应一个空间接收滤波器。The method according to any one of claims 10 to 17, wherein each group of measurement reports further includes a group identifier, and each group identifier corresponds to a spatial receiving filter.
  19. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,包括:A communication device, comprising:
    处理单元,用于生成一个或多个信道状态信息CSI,每个CSI包括一组或多组测量报告,每组测量报告基于一个空间接收滤波器接收到的参考信号测量得到,且在所述测量报告的总组数为多组的情况下,各组测量报告所对应的空间接收滤波器彼此各不相同;A processing unit for generating one or more channel state information CSI, each CSI includes one or more sets of measurement reports, each set of measurement reports is obtained based on a reference signal received by a spatial receiving filter, and When the total number of reports is multiple, the spatial receiving filters corresponding to the measurement reports of each group are different from each other;
    收发单元,用于发送所述一个或多个CSI。The transceiver unit is configured to send the one or more CSIs.
  20. 如权利要求19所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述收发单元还用于接收第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息用于指示第一上报方式,所述第一上报方式为基于空间接收滤波器的分组上报。The communication device according to claim 19, wherein the transceiver unit is further configured to receive first instruction information, the first instruction information is used to indicate a first reporting mode, and the first reporting mode is space-based The packet of the receiving filter is reported.
  21. 如权利要求19或20所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述第一指示信息携带在无线资源控制RRC消息的CSI上报配置中,或,所述第一指示信息携带在所述CSI上报配 置的分组上报参数中。The communication device according to claim 19 or 20, wherein the first indication information is carried in a CSI reporting configuration of a radio resource control RRC message, or the first indication information is carried in the CSI reporting configuration Group report parameters.
  22. 如权利要求19至21中任一项所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述收发单元还用于接收第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息用于指示以下一项或多项:The communication device according to any one of claims 19 to 21, wherein the transceiver unit is further configured to receive second instruction information, and the second instruction information is used to indicate one or more of the following:
    每个CSI上报的测量报告的组数;Number of groups of measurement reports reported by each CSI;
    通过多个CSI上报的测量报告的总组数;以及The total number of measurement reports reported through multiple CSIs; and
    通过多个CSI上报测量报告时所述CSI的个数。The number of CSIs when the measurement report is reported through multiple CSIs.
  23. 如权利要求22所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述收发单元还用于发送能力信息,所述能力信息用于指示以下一项或多项:The communication device according to claim 22, wherein the transceiver unit is further configured to send capability information, and the capability information is used to indicate one or more of the following:
    空间接收滤波器的数量;The number of spatial receive filters;
    每个CSI上报的测量报告的最大组数;Maximum number of measurement reports reported by each CSI;
    通过多个CSI上报的测量报告的总组数的最大值;以及The maximum value of the total number of groups of measurement reports reported through multiple CSIs; and
    通过多个CSI上报测量报告时所述CSI的最大个数。The maximum number of CSIs when a measurement report is reported through multiple CSIs.
  24. 如权利要求19至23中任一项所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述收发单元还用于接收第三指示信息,所述第三指示信息用于指示多个参考信号资源,所述多个参考信号资源由至少两组测量报告确定。The communication device according to any one of claims 19 to 23, wherein the transceiver unit is further configured to receive third instruction information, and the third instruction information is used to indicate multiple reference signal resources, and The multiple reference signal resources are determined by at least two sets of measurement reports.
  25. 如权利要求24所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述多个参考信号资源与多个空间接收滤波器一一对应。The communication device according to claim 24, wherein the plurality of reference signal resources are in one-to-one correspondence with a plurality of spatial receiving filters.
  26. 如权利要求24所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述多个参考信号资源包括第一资源组和第二资源组,其中,仅有所述第一资源组中的参考信号资源的测量结果记入波束失败次数统计。The communication device according to claim 24, wherein the plurality of reference signal resources includes a first resource group and a second resource group, wherein only measurement results of the reference signal resources in the first resource group Record the number of beam failures.
  27. 如权利要求19至26中任一项所述的通信装置,其特征在于,每组测量报告还包括组标识,每个组标识对应一个空间接收滤波器。The communication device according to any one of claims 19 to 26, wherein each group of measurement reports further includes a group identifier, and each group identifier corresponds to a spatial receiving filter.
  28. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,包括:A communication device, comprising:
    收发单元,用于接收一个或多个CSI,每个CSI包括一组或多组测量报告,每组测量报告基于一个空间接收滤波器接收到的参考信号测量得到,各组测量报告所对应的空间接收滤波器彼此各不相同;Transceiving unit for receiving one or more CSIs. Each CSI includes one or more groups of measurement reports. Each group of measurement reports is obtained based on a reference signal measurement received by a space receiving filter, and the space corresponding to each group of measurement reports. The receiving filters are different from each other;
    处理单元,用于根据所述一个或多个CSI,确定每组测量报告对应一个空间接收滤波器,且在接收到多组测量报告的情况下,各组测量报告所对应的空间接收滤波器彼此各不相同。A processing unit, configured to determine that each group of measurement reports corresponds to a spatial receiving filter according to the one or more CSIs, and when multiple groups of measurement reports are received, the spatial receiving filters corresponding to each group of measurement reports Different.
  29. 如权利要求28所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述收发单元还用于发送第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息用于指示第一上报方式,所述第一上报方式为基于空间接收滤波器的分组上报。The communication device according to claim 28, wherein the transceiver unit is further configured to send first instruction information, the first instruction information is used to indicate a first reporting mode, and the first reporting mode is space-based The packet of the receiving filter is reported.
  30. 如权利要求28或29所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述第一指示信息携带在无线资源控制RRC消息的CSI上报配置中,或,所述第一指示信息携带在所述CSI上报配置的分组上报参数中。The communication device according to claim 28 or 29, wherein the first indication information is carried in a CSI reporting configuration of a radio resource control RRC message, or the first indication information is carried in the CSI reporting configuration Group report parameters.
  31. 如权利要求28至30中任一项所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述收发单元还用于发送第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息用于指示以下一项或多项:The communication device according to any one of claims 28 to 30, wherein the transceiver unit is further configured to send second instruction information, and the second instruction information is used to indicate one or more of the following:
    每个CSI上报的测量报告的组数;Number of groups of measurement reports reported by each CSI;
    通过多个CSI上报的测量报告的总组数;以及The total number of measurement reports reported through multiple CSIs; and
    通过多个CSI上报测量报告时所述CSI的个数。The number of CSIs when the measurement report is reported through multiple CSIs.
  32. 如权利要求31所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述收发单元还用于接收能力信息,所述能力信息用于指示以下一项或多项:The communication device according to claim 31, wherein the transceiver unit is further configured to receive capability information, and the capability information is used to indicate one or more of the following:
    空间接收滤波器的数量;The number of spatial receive filters;
    每个CSI上报的测量报告的最大组数;Maximum number of measurement reports reported by each CSI;
    通过多个CSI上报的测量报告的总组数的最大值;以及The maximum value of the total number of groups of measurement reports reported through multiple CSIs; and
    通过多个CSI上报测量报告时所述CSI的最大个数。The maximum number of CSIs when a measurement report is reported through multiple CSIs.
  33. 如权利要求28至32中任一项所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述收发单元还用于发送第三指示信息,所述第三指示信息用于指示多个参考信号资源,所述多个参考信号资源由至少两组测量报告确定。The communication device according to any one of claims 28 to 32, wherein the transceiver unit is further configured to send third instruction information, and the third instruction information is used to indicate multiple reference signal resources, and the The multiple reference signal resources are determined by at least two sets of measurement reports.
  34. 如权利要求33所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述多个参考信号资源与多个空间接收滤波器一一对应。The communication device according to claim 33, wherein the plurality of reference signal resources are in one-to-one correspondence with a plurality of spatial receiving filters.
  35. 如权利要求33所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述多个参考信号资源包括第一资源组和第二资源组,其中,仅有所述第一资源组中的参考信号资源的测量结果记入波束失败次数统计。The communication device according to claim 33, wherein the plurality of reference signal resources includes a first resource group and a second resource group, wherein only measurement results of the reference signal resources in the first resource group Record the number of beam failures.
  36. 如权利要求28至35中任一项所述的通信装置,其特征在于,每组测量报告还包括组标识,每个组标识对应一个空间接收滤波器。The communication device according to any one of claims 28 to 35, wherein each group of measurement reports further includes a group identifier, and each group identifier corresponds to a spatial receiving filter.
  37. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,包括:A communication device, comprising:
    处理器,用于生成一个或多个CSI,每个CSI包括一组或多组测量报告,每组测量报告基于一个空间接收滤波器接收到的参考信号测量得到,且在所述测量报告的总组数为多组的情况下,各组测量报告所对应的空间接收滤波器彼此各不相同;A processor, configured to generate one or more CSI, each CSI includes one or more sets of measurement reports, each set of measurement reports is obtained based on a reference signal measurement received by a spatial receiving filter, and When the number of groups is multiple, the spatial receiving filters corresponding to the measurement reports of each group are different from each other;
    收发器,用于发送所述一个或多个CSI。A transceiver for sending the one or more CSIs.
  38. 如权利要求37所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述收发器还用于接收第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息用于指示第一上报方式,所述第一上报方式为基于空间接收滤波器的分组上报。The communication device according to claim 37, wherein the transceiver is further configured to receive first indication information, the first indication information is used to indicate a first reporting mode, and the first reporting mode is space-based The packet of the receiving filter is reported.
  39. 如权利要求37或38所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述第一指示信息携带在无线资源控制RRC消息的CSI上报配置中,或,所述第一指示信息携带在所述CSI上报配置的分组上报参数中。The communication device according to claim 37 or 38, wherein the first indication information is carried in a CSI reporting configuration of a radio resource control RRC message, or the first indication information is carried in the CSI reporting configuration Group report parameters.
  40. 如权利要求37至39中任一项所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述收发器还用于接收第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息用于指示以下一项或多项:The communication device according to any one of claims 37 to 39, wherein the transceiver is further configured to receive second instruction information, and the second instruction information is used to indicate one or more of the following:
    每个CSI上报的测量报告的组数;Number of groups of measurement reports reported by each CSI;
    通过多个CSI上报的测量报告的总组数;以及The total number of measurement reports reported through multiple CSIs; and
    通过多个CSI上报测量报告时所述CSI的个数。The number of CSIs when the measurement report is reported through multiple CSIs.
  41. 如权利要求40所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述收发器还用于发送能力信息,所述能力信息用于指示以下一项或多项:The communication device according to claim 40, wherein the transceiver is further configured to send capability information, and the capability information is used to indicate one or more of the following:
    空间接收滤波器的数量;The number of spatial receive filters;
    每个CSI上报的测量报告的最大组数;Maximum number of measurement reports reported by each CSI;
    通过多个CSI上报的测量报告的总组数的最大值;以及The maximum value of the total number of groups of measurement reports reported through multiple CSIs; and
    通过多个CSI上报测量报告时所述CSI的最大个数。The maximum number of CSIs when a measurement report is reported through multiple CSIs.
  42. 如权利要求37至41中任一项所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述收发器还用于接收第三指示信息,所述第三指示信息用于指示多个参考信号资源,所述多个参考信号资源由至少两组测量报告确定。The communication device according to any one of claims 37 to 41, wherein the transceiver is further configured to receive third indication information, and the third indication information is used to indicate multiple reference signal resources, and the The multiple reference signal resources are determined by at least two sets of measurement reports.
  43. 如权利要求42所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述多个参考信号资源与多个空间接收滤波器一一对应。The communication device according to claim 42, wherein the plurality of reference signal resources correspond to the plurality of spatial receiving filters on a one-to-one basis.
  44. 如权利要求42所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述多个参考信号资源包括第一资源组和第二资源组,其中,仅有所述第一资源组中的参考信号资源的测量结果记入波束失败次数统计。The communication device according to claim 42, wherein the plurality of reference signal resources includes a first resource group and a second resource group, and only measurement results of the reference signal resources in the first resource group are available. Record the number of beam failures.
  45. 如权利要求37至44中任一项所述的通信装置,其特征在于,每组测量报告还包括组标识,每个组标识对应一个空间接收滤波器。The communication device according to any one of claims 37 to 44, wherein each group of measurement reports further includes a group identifier, and each group identifier corresponds to a spatial receiving filter.
  46. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,包括:A communication device, comprising:
    收发器,用于接收一个或多个CSI,每个CSI包括一组或多组测量报告,每组测量报告基于一个空间接收滤波器接收到的参考信号测量得到,各组测量报告所对应的空间接收滤波器彼此各不相同;A transceiver for receiving one or more CSI, each CSI includes one or more sets of measurement reports, each set of measurement reports is obtained based on a reference signal measurement received by a space receiving filter, and the space corresponding to each set of measurement reports The receiving filters are different from each other;
    处理器,用于根据所述一个或多个CSI,确定每组测量报告对应一个空间接收滤波器,且在接收到多组测量报告的情况下,各组测量报告所对应的空间接收滤波器彼此各不相同。A processor, configured to determine that each group of measurement reports corresponds to a spatial receiving filter according to the one or more CSIs, and in the case where multiple groups of measurement reports are received, the spatial receiving filters corresponding to each group of measurement reports are mutually Different.
  47. 如权利要求46所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述收发器还用于发送第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息用于指示第一上报方式,所述第一上报方式为基于空间接收滤波器的分组上报。The communication device according to claim 46, wherein the transceiver is further configured to send first indication information, the first indication information is used to indicate a first reporting mode, and the first reporting mode is space-based The packet of the receiving filter is reported.
  48. 如权利要求46或47所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述第一指示信息携带在无线资源控制RRC消息的CSI上报配置中,或,所述第一指示信息携带在所述CSI上报配置的分组上报参数中。The communication device according to claim 46 or 47, wherein the first indication information is carried in a CSI reporting configuration of a radio resource control RRC message, or the first indication information is carried in the CSI reporting configuration Group report parameters.
  49. 如权利要求46至48中任一项所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述收发器还用于发送第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息用于指示以下一项或多项:The communication device according to any one of claims 46 to 48, wherein the transceiver is further configured to send second instruction information, and the second instruction information is used to indicate one or more of the following:
    每个CSI上报的测量报告的组数;Number of groups of measurement reports reported by each CSI;
    通过多个CSI上报的测量报告的总组数;以及The total number of measurement reports reported through multiple CSIs; and
    通过多个CSI上报测量报告时所述CSI的个数。The number of CSIs when the measurement report is reported through multiple CSIs.
  50. 如权利要求49所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述收发器还用于接收能力信息,所述能力信息用于指示以下一项或多项:The communication device according to claim 49, wherein the transceiver is further configured to receive capability information, and the capability information is used to indicate one or more of the following:
    空间接收滤波器的数量;The number of spatial receive filters;
    每个CSI上报的测量报告的最大组数;Maximum number of measurement reports reported by each CSI;
    通过多个CSI上报的测量报告的总组数的最大值;以及The maximum value of the total number of groups of measurement reports reported through multiple CSIs; and
    通过多个CSI上报测量报告时所述CSI的最大个数。The maximum number of CSIs when a measurement report is reported through multiple CSIs.
  51. 如权利要求46至50中任一项所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述收发器还用于发送第三指示信息,所述第三指示信息用于指示多个参考信号资源,所述多个参考信号资源由至少两组测量报告确定。The communication device according to any one of claims 46 to 50, wherein the transceiver is further configured to send third indication information, and the third indication information is used to indicate multiple reference signal resources, and the The multiple reference signal resources are determined by at least two sets of measurement reports.
  52. 如权利要求51所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述多个参考信号资源与多个空间接收滤波器一一对应。The communication device according to claim 51, wherein the plurality of reference signal resources are in one-to-one correspondence with a plurality of spatial receiving filters.
  53. 如权利要求51所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述多个参考信号资源包括第一资源组和第二资源组,其中,仅有所述第一资源组中的参考信号资源的测量结果记入波束失败次数统计。The communication device according to claim 51, wherein the plurality of reference signal resources include a first resource group and a second resource group, wherein only measurement results of reference signal resources in the first resource group Record the number of beam failures.
  54. 如权利要求46至53中任一项所述的通信装置,其特征在于,每组测量报告还包括组标识,每个组标识对应一个空间接收滤波器。The communication device according to any one of claims 46 to 53, wherein each group of measurement reports further includes a group identifier, and each group identifier corresponds to a spatial receiving filter.
  55. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,所述装置用于实现如权利要求1至9中任一项所述的方法。A communication device, wherein the device is configured to implement the method according to any one of claims 1 to 9.
  56. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,所述装置用于实现如权利要求10至18中任一项所述的方法。A communication device, wherein the device is used to implement the method according to any one of claims 10 to 18.
  57. 一种处理装置,其特征在于,包括处理器,所述处理器用于执行存储器中存储的计算机程序,以使得所述装置实现如权利要求1至9中任一项所述的方法。A processing device, comprising a processor, the processor is configured to execute a computer program stored in a memory, so that the device implements the method according to any one of claims 1 to 9.
  58. 一种处理装置,其特征在于,包括处理器,所述处理器用于执行存储器中存储的计算机程序,以使得所述装置实现如权利要求10至18中任一项所述的方法。A processing device, comprising a processor, which is configured to execute a computer program stored in a memory, so that the device implements the method according to any one of claims 10 to 18.
  59. 一种处理装置,其特征在于,包括:A processing device, comprising:
    存储器,用于存储计算机程序;Memory for storing computer programs;
    处理器,用于从所述存储器调用并运行所述计算机程序,以使得所述装置实现如权利要求1至9中任一项所述的方法。A processor for calling and running the computer program from the memory, so that the apparatus implements the method according to any one of claims 1 to 9.
  60. 一种处理装置,其特征在于,包括:A processing device, comprising:
    存储器,用于存储计算机程序;Memory for storing computer programs;
    处理器,用于从所述存储器调用并运行所述计算机程序,以使得所述装置实现如权利要求10至18中任一项所述的方法。A processor for calling and running the computer program from the memory, so that the apparatus implements the method according to any one of claims 10 to 18.
  61. 一种计算机可读介质,其特征在于,包括计算机程序,当所述计算机程序在计算机上运行时,使得所述计算机执行如权利要求1至9中任一项所述的方法。A computer-readable medium, comprising a computer program, which causes the computer to execute the method according to any one of claims 1 to 9 when the computer program is run on a computer.
  62. 一种计算机可读介质,其特征在于,包括计算机程序,当所述计算机程序在计算机上运行时,使得所述计算机执行如权利要求10至18中任一项所述的方法。A computer-readable medium, comprising a computer program, which causes the computer to execute the method according to any one of claims 10 to 18 when the computer program is run on a computer.
  63. 一种计算机程序产品,所述计算机程序产品包括计算机程序,当所述计算机程序在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行如权利要求1至9中任一项所述的方法。A computer program product comprising a computer program, which when executed on a computer, causes the computer to perform the method according to any one of claims 1 to 9.
  64. 一种计算机程序产品,所述计算机程序产品包括计算机程序,当所述计算机程序在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行如权利要求10至18中任一项所述的方法。A computer program product comprising a computer program that, when run on a computer, causes the computer to perform the method according to any one of claims 10 to 18.
PCT/CN2019/093497 2018-06-29 2019-06-28 Method and communication device for transmitting and receiving channel state information WO2020001577A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN201810696122.7 2018-06-29
CN201810696122.7A CN110661556B (en) 2018-06-29 2018-06-29 Method and communication device for transmitting and receiving channel state information

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2020001577A1 true WO2020001577A1 (en) 2020-01-02

Family

ID=68986265

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2019/093497 WO2020001577A1 (en) 2018-06-29 2019-06-28 Method and communication device for transmitting and receiving channel state information

Country Status (2)

Country Link
CN (1) CN110661556B (en)
WO (1) WO2020001577A1 (en)

Cited By (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN111566965A (en) * 2020-04-09 2020-08-21 北京小米移动软件有限公司 Channel state information report configuration method, device and computer readable storage medium
WO2021218923A1 (en) * 2020-04-29 2021-11-04 维沃移动通信有限公司 Beam reporting method and device
WO2022027617A1 (en) * 2020-08-07 2022-02-10 Zte Corporation Reference signaling schemes in wireless communications
US20220132517A1 (en) * 2020-10-23 2022-04-28 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Method and apparatus for partial beam failure recovery in a wireless communications system
US20220312235A1 (en) * 2021-03-24 2022-09-29 Qualcomm Incorporated Cause-oriented beam failure determination

Families Citing this family (12)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN113259984B (en) * 2020-02-12 2023-04-07 维沃移动通信有限公司 Beam reporting method, network node and terminal
WO2021174526A1 (en) * 2020-03-06 2021-09-10 Qualcomm Incorporated Default uplink multiple input multiple output transmission prior to uplink transmission configuration indication state activation
CN113382439B (en) * 2020-03-09 2022-12-13 维沃移动通信有限公司 Information reporting method, access mode determining method, terminal and network equipment
CN113543199B (en) * 2020-04-15 2023-08-22 维沃移动通信有限公司 Method for transmitting beam report, mobile terminal and network equipment
CN113949481B (en) * 2020-07-15 2023-04-18 大唐移动通信设备有限公司 Channel state information feedback method and device
CN114390580A (en) * 2020-10-20 2022-04-22 维沃移动通信有限公司 Beam reporting method, beam information determining method and related equipment
CN112533296B (en) * 2020-12-09 2024-02-02 中国联合网络通信集团有限公司 Beam-based communication processing method, device, equipment and storage medium
KR20230107299A (en) * 2021-01-14 2023-07-14 지티이 코포레이션 Systems and methods for determining beam failure recovery information
EP4391404A1 (en) * 2021-08-18 2024-06-26 Guangdong Oppo Mobile Telecommunications Corp., Ltd. Wireless communication method, first terminal device, and second terminal device
WO2023206445A1 (en) * 2022-04-29 2023-11-02 富士通株式会社 Ai monitoring apparatus and method
CN117425214A (en) * 2022-07-08 2024-01-19 上海朗帛通信技术有限公司 Method and apparatus in a node for wireless communication
CN117676666A (en) * 2022-08-11 2024-03-08 中兴通讯股份有限公司 Information transmission method, apparatus and storage medium

Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20180041319A1 (en) * 2016-08-08 2018-02-08 Futurewei Technologies, Inc. Systems and Methods for UE-Specific Beam Management for High Frequency Wireless Communication
WO2018083253A1 (en) * 2016-11-04 2018-05-11 Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) Methods and systems for beam tracking process management and indices
CN108111274A (en) * 2017-08-11 2018-06-01 中兴通讯股份有限公司 Channel state information, information sending, receiving method and device

Family Cites Families (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US10033507B2 (en) * 2014-07-28 2018-07-24 Lg Electronics Inc. Method for performing channel estimation, and apparatus therefor
US10236951B2 (en) * 2015-04-10 2019-03-19 Lg Electronics Inc. Method for reporting channel state information in wireless communication system and device therefor
WO2017188693A1 (en) * 2016-04-25 2017-11-02 엘지전자 주식회사 Method for transmitting and receiving channel state information in multi-antenna wireless communication system, and device therefor
KR20180013811A (en) * 2016-07-29 2018-02-07 아서스테크 컴퓨터 인코포레이션 Method and apparatus for channel state information report for beam operation in a wireless communication system
CN106793125B (en) * 2017-01-06 2022-10-21 宇龙计算机通信科技(深圳)有限公司 Beam configuration method and beam configuration device

Patent Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20180041319A1 (en) * 2016-08-08 2018-02-08 Futurewei Technologies, Inc. Systems and Methods for UE-Specific Beam Management for High Frequency Wireless Communication
WO2018083253A1 (en) * 2016-11-04 2018-05-11 Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) Methods and systems for beam tracking process management and indices
CN108111274A (en) * 2017-08-11 2018-06-01 中兴通讯股份有限公司 Channel state information, information sending, receiving method and device

Non-Patent Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
HUAWEI: "3GPP TSG RAN WG1 Meeting #89, R1-1708134, URL:http:// www.3gpporg/ftp/Meetings_3GPP_SYNC/RAN1/Docs", DL BEAM MANAGEMENT, 14 May 2017 (2017-05-14) *
ZTE, 3GPP TSG RAN WG1 MEETING #90-BIS, RL-1717424, 3 October 2017 (2017-10-03), Retrieved from the Internet <URL:http://www.3gpp.org/ftp/tsg_ran/WG1_RL1/TSGR1_90b/Docs> *

Cited By (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN111566965A (en) * 2020-04-09 2020-08-21 北京小米移动软件有限公司 Channel state information report configuration method, device and computer readable storage medium
WO2021218923A1 (en) * 2020-04-29 2021-11-04 维沃移动通信有限公司 Beam reporting method and device
WO2022027617A1 (en) * 2020-08-07 2022-02-10 Zte Corporation Reference signaling schemes in wireless communications
US20220132517A1 (en) * 2020-10-23 2022-04-28 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Method and apparatus for partial beam failure recovery in a wireless communications system
US20220312235A1 (en) * 2021-03-24 2022-09-29 Qualcomm Incorporated Cause-oriented beam failure determination

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN110661556A (en) 2020-01-07
CN110661556B (en) 2022-04-05

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
WO2020001577A1 (en) Method and communication device for transmitting and receiving channel state information
CN110809321B (en) Method for receiving and transmitting signal and communication device
JP6979136B2 (en) Cross-carrier spatial relationship indication for semi-persistent sounding reference signal (SP-SRS) resources
US11337189B2 (en) Terminal, network device, and communication method to improve transmission reliability
EP3648497B1 (en) Secondary cell activation methods and corresponding access network device and terminal device
EP3952419A1 (en) Secondary cell activation method and apparatus
US10925034B2 (en) Resource indication method, apparatus, and system
US20210337584A1 (en) Signal transmission method and apparatus
CN111107630B (en) Communication method and communication device
CN111756458B (en) Beam failure recovery method and communication device
CN117998381A (en) System and method for communication beam restoration
US11564213B2 (en) Communication method and communications apparatus
CN111586858A (en) Signal transmission method and communication device
TW201902156A (en) Method and apparatus for channel status information reporting in a wireless communication network
US20230254030A1 (en) Beam-based communication method and related apparatus
EP3905574A1 (en) Signal transmission method and apparatus
US11646770B2 (en) Method and apparatus for millimeter-wave MIMO mode selection
CN116134743A (en) Beam reporting method in a wireless communication system with beamforming
CN108347274A (en) A kind of method and device of the number of beams of indication feedback
WO2023208145A1 (en) Information transmission method and apparatus
WO2024032767A1 (en) Uplink transmission method and related apparatus
WO2023216025A1 (en) Methods and systems for conditional pusch skipping and pusch repetitions configuration at a user equipment
JP2021083108A (en) Method, system, and device
WO2019133042A1 (en) Methods and apparatus for using ue antenna ports declaration information in a wireless communication system

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 19827337

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 19827337

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1